F.E.

Semester – I

1
 F.E. Semester –I
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic and Multidisciplinary Education
(CBCGS-HME 2020)
B.E. (All Branches) F.E. (SEM : I/II)
Course Name : Chemistry Course Code : BSC102
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total
(100) (25) (25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR TW
Hours
3 1 2 6 5 25 75 25 25 150

IA: In-Semester Assessment - Paper Duration – 1.5 Hours

ESE: End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/ Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance/Learning Attitude (20%)
Prerequisite: 10+2 level of Science knowledge of Atomic Structure, chemical Bonding, Thermodynamics
and Electrochemistry

Course Objective: The course intends to provide a broad function in chemistry that stresses
scientific reasoning and analytical problem solving with a molecular perspective.

Course Outcomes: Upon completion of the course students will be able to:
Sr. Course Outcomes Cognitive levels of
No. attainment as per
Bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Analyze microscopic chemistry in terms of atomic orbitals, L1, L2, L3, L4
molecular orbitals and intermolecular forces.
2 Apply the knowledge of instrumental method of analysis for L1, L2, L3, L4
analysis of various samples.
3 Understand and apply principles of catalysis and its application L1, L2, L3
in maintaining green matrix of reactions.
4 Understand electromagnetic spectrum used for exciting different L1, L2, L3
molecular energy levels in various spectroscopic techniques
5 Understand and apply bulk properties and processes using L1, L2, L3
thermodynamic considerations
6 Understand the stereochemistry and determination of structures L1, L2, L3
of organic compounds

2
Detailed Syllabus (Total No. of Hours: 45):
Module Topics Hrs. Cognitive levels
No. of attainment as
per Bloom’s
Taxonomy
1.0 A. Atomic, Molecular Orbitals and Chemical Bonding 10 L1, L2, L3, L4
Schrodinger equation (No derivation), Atomic Orbital,
Shapes of s, p d and f Orbital, Hybridization of atomic
orbitals involving s,p and d orbitals Valence Bond theory
(VBT), its application and drawback, Concept of
Molecular orbital theory, Molecular orbital Diagram
(Energy level diagrams) of diatomic molecules like H2,
He2, Be2, C2, N2, O2, F2 and Ne2 (up to atomic no. 10),
Application of Molecular Orbital Theory.

B. Co-ordination chemistry and its application

Introduction to Coordination chemistry and coordination

number, Chelating agent, EDTA as chelating agent and its
application for estimating hardness of water, Hardness of
water (it’s source, unit of measurement and Numerical
based on hardness calculation) Estimation of Hardness of
water by Complexometric method, theory, Procedure,
calculation and numerical. Crystal field theory and the energy
level diagrams for transition metal ions (Tetrahedral and
Octahedral geometry) and their applications.
2.0 Instrumental Methods of Analysis 05 L1, L2, L3, L4
Introduction to Chromatography, Types of
Chromatography (Adsorption and partition
chromatography), Thin Layer Chromatography (Theory,
Principle, technique and applications), Gas
Chromatography – (Introduction, theory, instrumentation.,
working) High Performance Liquid Chromatography, –
introduction, theory, instrumentation. Interpretation of
Gas/HPLC Chromatogram and TLC plate of various
samples.
3.0 Catalysis and green chemistry 05 L1, L2
Concept and need of Green Chemistry, Principles of Green
Chemistry, Role of Catalyst in making the chemical process
Green, Introduction to Catalysis, Classification of
Catalysis, Types of Catalyst, Theory of Heterogeneous
Catalysis (Adsorption Theory), Catalytic Converters,
Greener Lewis Acids, Phase Transfer Catalysis and its
applications, C–C Bond Formation by Suzuki, Suzuki
Miyaura, Stille, Negishi, Heck reaction, Hazard Reduction
by making use of Solid Acid/Bases catalyst.

3
4.0 Electrochemistry and its Application 09 L1, L2, L3

Introduction, Concept of electrode potential, Concept of

Electrochemical cell, EMF of Cell, Cell potentials by
Nernst equation, Relation of free energy with EMF of Cell,
Numerical based on EMF and its feasibility prediction.

Corrosion:

Introduction of Corrosion, Fundamental reason, Mechanism of

corrosion-i) Electrochemical/Wet Corrosion mechanism a)
Evolution of hydrogen gas and b) Absorption of oxygen gas,
ii)Direct Chemical/Dry/ Atmospheric Corrosion a) Due to
oxygen b) Due to other gases Factors affecting the rate of
corrosion, Types of corrosion-Galvanic cell corrosion,
Concentration cell corrosion (Differential aeration principle)
Pitting Corrosion, Stress corrosion, intergranular corrosion,
waterline corrosion methods to minimize the corrosion- I)
Material selection and Proper design, II) Cathodic protection i)
Sacrificial anodic protection ii) Impressed current method
III)Anodic protection, IV) Metallic coating i) Anodic coating
(Galvanization) ii) Cathodic coating (Tinning)

5.0 Spectroscopic techniques and applications 08

Electromagnetic radiation, electromagnetic spectrum, L1, L2, L3
Interaction of electromagnetic radiation with matter, Beer-
Lambert’s law ( mathematical expression and derivation,
Numerical expected), UV Visible Spectrophotometer:
Principle, Instrumentation (Single beam and double beam
spectrophotometer), and Application. Vibrational
Spectroscopy: Principle, Instrumentation and Application.

6.0 Stereochemistry 08 L1, L2, L3

Introduction of Stereochemistry, Optical Isomerism,
Optical Activity, Elements of symmetry, Specific
Rotation, (Numerical Based on Specific rotation)
Chirality/Asymmetry, Optical isomerism in tartaric acid
and 2,3 dihydroxy butanoic acid, Enantiomers, Molecules
with two similar and dissimilar chiral-centers,
Diastereoisomers, meso structures, racemic mixture.
Representation by flying wedge, Fischer and Newman
projection. Nomenclature of Stereoisomers: D&L system,
R-S Configuration Geometrical Isomerism, E-Z
nomenclature, Conformation analysis of alkanes (ethane
and n-butane); Relative stability with energy diagram

List of Practical/ Experiments:

4
Experiment Category of
Practical/ Experiment Topic Hrs. RBT Levels
No. Experiment
To study the effect of the change in
temperature or viscosity of a lubricating
1 2 L1, L2, L3
oil by using a redwood viscometer no. 1.

Basic Determination of surface tension using

2 Experiments Drop number method by Stalagmometer 2 L1, L2, L3
(Based on Separation of organic binary mixture
3 measurements 2 L1, L2, L3
using Thin layer chromatography
of properties)
Determination of Total hardness of water
by complexometric titration using EDTA
4 2 L1, L2, L3

Determination of Permanent hardness of

L1, L2, L3,
5 water by complexometric titration using 2
L4
EDTA
Advance Estimation Saponification value of an
Experiments L1, L2, L3,
6 lubricating oil. 2
(Based on L4
Volumetric
Estimation of Acid value of used L1, L2, L3,
7 Analysis) 2
lubricating oil. L4
To determine the turbidity of given L1, L2, L3,
8 2
unknown water sample. L4
Synthesis of a Meta dinitrobenzene (drug L1, L2, L3,
9 4
intermediate). L4, L5, L6
Design Based
Experiments To determine λmax and Molar extinction
L1, L2, L3,
10 coefficient of given solution of KMnO4 4
L4, L5, L6
using Colorimeter.
Project Based To determine λmax and Molar extinction
11 Experiments- coefficient of given solution of CuSO4 –
Group NH3 complex using Colorimeter.
Activity)
Removal of Hardness of water by using
(Students
12 should Ion Exchange Colum
complete any
one project Inorganic Preparation: Preparation of L1, L2, L3,
13 6
Based Tetraamine coppe (II) Sulphate L4, L5, L6
experiment
from the list or Determination of Percentage of Iron in
any other Plain Carbon Steel.
14 project in
discussion
with Faculty
in-Charge)

5
 Total 30

Books and References:

Sr.
Name of Book Author Name Edition
No.
1 Stereochemistry, conformation and P.S Kalsi 10th
Mechanism
2 Physical Chemistry I & II Dr. Hrishikesh Chatterjee 2nd
3 Physical Chemistry Atkins 8th
4 Principle of Instrumental Analysis Skoog, Holler Gauch 7th
5 Vogels Textbook of quantitative chemical Vogel 8th
Analysis
6 Organic Chemistry Morrison Boyd 7th

Online References:
Modules
Sr. No Website Name URL
Covered
1. Free Open Source simulator http://www.hplcsimulator.org/ M-2
Project
2. Thin Layer Chromatography https://elearning.cpp.edu/learning-objects/organic- M-2
Simulation chemistry/tlc/?page=simulation.html
3. Gas Chromatography: https://www.gc-sos.com/download M-2
Simulation & Optimization
software
4. IIT B Virtual Lab (Column http://vlab.amrita.edu/?sub=2&brch=191&sim=34 M-2
Chromatography) 1&cnt=1
5. Simulation of Uv-Visible https://terpconnect.umd.edu/~toh/models/UVVis.h M-5
Photometer tml
6. IIT B Virtual Lab (CFSE http://vlab.amrita.edu/?sub=2&brch=193&sim=61 M-1
Calculation) 0&cnt=1
7. IIT B Virtual Lab http://vlab.amrita.edu/?sub=2&brch=193&sim=15 M-1
(Hardness of Water) 48&cnt=1
8. IIT B Virtual Lab ( UV- http://vlab.amrita.edu/?sub=2&brch=190&sim=33 M-5
Visible Spectroscopy) 8&cnt=1
9. IIT B Virtual Lab ( EMF http://vlab.amrita.edu/?sub=2&brch=190&sim=36 M-4
Measurement) 1&cnt=1
10. IIT B Virtual Lab (IR http://ccnsb06- M-5
Spectroscopy) iiith.vlabs.ac.in/Experiments.html?domain=%20C
hemical%20Sciences

6
 F.E. Semester –I
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic and Multidisciplinary Education
(CBCGS-HME 2020)
B.E. (All Branches) F.E. (SEM : I)
Course Name : Mathematics-I Course Code : BSC103
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total
(100) (00) (25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR TW
Hours
4 1 - 5 5 25 75 - 25 125

IA: In-Semester Assessment - Paper Duration – 1.5 Hours

ESE: End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/ Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance/Learning Attitude (20%)
Prerequisite: 10+2 level Mathematics

Course Objective: The Course intends to develop the basic Mathematical skills of
engineering students that are imperative for effective understanding of engineering subjects.
The topics introduced will serve as basic tools for specialized studies in many fields of
engineering and technology.

Course Outcomes: Upon completion of the course students will be able to:

SN Course Outcomes Cognitive levels of

attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy

1 Apply the fundamentals of calculus L1, L2

2 Apply the concept of partial derivatives in its application L1, L2, L3
part.
3 Apply the concepts of complex numbers and sequence- L1, L2, L3
series
4 Evaluate the rank of a matrix and its application to solve the L1
system of equations.

5 Apply the concept of Gamma and Beta function to evaluate L1, L2, L3
the area and volume
6 Identify analytic functions and methods for evaluating it. L1, L2, L3

7
Detailed Syllabus (Total No. of Hours: 60):
Module Topics Lectures Cognitive levels of
No. attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
1 Calculus-I 7
Mean value theorems, Taylor’s and L1, L2
Maclaurin series; Indeterminate forms
and (L’Hospital’s rule)
(Self Study: Indeterminate forms using
series expansion)
2 Multivariable Calculus (Differentiation) 11 L1, L2, L3
Partial derivatives(first and higher
order),composite function, Total derivative,
Maxima, minima and saddle points;
Method of Lagrange multipliers, Gradient,
directional derivative
(Self Study: Tangent plane and normal line,
curl and divergence)
3 Complex Number and Sequence, Series 9 L1, L2, L3
Root of an equation using De’Moivres
theorem, Hyperbolic functions, Inverse
Hyperbolic functions, Logarithm of
complex number, Convergence of
sequence and series, D’Alembert’s ratio
test, Cauchy’s nth root test
(Self Study: Separation into real and
imaginary parts)
4 Matrices I 11 L1
Rank, Rank-Nullity theorem (without
proof), Row-Echelon form, Normal form,
Non-Homogeneous system of linear
algebraic equations, symmetric, skew-
symmetric, Hermitian, Skew-Hermitian
and Orthogonal Matrices
(Self Study: Self Study: Unitary Matrices,
Homogeneous system of linear algebraic
equations)
5 Calculus-II L1, L2, L3
Improper Integrals (Review), Beta and 11
Gamma functions and their properties;
Application of single integral in the
evaluation of Surface area and volumes of
revolutions.
(Self Study:Curve Tracing)
6 Complex Variable – Differentiation 11 L1, L2, L3
Differentiation, Cauchy-Riemann
equations, analytic functions, harmonic

8
 functions, Milne-Thompson method,
finding harmonic conjugate; elementary
analytic functions (exponential,
trigonometric, logarithm) and their
properties
(Self Study: Orthogonal Trajectory)

Books and References:

SN Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

1 Calculus and G.B. Thomas Pearson 9th Edition 2002
Analytic geometry and R.L. Finney
2 Advanced Erwin Kreyszig John Wiley & 9th Edition 2006
Engineering Sons
Mathematics
3 Engineering Veerarajan T Tata McGraw- 3rd Edition 2008
Mathematics for Hill, New Delhi
first year
4 Higher Ramana B.V Tata McGraw 11th 2010
Engineering Hill, New Delhi Edition
Mathematics
5 Higher B.S. Grewal Khanna 36th 2010
Engineering Publishers Edition
Mathematics
6 A text book of N.P. Bali and Laxmi 9th Edition 2008
Engineering Manish Goyal Publications
Mathematics

Online References:

Module
Sr. No Website Name URL
Covered
1. Openstax https://openstax.org/ M1-M6
2 Lumanlearning .com https://courses.lumanlearning.com M1-M6
3 Engineering Mathematics Tutorial - GeeksforGeeks https://www.geeksforgeeks.org/ M1-M6

9
 F.E. Semester –I
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic and Multidisciplinary Education
(CBCGS-HME 2020)
B.E. (All Branches) F.E. (SEM : I/II)
Course Name : Programming for Problem Solving Course Code : ESC103
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total
(100) (25) (25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR TW
Hours
3 -- 2 5 4 25 75 25 25 150

IA: In-Semester Assessment - Paper Duration – 1.5 Hours

ESE: End Semester Examination - Paper Duration – 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/ Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance/Learning Attitude (20%)
Prerequisite: Fundamental Knowledge of Computer, Basics of Mathematics

Course Objective: This course aims to provide an exposure in developing an algorithm,

flowchart and writing efficient codes for user defined problem. The course will be taught
using C programming language.

Course Outcomes: Upon completion of the course students will be able to:

SN Course Outcomes Cognitive levels of

attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy

1 Demonstrate the fundamentals of computer programming L1, L2

and algorithm.
2 Use of primitive data types in a computer programming L1, L2, L3
3 Apply conditional branching and looping to solve problems. L1, L2, L3

4 Make use of functions and storage classes to implement L1, L2, L3, L4
programs
5 Understand and apply non primitive data types in computer L1, L2, L3
programming
6 Utilize structure and pointers to solve problems L1, L2, L3

10
Detailed Syllabus (Total No. of Hours: 45):

Module Topics Lectures Cognitive levels of

No. attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
1 Introduction to Programming, 04 L1, L2
Algorithm
and Flowchart
Introduction to components of a computer
system, Programming Fundamentals,
Algorithm, Three construct of Algorithm
and flowchart: Sequence, Decision
(Selection)and
Repetition, Characteristics of good algorithm.
2 Fundamentals of C-Programming 06 L1, L2, L3
Character Set, Identifiers and keywords,
Data types, Constants, Variables.
Operators-Arithmetic, Relational,
Logical, Assignment, Bitwise and
Conditional.
Data Input and Output –printf( ), scanf( ),
putchar( ), getchar( ), puts( ), gets( ),
Structure of C program.
Expression, statements, Library Functions,
Preprocessor.
3 Conditional Branching & Loops 10 L1, L2, L3
Branching - if statement, if-else
Statement, Multiway decision.
Looping – while, do-while, for
Nested control structure- Switch statement,
Continue statement, Break statement
4 Functions and Parameters 07 L1, L2, L3, L4
Function -Introduction to Function,
Definition & Declaration of Function,
accessing a Function, call by value,
Recursion.
Storage Classes –Auto , Extern , Static, Register
5 Arrays and Strings 10 L1, L2, L3
Array-Concepts, Declaration, Definition,
Accessing array element, One-dimensional
and Multidimensional array.
String- Basics of String, Library Functions.
6 Structure, Pointers & Files 08 L1, L2, L3
Pointer: Introduction to Pointers,
Pointer Variables, Dereferencing
Pointer, Void Pointer, Pointer
Arithmetic, Pointers and Array, Pointer
to Structure, Dynamic Memory
Allocation.
File Handling: Types of File, File operations,
Processing File

11
List of Practical/ Experiments:

Cognitive
levels of
Practical Type of
Practical/Experiment Topic Hrs attainment as
No. Experiment
per Bloom’s
Taxonomy
Basic A) Design an algorithm and Draw a Flowchart to 04 L1, L2, L3
Experiments calculate area of circle.
B) Design an algorithm and Draw a Flowchart to
calculate gross salary of an employee [using
1 formula: gross_sal = basic_sal+hra+da].
C) Design an algorithm and Draw a Flowchart to
find the sum of ‘n’ natural numbers
D) Design an algorithm and Draw a Flowchart to
find the largest among three numbers
A) Design an algorithm, Draw a Flowchart and 02 L1, L2, L3
implement a C Program to Perform basic
arithmetic operations (Addition, Subtraction,
Multiplication, Division) on two variables.
Input the variable values from user.
2
B) Design an algorithm, Draw a Flowchart and
implement a C Program to test Relational,
logical, and Assignment operators. Read
necessary inputs from the user using Input
output functions.
A) Write a Program to generate the result (display 02 L1, L2, L3
grade) if subject marks are given by user.
B) Write a Program to find real roots of a quadratic
3
equation. Read all necessary inputs using input
methods. Display roots and appropriate
messages for false conditions.
Design A) Write a Program to find sum of following series. 02 L1, L2, L3
Experiments 1 + 1/2 + 1/3 + 1/4 +... + 1/n
B) Write a Program to print the following pattern:
4 55555
4444
333
22
1
A) Write a Program to generate the Armstrong 04
numbers between the given ranges. L1, L2, L3
B) Design an algorithm, Draw a Flowchart and
5
implement a C Program to define function
isprime(num) that accepts an integer argument
and returns 1 if the argument is prime, a 0

12
 otherwise. Write a C program that invokes this
function to generate prime numbers between the
given ranges.
C) Write a recursive function to find the factorial
of a number, n! Defined by fact(n)=1, if n=0.
Otherwise fact (n)=n*fact(n-1).
D) Write a Program to Display user entered number
in words. Ex. 5274 Five Two Seven Four. Read
the number as input using input function.
A) Write a Program to cyclically rotate the 04
elements in an array. Program should accept a L1, L2, L3
choice in which direction to rotate i.e. left or
6 right. Depending on choice it should perform
cyclic rotation.
B) Write a program to sort the given element of an
array in ascending/descending order.
A) Write a program to find the transpose of a given 04
mxn matrix. L1, L2, L3
B) Write a Program that reads two matrices A (m x
n ) and B(p x q ) and Compute the product A and
B. Read matrix A and matrix B in row major
order and in column major order respectively.
7
Print both the input matrices and resultant
matrix with suitable headings and output should
be in matrix format only. Program must check
the compatibility of orders of the matrices for
multiplication. Report appropriate message in
case of incompatibility.
A) Write a Program that Implements string copy 02
operation STRCOPY (str1, str2) that copies a L1, L2, L3
string str1 to another string str2 without using
8 library function.
B) Write a Program which accepts a sentence and
counts the frequency of vowels, consonants,
digits and special Symbols.
A) A sport club of cricket needs to maintain data 04
about players. Description of it is given below. L1, L2, L3
Club want to maintain player’s name, age, no of
matches played, no of runs, and average. For
above description declare a structure and
Display data in the descending order of number
of runs made. Implement a C Program for above
9
problem.
B) Implement a C Program to define structure
‘EMPLOYEE’ to Store Employee Details like
(E_Id, Name, Salary) Create nested structure
ADDRESS in EMPLOYEE to store the address
information of an employee like (HouseNo,
City, Pin). Display The Employee Details.

13
 A) Implement a C Program to accept two numbers 02
from the user and swap them. Pass the values to L1, L2, L3
be swapped to the function using call by
10 reference method.
B) Implement a C Program to accept and display
set of 10 numbers in an array (Use pointers to
array concept)
30
Total

Books and References:

SN Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

nd
1 MASTERING C K. R. Venugopal and McGraw 2 Edition 2006
Sudeep R. Prasad Hill
2 Programming in E Balaguruswamy McGraw 8th Edition 2018
ANSI C Hill
3 Programming in C Pradeep Dey and Oxford 2nd Edition 2011
Manas Gosh University
Press
4 Let Us C Yashwant Kanetkar BPB 16th Edition 2018

5 Data Structures Aaron M. Pearson 7th Edition 2009

using C Tenenbaum

Online References:

Sr.No. Website Name URL Modules

Covered
1 Javapoint https://www.javatpoint.com/c-programming-language-tutorial M1 – M6
2 Programiz https://www.programiz.com/c-programming M1 – M6
3 Tutorials Point http://www.tutorialspoint.com/cprogramming/c_overview.htm M1 – M6

14
 F.E. Semester –I
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic and Multidisciplinary Education
(CBCGS-HME 2020)
B.E. (All Branches) F.E. (SEM : I)
Course Name : Engineering Graphics & Design Course Code : ESC102
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total
(100) (25) (25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR TW
Hours
2 - 4 6 4 25 75 25 25 150

IA: In-Semester Assessment - Paper Duration – 1.5 Hours

ESE: End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/ Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance/Learning Attitude (20%)
Prerequisite: Basic geometrical terminology and simple constructional procedures of plane, solids and
engineering curves

Course Objective: The Course intends to introduce the universal language of engineers for
effective communication through drafting exercises of geometrical solids along with the use
of computer aided drafting software.

Course Outcomes: Upon completion of the course students will be able to:

SN Course Outcomes Cognitive levels

of attainment as
per Bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Use drawing instruments and apply standard dimensioning L1, L2, L3
system to construct engineering curves like Ellipse, parabola,
hyperbola Cycloid, Involutes by different methods. Learners
will also be able to use the basics software toolbars such as
Draw, Modify, Dimension etc.
2 Visualize and draw/construct the different types of lines and L1, L2, L3
planes inclined to both reference planes.
3 Represent 3D solid object on 2D plane with different angle of L1, L2, L3
view. They will also be able to read the hidden parts as per
different types of cutting plane. Learners will also be able to
create computer-aided geometric design in 2D form with CAD
software
4 Know different types of standard solids and visualize projection L1, L2, L3
of solid inclined to both the reference planes.

15
 5 Visualize sectional view of solids cut by different types of L1, L2, L3
cutting planes and also learn the method to develop the lateral
surfaces of sectioned solids
6 Read and interpret the given 2-D views and convert it into the L1, L2, L3
3D Isometric view. Learners will also be able to create
computer-aided geometric design in 3D form with CAD
software

Detailed Syllabus (Total No. of Hours: 30):

Cognitive levels of
Module
Topics Lectures attainment as per
No.
Bloom’s Taxonomy
01 Introduction to Engineering Graphics & 05 L1, L2, L3
Design
Principles of Engineering Graphics and their
significance, usage of Drawing instruments,
lettering, Dimensioning, Cycloid and Involute;
Scales–Plain, Diagonal and Vernier Scales
*Computer Graphics
Engineering Graphics Software; Listing the
computer technologies that impact on
graphical communication, Demonstrating
knowledge of the theory of CAD software
[such as: The Menu System, Tool bars
(Standard, Object Properties, Draw, Modify
and Dimension), Drawing Area (Background,
Crosshairs, Coordinate System), Dialog boxes
and windows, Shortcut menus (Button Bars),
The Command Line (where applicable), The
Status Bar, Different methods of zoom as used
in CAD, Select and erase objects.

02 Projection of Points, Lines and Planes 05 L1, L2, L3

Projections of Points and lines inclined to both
the reference planes; Projections of planes
inclined to both the reference planes-
Auxiliary Planes. Location of horizontal and
vertical traces.(Note: No side view of line)

03 # Orthographic Projections 04 L1, L2, L3

Principles of Orthographic Projections-
Conventions- Draw the orthographic views of
geometrical solids, objects from industry and
dwellings.(1st and 3rd angle method of
projection)

16
 # Sectional Orthographic Projections
Draw the sectional orthographic views of
geometrical solids, objects from industry and
dwellings
*Annotations, layering & other functions
Applying dimensions to objects, applying
annotations to drawings; Setting up and use of
Layers, layers to create drawings, Create, edit
and use customized layers; Changing line
lengths through modifying existing lines
(extend/ lengthen); Printing documents to
paper using the print command; orthographic
projection techniques; Drawing annotation,
Computer-aided design (CAD) software
modeling of parts and assemblies

04 Projections of Regular Solids 06 L1, L2, L3

Solid (Prism, Cylinder, Pyramid, Cone)
inclined to both the Planes @ Floor plans that
include: windows, doors, and fixtures such as
WC, bath, sink, shower, etc.

05 Sections and Sectional Views of Right 05 L1, L2, L3

Angular Solids
Section views of Prism, Cylinder, Pyramid,
Cone-Use change of position or Auxiliary plane
method for True Shape of Section; Development
of surfaces of Right Regular Solids-Pyramid
and Cone;( Note: only cutting plane AIP and
AVP will be considered)

06 # Isometric Projections 05 L1, L2, L3

Principles of Isometric projection– Isometric
Scale, Isometric Views, Conventions;
Isometric Views of lines, Planes, Simple and
compound Solids; Conversion of Isometric
Views to Orthographic Views and Vice-versa
Conventions.
*Customization & CAD Drawing
Consisting of set up of the drawing page and
the printer, including scale settings, setting up
of units and drawing limits; ISO and ANSI
standards for coordinate dimensioning;
Orthographic constraints, Snap to objects
manually and automatically; Producing
drawings by using various coordinate input

17
 entry methods to draw straight lines, Applying
various ways of drawing circles
*Introduction to 3D drawing in Graphics
software
*Demonstration of a simple team design
project
Creation of engineering models and their
presentation in standard 2D blue print form

@ - to be covered only as a part of Term-Work

* - to be covered during Practical

Suggested List of Practical/ Experiments:

Practical Type of Practical/ Experiment Topic Hrs. Cognitive levels

Number Experiment of attainment as
per Bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Basic Engineering Curves 02 L1, L2, L3
Experiments
2 Projection of Lines 02 L1, L2, L3
3 Projection of Solids 04 L1, L2, L3

4 Section of Solids 04 L1, L2, L3

5 Development of Lateral Surfaces 04 L1, L2, L3
6 Orthographic Projections 04 L1, L2, L3
7 Sectional Orthographic 04 L1, L2, L3
Projections
8 Isometric Views (Flat Surface) 02 L1, L2, L3

9 Isometric Views (Curved 04 L1, L2, L3

Surface)
10 Design Basics of CAD Software 04 L1, L2
Experiments
11 Orthographic Projections on 06 L1, L2, L3
CAD Software
12 Sectional Orthographic 06 L1, L2, L3
Projections on CAD Software
13 Reading Orthographic 04 L1, L2, L3
Projections on CAD Software
14 Isometric Views on CAD 06 L1, L2, L3
Software
15 Introduction to 3-D 04 L1, L2

18
 Total 60

Books and References:

SN Title Authors Publisher Year

1 Engineering Drawing Bhatt N.D., Panchal Charotar Publishing 2014
V.M. & Ingle P.R House
2 Engineering Drawing Shah, M.B. & Rana Pearson education. 2008
and Computer Graphics B.C
3 Engineering Graphics Agrawal B. & TMH Publication 2012
Agrawal C. M
4 Text book on Narayana, K.L. & P Sci-tech Publishers
Engineering Drawing Kannaiah 2008

Online References:
Module
Sr. No. Website Name URL
covered
1 Bharatskills.Gov https://www.google.com/url?sa=t&source=web&rct=j&url=https:/ M1-M6
/bharatskills.gov.in/pdf/E_books/Engineering_Drawing_1st_Sem_
Final.pdf&ved=2ahUKEwiDu7bWyIPsAhXHyzgGHcszBSsQFjA
AegQIAhAB&usg=AOvVaw2O9fIhYnp73593X8_Q8mW2
2 IIT-D https://www.google.com/url?sa=t&source=web&rct=j&url=http:// M1-M6
web.iitd.ac.in/~achawla/public_html/201/lectures/sp46.pdf&ved=2
ahUKEwiA1vzfyYPsAhX5H7cAHec1DxUQFjAMegQIBBAB&u
sg=AOvVaw2wKQuj2zCOK9jNoREpOoAl
3 NCTM https://www.nctm.org/Classroom- M6
Resources/Illuminations/Interactives/Isometric-Drawing-Tool/

19
 F.E. Semester –I
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic and Multidisciplinary Education
(CBCGS-HME 2020)
B.E. (All Branches) F.E. (SEM : I)
Course Name : Workshop/ Manufacturing Practices - I Course Code : ESC105
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Theory Practical/Oral Term Work
Hours Per Week Total
(100) (25) (00)
Contact
Theory Tutorial Practical Credits IA ESE PR TW
Hours

1 - 2 3 2 15 35 25 - 75

IA: In-Semester Assessment - Paper Duration – 1 Hour

ESE: End Semester Examination - Paper Duration – 2 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/ Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance/Learning Attitude (20%)
Prerequisite: Basic knowledge of Manufacturing Techniques

Course Objective: The course intends to give exposure to different Manufacturing Practices
/ Techniques and thereby understand how to fabricate components using different materials.
Also it is important to have basic knowledge of Assembling and dismantling of different
components.

Course Outcomes: Upon completion of the course students will be able to:

Sr. Course Outcomes Cognitive levels of

No attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
CO1 Identify tools, equipment and safety rules of workshop & L1, L2
manufacturing practice
CO2 Understand tools and process of carpentry, wood turning L1, L2
machine.
CO3 Identify the terms used for plastic moulding, metal casting L1, L2
and glass cutting.
CO4 Understand the terms on additive manufacturing and CNC’s L1, L2
Machining.
CO5 Identify the types of welding, plumbing process and its L1, L2
different joints.
CO6 Understand the various equipment for electrical and L1, L2
electronics.

20
Detailed Syllabus (Total No. of Hours: 15):

Cognitive levels of
Module attainment as per
Topics Lectures
No. Bloom’s
Taxonomy
01 Manufacturing Methods- Metal casting, 03 L1, L2
forming, machining, joining, advanced
manufacturing methods

02 Carpentry, Fitting operations & Power 03 L1, L2

tools
03 Plastic molding, Glass cutting 02 L1, L2

04 CNC machining, Additive manufacturing 03 L1, L2

05 Welding (Arc Welding & Gas Welding), 02 L1, L2

Brazing
06 Electrical & Electronics 02 L1, L2

Suggested List of Practical/ Experiments:

Practical Practical/ Experiment Topic Hrs. Cognitive levels

Number of attainment as
per Bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Fitting Shop 16 L1, L2
2 Plumbing Job 14 L1, L2, L3
Total 30

Books and References:

SN Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

1 Elements of Hajra Choudhury Media 1/2 2008 &
Workshop S.K., Hajra promoters and 2010
Technology Choudhury A.K. and publishers
Nirjhar Roy S.K private limited,
Mumbai
2 Manufacturing Kalpakjian S. And Pearson 4
Engineering and Steven S. Schmid education. 2002
Technology

21
 3 Manufacturing Gowri P. Hariharan Pearson -
Technology and A. Suresh Babu Education 2008

4 Processes and Roy A. Lindberg Prentice Hall 4

Materials of India 1998
Manufacture

5 Manufacturing Rao P.N Tata McGraw - 2017

Technology Hill House

Online References:
Module
Sr. No. Website Name URL
covered
1 Plastic process https://www.pds.gov.in/downloads/PLASTIC_PROCESSING_T M-3
ECHNIQUE.pdf
2 Additive https://additivemanufacturing.com/basics/ M-4
Manufacturing
3 Welding & https://www.lucasmilhaupt.com/EN/Brazing-Academy/Brazing- M-5
Brazing vs-Welding.htm

22
 F.E. Semester – I
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic and Multidisciplinary Education
(CBCGS-HME 2020)
B.E. (All Branches) F.E. (SEM : I/II)
Course Name: Professional Skills – II (Aptitude & Logic
Course Code : HME-PS101
Building)
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Theory
Hours Per Week Total
(100)
Integrated Presentation Report
Theory
Contact (50) (25)
Theory Tutorial and Credits IA ESE
Hours
Practice
(ITP) 75
-- -- 02 02 01 -- -- 50 25
IA: In-Semester Assessment - Paper Duration - NA
ESE: End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - NA
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/ Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance/Learning Attitude (20%)
Prerequisite: Computer Basics, fundamental knowledge of Mathematics

Course Objective: This course aims to build a solid foundation for programming by
learning basic logic and exploring how logic forms the foundation of computer programs.

Course Outcomes: Upon completion of the course students will be able to:

SN Course Outcomes Cognitive levels

of attainment as
per Bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 The basics of critical thinking L1, L2
2 How to break down problems into simpler tasks L1, L2, L3
3 How to use an algorithm to solve problems L1, L2, L3
4 Develop an action plan to implement the best solution L1, L2, L3
5 Ability to describe computer programs (e.g. recursive L1, L2, L3, L4
functions) in a formal mathematical manner
6 Define sets using the list or set builder notation and relate L1, L2, L3
symbolic laws of logic to determine the truth value of
unquantified sentences using logical rules.

23
 Detailed Syllabus (Total No. of Hours: 30):
Module Topics Hrs Cognitive levels
No. of attainment as
per Bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Introduction to Computers L1
Computer Systems, Computer Languages, Software
05
Development, Operating System, Number Systems and
theirconversion, Introduction to Scratch

2 Logic Building Techniques L1, L2, L3

04
Different Techniques to improve logic- Keep
Moving, Face new problem, Check solutions by
others, Work on problems Crypt arithmetic
Problems, Pseudocode and Flowchart

3 Critical thinking and logical reasoning L1, L2, L3

Critical Thinking: What does it mean to
06
think critically? An overview of definition,
induction, and deduction, Computer
programming and logical thinking
Logical Reasoning: Errors in reasoning; verbal
reasoning; analogy problems, lateral thinking
4 Greedy and Dynamic Techniques L1, L2, L3
Problem definition, Problem decomposition,
05
Abstraction, Greedy Method, Divide and Conquer.

5 Searching and Sorting Techniques L1, L2, L3, L4,

L5
Searching Techniques: Linear Search,
06
Binary Search
Sorting Techniques: Selection, Insertion,
Merge, Quick Sort
Hashing Techniques: Linear Probing, Quadratic
Probing and Double Hashing
6 Set Theory and Propositional Logic L1, L2, L3
Introduction, operations on sets, Examples on set
04
theory Truth Tables and Boolean Algebra, Tautology,
Contradiction

Books and References:

SN Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

1 Think Smarter: Critical Michael Kallet Wiley 1st 2014
Thinking to Improve Edition
Problem-Solving and
Decision-Making Skills

24
 2 How to Solve it By Computer R. G. Dromy Pearson 1st 2006
Education Edition
3 Computational Thinking Karl Beecher BCS, The 1st 2017
Chartered Edition
Institute for IT
4 A First Course in Michael L. Wiley 1st 2015
Mathematical Logic and Set O'Leary Edition
Theory
5 Introduction to Algorithm Thomas Corman PHI 3rd 2010
Edition

Online References:

Module
Sr. No. Website Name URL
covered

www.tutorialspoint. https://www.tutorialspoint.com/basics_of_computers/basics_of_
1 M1
com computers_introduction.htm

https://www.indeed.com/career-advice/career-
2 www.indeed.com M2
development/strengthen-logical-thinking-skills
www.plato.stanford.
3 https://plato.stanford.edu/entries/critical-thinking/ M3
edu
www.geeksforgeeks https://www.geeksforgeeks.org/greedy-approach-vs-dynamic-
4 M4
.org programming/
https://www.thevect
5 https://www.thevectorimpact.com/problem-solving-techniques/ M5
orimpact.com
http://pfister.ee.duk
6 http://pfister.ee.duke.edu/courses/ece586/notes_ch1 M6
e.edu

25
 F.E. Semester – I
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic and Multidisciplinary Education
(CBCGS-HME 2020)
B.E. (All Branches) F.E. (SEM : I)
Course Name: Activity Based Learning 1 Course Code: HME-ABL 101
(Yoga Practice & Society Outreach-I)
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Presentation Report Total
(00) (50) (25)
Theory Tutorial Activity Contact Credits IA ESE
Course Hours
(AC) 75
- - 2 2 1 - - 50 25

The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/ Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance/Learning Attitude (20%)
Prerequisite: Social awareness

Course Objective: The Course intends to understand the importance of physical and mental
fitness by participating in activities related to self-development and community building.

Course Outcomes: Upon completion of the course students will be able to:

SN Course Outcomes Cognitive levels

of attainment as
per Bloom’s
Taxonomy
Demonstrate yogic exercises such as basic kriyas and asanas with ease L1, L2, L3
1
Demonstrate yogic exercises such as pranayama and mudras for well L1, L2, L3
2 being

Understand the socio-economic conditions of community in which L1, L2

3 they work. Identify the needs and problems of the community and
involve them in day to day problem-solving

Develop competence required for group-living and sharing of L1, L2, L3

4 responsibilities. Acquire leadership qualities and democratic attitudes.

5 Develop capacity to meet health related emergencies and natural L1, L2, L3
disasters and practice national integration and social harmony

26
Detailed Syllabus (Total No. of Hours: 30):

Module Topics Hrs Cognitive levels of

No. attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
Orientation: 06 L1, L2, L3
• Discussions on Healthy Diet plan
• Impact of Daily routine on Health
1
• Discussions on Physical Fitness plan
Introduction about physical fitness:
• Jogging & Running
Introduction to Yoga, Meditation and its benefits, basic 05 L1, L2, L3
exercises, basic asanas (sitting postures): Bhadrasan,
2
Butterfly, Paschimottanasan, Vakrasan, Vajrasan,
Shashakasan, Ushtrasan etc. along with practice session
Demonstration and Practice session
Introduction to basic asanas (sleeping postures): 05 L1, L2, L3
3
Shalabhasan Bhujangasan, Dhanurasan etc. along with
practice session, Surya Namaskar
Demonstration and Practice session
Orientation: Introductory Lecture, Group discussion on 04 L1
Domain (Health), Discussion on activities, Group
4
formation (6 Groups consisting of 5 students each).
Poster/Slogan: Selection of topic, Placards, Poster (A3
size), Poster/Placards Presentation.
Survey: Questionnaire preparation, Community 06 L1, L2, L3
interaction, Data collection
5
Impact: Use of technology in Compilation of collected
data, Analysis of data, Predicted Outcomes.
Presentation: Presentation based on activities performed 04 L1, L2, L3
6
under ABL -I
Demonstration

27
 Books and References:

SN Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

1 Light on Yoga B. K. S. Iyengar Allen & Unwin - -

2 Yoga for Everyone: B.K.S. Iyengar Dorling Kindersley - 2018

A Step-by-Step
Illustrated Guide to
Iyengar Yoga
3 Social Work The Mark Doel Routledge Taylor & - -
Basics Francis Group
4 Handbook of Sarah Gehlert & John Wiley & 2nd -
Health Social Work Teri Browne Edition
Sons
5 101 Careers in Dr. Jessica A. Ritter, Springer Publishing - -
Social Work, BSW, MSSW Company
Second Edition
6 National Service M. B. Dilshad Trust Publications - 2001
Scheme in India

Online References:

Module
Sr. No. Website Name URL
covered
1 Coursera https://www.coursera.org/lecture/engineering-health-yoga- M1-M3
physiology/welcome-and-introductions-b4dTw
2 Coursera https://www.coursera.org/lecture/engineering-health-yoga- M1-M3
physiology/yoga-and-nervous-system-health-aFD8h
3 Pinterest https://www.pinterest.ca/doyogawithme/ M1-M3
4 NCBI .https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK222137/ M4-M6
5 Study.Com https://study.com/academy/lesson/health-services-definition- M4-M6
types-providers.html

28
 F.E. Semester –I
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic and Multidisciplinary Education
(CBCGS-HME 2020)
B.E. (All Branches) F.E. (SEM: I)
Course Name: Induction Training Program Course Code: MC101
Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Total Hours: Maximum 3 Weeks (70 to 90 Hours) Theory Presentation Report Total
(00) (10) (15)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE
Hours
- - - -Non- - - 10 15 25
Credit but
Mandatory
Course
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/ Report: Formative (40%), Timely completion of practical
(40%) and Attendance/Learning Attitude (20%)
Prerequisite: Basic personal skills

Course Objectives:
To help new students adjust and feel comfortable in the new environment, inculcate in them the ethos and
culture of the institution, help them build bonds with other students and faculty members, and expose them to
a sense of larger purpose and self-exploration.

Course Outcomes: Upon completion of the course students will be able to:

Cognitive levels of
Sr. No. Course Outcomes attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
1 Acquainted with institutional policies, processes and practices L1, L2, L3
2 Developed Universal Human Values L1, L2, L3
3 Exposed to a sense of larger purpose and self-exploration
L1, L2, L3
to contribute for the society

29
Detailed Syllabus:

Cognitive levels of
Module
Topics attainment as per
No.
Bloom’s Taxonomy
Familiarization with College, Dept./Branch
1 • To help new students adjust and feel comfortable in the new
environment, inculcate in them the ethos and culture of the
institution, help them build bonds with other students and
faculty members, and expose them to a sense of larger L1, L2, L3
purpose and self-exploration
• The incumbents learn about the institutional policies,
processes, practices, culture and values, and their mentor
groups are formed.
Physical and Creative Arts Activities
2 • Daily routine of physical activity with games and sports.
• Games in the evening or at other suitable times according to L1, L2, L3
the local climate.
• Development of team work besides health.

Mentoring and Universal Human Values

3 • Mentoring takes place in the context and setting of
Universal Human Values.
• To explore oneself and experience the joy of learning,
prepares one to stand up to peer pressure and take decisions
with courage, be aware of relationships and be sensitive to L1, L2, L3
others, understand the role of money in life and experience
the feeling of prosperity.
• Need for character building has been underlined by many
thinkers, universal human values provide the base

Literary Activity and Proficiency Modules

• Literary activity would encompass reading a book, writing a
4 summary, debating, enacting a play etc L1, L2, L3
• To overcome some critical lacunas that students might have,
for example, English, computer familiarity etc.
Lectures & Workshops by Eminent People
5 • Lectures by eminent people organized once a week. (3
sessions – 9 hours)
• Students exposure to people who are eminent, in industry or
engineering, in social service, or in public life. Alumni L1, L2, L3
could be invited as well. Motivational lectures about life,
meditation, etc. by Ramakrishna Mission, Art of Living,
Vivekanand Kendra’s, S-VYASA, etc. may be organized.
Workshops which rejuvenate or bring relief to students
would also be welcome, such as, Art of Living workshops
Visits in Local Area, Extra-Curricular Activities, Feedback
and Report

30
 • A couple of visits to the local landmarks including historical
monuments. Visits will also be organized to a hospital,
orphanage or a village. L1, L2, L3
• Extra-curricular activities facilities and activities related to
6
different clubs etc. Selected senior students involved in or
leading these activities can give presentations.
• At the end of the program, each group (of 20 students)
should be asked to prepare a single report on their
experiences of the program. Immediately after their
presentation, they should submit their written report. This
will also serve as a closure to the program. Finally, a formal
written or online anonymous feedback should be collected at
the end of the program.

Books and References:

Sr. Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

No.
Rajeev Sangal, IIT-BHU Varanasi,
Motivating UG Gautam Biswas, IIT Guwahati,
Students Timothy Gonsalves, IIT Mandi,
1 - - 2016
Towards Pushpak Bhattacharya, IIT Patna,
Studies (Committee of IIT Directors), IIT
Directors’ Secretariat, IIT Delhi.

Online References:

Sr. No. Website Name URL Modules

Covered
1 www.aicte- https://www.aicte- M1-M6
india.org india.org/sites/default/files/induction-guide-jun17
2 www.ugc.ac.in https://www.ugc.ac.in/pdfnews/0559509_A-Guide- M1-M6
to-Student-Induction-Programme

31
F.E. Semester -II

32
 F.E. Semester – II
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic and Multidisciplinary Education
(CBCGS-HME 2020)
B.E. (All Branches) F.E. (SEM : I/II)
Course Name : Physics Course Code : BSC101
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total
(100) (25) (25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR TW
Hours
3 1 2 6 5 25 75 25 25
150
IA: In-Semester Assessment - Paper Duration – 1.5 Hours
ESE: End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/ Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance/Learning Attitude (20%)
Prerequisite: 10+2 level of Science knowledge related to crystalline solids, Semiconductors, Modern
Physics, Wave theory of light, Magnetism

Course Objective: The course intends to impart fundamental concepts and principles of
crystallography, semiconductor, quantum mechanics, lasers and smart materials which can
solve the engineering problems.
Course Outcomes: Upon completion of the course students will be able to:

Sr. Course Outcomes Cognitive levels of

No. attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
1 Explain the concept of crystallography and apply it to different L1, L2, L3
crystal structures.
2 Apply semiconductor properties in electronic devices such as LED, L1, L2, L3
Zener diode, Ohmic and Schottky junctions.
3 Understand the principles of quantum mechanics and its key. L1, L2, L3

4 Understand the Interference & diffraction of light & different types L1, L2, L3
of LASERs with their various applications.

5 Develop an ability to understand dielectric materials, magnetic L1, L2, L3

materials. Compare & summarize different types of superconductors,
it’s applications.

33
 6 Apply the semiconductor physics behind the Electronic Materials. L1, L2, L3.
(For COMP & IT)
6 Understand the use of various Photo-detectors. L1, L2, L3.
(For E&TC and ELEX)
6 Explain different types of forces in Nature such as gravitational, L1, L2, L3.
electromagnetic, weak nuclear, strong, conservative & non-
conservative forces, central forces etc. (For CIVIL)
6 Derive all 4 Maxwell’s equations of electromagnetic waves in free L1, L2, L3.
space as well as in vacuum. ( For MECH)

Detailed Syllabus (Total No. of Hours: 45):

Module Topics Hrs. Cognitive levels

No. of attainment as
per Bloom’s
Taxonomy
1.0 Crystallography
Space lattice, Unit Cell and its characteristics, Single 7 L1, L2, L3.
Crystal, Bravais lattices, Cubic crystal system; Special
cubic crystal structures: - Diamond structure, NaCl
structure, HCP structure.
Miller indices of crystallographic planes & directions;
interplanar distance; introduction to X-rays, X-ray
diffraction, Lave’s Method, Powder Method of
diffraction of X-rays, Bragg‟s law; Determination of
2.0 Semiconductors
Intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors, Fermi Dirac 6 L1, L2, L3.
distribution function, Dependence of Fermi level on
carrier-concentration, and temperature (equilibrium
carrier statistics), Carrier generation and
recombination, , Carrier transport: diffusion and drift,
Hall Effect and its applications , p-n junction,
Depletion layer and potential barrier, Semiconductor
materials for optoelectronic devices, viz. LED, Zener
diode

3.0 Quantum Mechanics

L1, L2, L3.
de-Broglie hypothesis, Heisenberg’s uncertainty 7
principle, Applications of uncertainty principle
(Absence of electron inside Nucleus), wave packet,
group velocity and phase velocity; Wave function,
Physical interpretation of wave function; Time
Dependent Schrodinger’s Equation (TDSE) , Time
Independent Equation (TISE), Application of TISE -
Particle trapped in one dimensional box and Potential
barrier (Tunnelling)

34
 4.0 Wave Optics and Lasers

Interference of light by amplitude splitting; Thin film, L1, L2, L3.

Wedge shaped film, Newton’s rings, Interference 10
applications. Fresnel and Fraunhofer diffraction,
Diffraction gratings and their resolving power.

Interaction of radiation with matter- Absorption,

Spontaneous Emission, Stimulated Emission,
Pumping, Population Inversion, Active Medium,
Einstein’s theory of matter radiation interaction and A
and B coefficients; amplification of light by population
inversion, different types of lasers: gas lasers (He-Ne),
Solid state lasers- Nd-YAG Semiconductor diode
lasers; Properties of laser beams, applications of lasers
–Holography, Industrial applications.

5.0 Dielectric, Magnetic Materials and

Superconductivity L1, L2, L3
8
Relation between basic dielectric parameters (E, D, P,
ԑr, χ and allied terms), Types of polarization,
Expression for Ionic, Electronic and Orientational
Polarization

Diamagnetism, Paramagnetism and ferromagnetism,

Hysterisis effect, soft and hard magnetic materials,
Magnetic Circuits, Ferrites and its applications.

Superconducting materials and its properties and basic

parameters, Temperature dependence of critical
magnetic fields, Meissner effect, Type I and II
6.0 Electronic Materials L1, L2, L3
(for Free electron theory, Energy band diagrams, Kronig- 7
COMP
Penny model (to introduce origin of band gap), Energy
& IT)
bands in solids, E-k diagram, Direct and indirect band
gaps, Types of electronic materials: metals,
semiconductors, and insulators, Density of states,
Effective mass, Phonons.

35
 6.0 Photodetectors L1, L2, L3.
(for
Types of semiconductor photodetectors -p-n junction, 7
E&TC
and PIN, and Avalanche --- and their structure, materials,
ELEX) working principle, and characteristics, Noise limits on
performance; Solar cells.

6.0 Transformation Equation and Forces L1, L2, L3.

(for
Transformation of scalars and vectors under Rotation 7
CIVIL)
transformation; Forces in Nature; Newton’s laws and
its completeness in describing particle motion; Form
invariance of Newton’s Second Law; Conservative and
non-conservative forces, Central forces; Conservation
of angular momentum, Keplar Problem.

6.0 Faraday’s law and Maxwell’s Equations of L1, L2, L3.

Electromagnetic Waves
(for 7
MECH) Faraday’s law in terms of EMF produced by changing
magnetic flux; equivalence of Faraday’s law and
motional EMF; Lenz’s law; Differential form of
Faraday’s law expressing curl of electric field in terms
of time-derivative of magnetic field and energy stored
in a magnetic field

Continuity equation for current densities; Modifying

equation for the curl of magnetic field to satisfy
continuity equation; displacement current and
magnetic field arising from time dependent electric
field, Maxwell’s equation in vacuum and non-
conducting medium; Energy in an electromagnetic
field.

Suggested List of Practical/ Experiments:

Practical Type of Practical/ Experiment Topic Hrs. Cognitive

Number Experiment levels of
attainment as
per Bloom’s
Taxonomy
Basic Experiments Study different characteristics of 2 L1, L2, L3, L4
1 Diamond, NaCl and HCP crystal
structure using crystal model

36
2 Draw different planes and 2 L1, L2, L3
directions in cubic crystal structure
using the concept of Miller Indices.

Determination of energy band gap 2 L1, L2, L3

3 of a semiconductor using Four
Probe Method.

Study the characteristics of Light 2 L1, L2, L3, L4

4 Emitting Diode (LED), photodiode
/ and solar cell.

Advanced Determination of Hall Coefficient 3 L1, L2, L3

5 Experiments of semiconductor material using
Hall Effect phenomenon.

6 Study of Laser diode 2 L1, L2, L3

characteristics

7 Basic Experiments Determination of radius of 3 L1, L2, L3

curvature of Plano Convex lens
using Newton’s Rings.
Study of resonance phenomena in LCR 3 L1, L2, L3
8 circuits using LCR Kit
9 Design Determination of unknown 3 L1, L2, L3
Experiments wavelength of laser using
diffraction grating.

10 Design based experiment to 2 L1, L2, L3

calculate viscosity and
compressibility of liquid using
ultrasonic interferometer.

11 Project Based Based on Solar cell, LED, 6 L1, L2, L3

Experiments- Photodiode
Group Activity) Based on LCD
(Students should Based on Optics
complete any one
project Based
experiment from the
list or any other
project in discussion
with Faculty in-
Charge)
Total 30

37
 Books and References:

SN Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

1 Engineering Physics Bhattacharya D K and New Delhi, 1st 2015
Tandon Oxford Press
2 A textbook of Engineering Kshirsagar M. N. and S.Chand 10th 2014
Physics. Avadhanulu P.G.
3 Engineering Physics Malik H K, Singh A K Mac-Graw Hill 2nd 2018

4 Lasers: Fundamentals and Ghatak and Springer 2nd 2011

Applications Thyagarajan

5 Quantum Physics Robert Eisberg& Wiley 2nd 2006

of Atoms, Robert Resnick Publications.
Molecules and
Solids
6 Semiconductor J. Singh McGraw-Hill 1995
Optoelectronics: Physics
and Technology
7 Semiconductor Devices: S. M. Sze Wiley Student 2008
Physics and Technology. Edition.
8 Online course:
-
“Semiconductor - - -
Optoelectronics” by M R
Shenoy on NPTEL
9 Online course:
"Optoelectronic Materials - - - -
and Devices" by Monica
Katiyar and Deepak Gupta
on NPTEL

10 Introduction to David Griffiths Mac-Graw Hill 3rd 2011

Electrodynamics

11 Engineering Mechanics MK Harbola Cengage. 2nd 2013

Online References:
Sr. No Website Name URL Modules
Covered
1 DECOR--The Database https://decor.cst.temple.edu/ M1
of Educational
Crystallographic
2 NPTEL Online course: “Semiconductor Optoelectronics” by M2
M R Shenoy on NPTEL
3 Phys.org https://phys.org/news/2020-06-physicists-quantum- M3
inspired-optical-sensor.html
38
4 Coursera https://www.coursera.org/specializations/optical- M4
engineering
5 Btech blog https://allbtechblog.files.wordpress.com/2016/08/die M5
lectrics-lecture-notes.pdf
6 NPTEL Online course: "Optoelectronic Materials and M6
Devices" by Monica Katiyar and Deepak Gupta on
NPTEL
7 Online library https://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/doi/toc/10.1002/(ISS M6
N)2195-1071.Photodetectors

39
 F.E. Semester – II
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic and Multidisciplinary Education
(CBCGS-HME 2020)
B.E. (All Branches) F.E. (SEM : II)
Course Name : Mathematics-II Course Code : BSC104
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Total
(100) (00) Work (25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR TW
Hours
125
3 1 - 4 4 25 75 - 25

IA: In-Semester Assessment - Paper Duration – 1.5 Hours

ESE: End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/ Report: Formative (40%),
Timely completion of practical (40%) and Attendance/Learning Attitude (20%)
Prerequisite: 10+2 level Mathematics

Course Objective: This course intends to introduce some basic mathematical tools and
techniques which emphasize the development of rigorous logical thinking and analytical
skills, critical thinking, Modeling – problem solving and effective uses of technology.

Course Outcomes: Upon completion of the course students will be able to:

SN Course Outcomes Cognitive Levels of

Attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
1 Form and solve ordinary differential equation in L1, L2, L3
mathematical modelling.
2 Evaluate second and higher order linear differential L1, L2, L3
equation through various methods.
3 Apply rank theory to find eigen values and vectors. L1, L2, L3

4 Apply the concept of double integration to evaluate area, L1

mass and density problems.
5 Apply the concept of triple integration to evaluate volume. L1, L2, L3

6 Evaluate real integral through complex integration. L1, L2, L3

40
Detailed Syllabus (Total No. of Hours: 45):
Module Topics Hrs. Cognitive Levels of
No. Attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
1 Mathematical Modelling & First order 7 L1, L2, L3
ordinary differential equations
Exponential decay model, Mixing problem,
Heating problem (Newton’s law of cooling),
Exact and Bernoulli’s differential equation
(Self Study: RC & RL circuit, Free
Oscillations)
2 Ordinary differential equations of higher 7 L1, L2, L3
orders
Second order linear differential equations with
constant and variable coefficients, method of
variation of parameters, Power series solutions
(Self Study: Cauchy-Euler equation, Bessel
functions of the first kind.)
3 Matrices II 6 L1, L2, L3

Eigenvalues, eigenvectors, Caley Hamilton

theorem, Diagonalization of matrix, Gram-
Schmidt orthogonalization
(Self Study: Orthogonal transformation)
4 Multivariable Calculus I (Double Integration) 8 L1

Multiple Integration: Double integrals

(Cartesian), change of order of integration in
double integrals, Change to polar coordinates,
Applications: area
(Self Study: Center of mass and Gravity {constant
and variable densities})
5 Multivariable Calculus II (Triple Integration) 9 L1, L2, L3
Triple integrals (Cartesian), orthogonal
curvilinear coordinates, Applications involving
cubes, Sphere, Theorem of Greens, Gauss-
Divergence and Stokes (only evaluation)
(Self Study: vector line integrals, vector surface
integrals)
6 Complex Variable – Integration 8 L1, L2, L3
Contour integrals, Cauchy-Goursat theorem
(without proof), Cauchy Integral formula
(without proof), Taylor’s series, zeros of analytic
functions, singularities, Laurent’s series;
Residues, Cauchy Residue theorem (without
proof), Evaluation of definite integral involving
sine and cosine

41
 (Self Study: Evaluation of certain improper
integrals using the Bromwich contour)

Books and References:

SN Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

1 Calculus and G.B. Thomas and Pearson 9th Edition 2002
Analytic geometry R.L. Finney
2 Advanced Erwin kreyszig John Wiley 9th Edition 2006
Engineering & Sons
Mathematics

3 Elementary W. E. Boyce and R. Wiley India 9th Edition 2009

Differential C. DiPrima
Equations and
Boundary Value
Problems
4 Differential S. L. Ross Wiley India 3rd Edition 1984
Equations
5 Higher B.S. Grewal Khanna 36th 2010
Engineering Publishers Edition
Mathematics
6 A text book of N.P. Bali and Laxmi 10th 2008
Engineering Manish Goyal Publications Edition
Mathematics

7 Complex Variables J. W. Brown and R. Mc- 7th Edition 2004

and Applications V. Churchill Graw Hill

8 An Introduction to E. A. Coddington Prentice 3rd Edition 1995

Ordinary Hall
Differential India
Equations

Online References:

Module
Sr. No Website Name URL
Covered
1. Openstax https://openstax.org/ M1-M6
2 Lumanlearning .com https://courses.lumanlearning.com M1-M6
3 Engineering Mathematics Tutorial - GeeksforGeeks https://www.geeksforgeeks.org/ M1-M6

42
 F.E. Semester – II
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic and Multidisciplinary Education
(CBCGS-HME 2020)
B.E. (All Branches) F.E. (SEM : I/II)
Course Name : Basic Electrical Engineering Course Code : ESC101
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Theory Practical/Oral Term Work
Hours Per Week Total
(100) (25) (25)
Contact
Theory Tutorial Practical Credits IA ESE PR TW
Hours

3 1 2 6 5 25 75 25 25 150

IA: In-Semester Assessment - Paper Duration – 1.5 Hours

ESE: End Semester Examination - Paper Duration – 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/ Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance/Learning Attitude (20%)
Prerequisite: 10+2 level knowledge of basic physics and mathematics

Course Objective: The Course intends to provide comprehensive idea about AC and DC
circuit analysis, working principles and applications of basic machines in electrical
engineering and control circuits.
Course Outcomes: Upon completion of the course students will be able to:

Sr. Course Outcome Revised Bloom

No. Taxonomy Level
CO1 To make them understand basic theorem and how to apply L1, L2, L3
them for analysis any DC circuit.
CO2 To develop understanding of single phase and three phase L1, L2, L3
AC supply voltage and analysis ac circuits.
CO3 To understand the various component of low-voltage L1, L2, L3
electrical installations.
CO4 To acquaint the knowledge of the working of single phase L1, L2, L3
transformer.
CO5 To articulate various type of electrical machine and their L1, L2, L3
working principles.
CO6 To illustrate the application of SCR in various power L1, L2
electronics circuits.

Detailed Syllabus (Total No. of Hours: 45):

43
Module Cognitive
Topics Lectures
No. levels of
1 D.C. CIRCUITS: 09 L1, L2, L3
Electrical circuit elements (R, L and C), voltage and
current sources, Kirchoff current and voltage laws,
Mesh and Nodal analysis, Super Mesh and Super
Node. Superposition, Thevenin’s and Norton’s
Theorems.
2 A.C. CIRCUITS: 09 L1, L2, L3
Representation of sinusoidal waveforms, peak and rms
values, phasor representation, real power, reactive
power, apparent power, power factor, Analysis of
single-phase ac circuits consisting of R, L, C, RL, RC,
RLC combinations Series and Parallel resonance.
Three-phase balanced circuits, voltage and current
relations in star and delta connections.
3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: 04 L1, L2

Components of LT Switchgear: Switch Fuse Unit

(SFU), MCB, ELCB, MCCB, Types of Wires and
Cables, Earthing. Elementary calculations for energy
consumption, power factor improvement.
4 TRANSFORMERS: 07 L1, L2, L3

Principle & Construction of Transformer, Ideal and

practical transformer, equivalent circuit, No-Load and
On load Phasor diagram, losses in transformers, OC
SC test, regulation and efficiency.
5 ELECTRICAL MACHINES: 09 L1, L2, L3
Generation of rotating magnetic fields, Construction
and working of a three-phase induction motor,
Significance of torque-slip characteristic, starting and
speed control of induction motor.

Construction, working principle, torque-speed

characteristic of DC Motor.

44
 6 POWER CONVERTERS: 07 L1, L2, L3

SCR, V-I characteristic of SCR, Single phase AC

Voltage controller with R Load. Single phase Phase-
controlled Rectifier with R Load. Step-up and step
down Chopper. duty ratio control. Single-phase source

Suggested List of experiments/demonstrations:

Cognitive levels
Practical Type of of attainment as
Practical/ Experiment Topic Hrs.
Number Experiment per Bloom’s
Taxonomy
1. Basic Basic safety precautions. 2 L1, L2, L3
Experiments Introduction and use of measuring
instruments – voltmeter, ammeter,
multi-meter, oscilloscope, resistors,
capacitors and inductors
2. Study of resonance in series R-L-C 2 L1, L2, L3
circuits.
3. Three-phase transformers: Voltage 2 L1, L2, L3
relationships in star and delta
connections. Cumulative three-phase
power in balanced three-phase
circuits.
4. Design based Verification of Thevenin’s theorem 2 L1, L2, L3
Experiments & Maximum Power Transfer
Theorem.
5. Demonstration of cut-out sections of 2 L1, L2, L3
machines: dc machine (commutator-
brush arrangement)
6. Demonstration of cut-out sections of 2 L1, L2, L3
machines: induction machine
(squirrel cage rotor)
7. Demonstration of cut-out sections of 2 L1, L2, L3
machines: synchronous machine
(field winging - slip ring
arrangement)
8. Demonstration of DC-DC converters. 2 L1, L2, L3

9. Demonstration of DC-AC converters 2 L1, L2, L3

& Speed control of AC Motor.

10. Study V-I Characteristic of SCR 2 L1, L2, L3

45
 11. Group Design given circuit on zero PCB 6 L1, L2, L3
12. Activity Case Study: Calculate total power 4 L1, L2, L3, L4
consumption for the given load and
suggest method to reduce it.
Total 30

Suggested Text/Reference Books:

SN Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

1 Basic Electrical D.P. Kothari and Tata McGraw Hill 3rd 2010
Engineering I.J. Nagrath edition
2 Basic Electrical D.C. Kulshreshtha Tata McGraw Hill - 2009
Engineering
3 Fundamentals of L.S. Bobrow Oxford University - 2011
Electrical Engineering Press
4 Electrical and E. Hughes Pearson 10th 2010
Electronics Edition
Technology
5 Electrical Engineering Vincent Deltoro Second Edition Prentice 1989
Fundamentals Hall
India
6 Online course: “Basic Nagendra - NPTEL -
Electrical Circuits” Krishnapura

Online References:
Sr. No Website Name Online links Modules
1. NPTEL https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108/105/108105053/ M1, M2, M4, M5
2. NPTEL https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108/105/108105066/ M6
3. NPTEL https://nptel.ac.in/noc/courses/noc20/SEM2/noc20-ee68/ M1, M2, M4, M5

46
 F.E. Semester – II
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic and Multidisciplinary Education
(CBCGS-HME 2020)
B.E. (All Branches) F.E. (SEM : II)
Course Name: Engineering Mechanics Course Code: ESC104
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Total
(100) (00) Work (25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR TW
Hours

3 -- 2 5 4 25 75 - 25 125

IA: In-Semester Assessment - Paper Duration – 1.5 Hours

ESE: Semester End Examination- Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/ Report: Formative (40%),
Timely completion of practical (40%) and Attendance/Learning Attitude (20%)
Prerequisite: Basics of Force, displacement, Velocity, acceleration & related concept from Physics.
Also required basics of math’s like integration & differentiation

Course Objective: This course aims to expound the basic fundamentals of Force & its
effects on static and dynamic systems and thereby provide a strong base for various
engineering subjects.

Course Outcomes: Upon completion of the course students will be able to:

SN Course Outcomes Cognitive Levels of

Attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
1 Find resultant/equilibrant of different types of coplanar force L1, L2
system and locate the centroid of plane lamina.
2 Construct free body diagram of a coplanar system and calculate the L1, L2, L3
reactions for static equilibrium.
3 Analyze problems related to friction for system containing block, L1, L2, L3
wedge, ladder etc.
4 Find resultant of different types of non-coplanar force system L1, L2, L3
5 Analyze Projectile motion of the particle and draw motion curves. L1, L2, L3
Locate instantaneous center of rotation and find linear and angular
velocity for different links for rigid bodies having plane motion.
6 Apply D’Alembert’s principle, Work energy principle, Impulse L1, L2, L3
momentum theorem in the problems based on Kinetics of Particles

47
Detailed Syllabus (Total No. of Hours: 45):

Cognitive
Levels of
Sr.
Topics Lectures Attainment as
No.
per Bloom’s
Taxonomy
01 System of Coplanar Forces: 08 L1, L2
Resolution of force, Moment of force about a point,
Couple, Varignon’s Theorem. Resultant of Coplanar
system of forces, Force couple system.
Centroid of composite plane lamina.
02 Equilibrium of System of Coplanar Forces: 08 L1, L2, L3
Free Body Diagram, Equilibrium of system consisting
of concurrent forces, parallel forces and non-concurrent
non-parallel general forces, Lami’s theorem.
Types of support:
Types of loads, Types of Beams, Determination of
reactions at supports for various types of loads on
beams. (Excluding problems on internal hinges),
Rope Drive:
Open Belt and Cross Belt
03 Friction: 05 L1, L2, L3
Introduction to Laws of friction, angle of friction, angle
of repose, cone of friction. Equilibrium of bodies on
inclined plane, Application to problems involving
blocks, wedges, ladders, tipping, etc.
04 Forces in space: 06 L1, L2, L3
Resultant & Equilibrium of concurrent force system,
parallel force system and non-concurrent non-parallel
force system in 3D space
05 Kinematics of a Particle: 09 L1, L2, L3
Introduction to rectilinear and curvilinear motion,
Projectile motion.
Kinematics of a Rigid Body:
Introduction to general plane motion, Instantaneous
center of rotation for the mechanisms up to three links
only.
06 Kinetics of a Particle: 09 L1, L2, L3
Force and Acceleration:
Newton’s second law of motion, D’Alembert’s
Principle, Equations of dynamic equilibrium for
rectilinear and curvilinear motion,

48
 Work and Energy:
Principle of work and energy, Law of conservation of
energy.
Impulse and Momentum: Principle of linear impulse
and momentum and its application, principle of
conservation of momentum

Suggested List of Practical/ Experiments:

Practical Type of Practical/ Experiment Topic Hrs. Cognitive

Number Experiment Levels of
Attainment as
per Bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Basic Polygon law of coplanar forces using 3 L1, L2, L3
Experiments Universal Force Table.

2 Law of Moments (Varignon's 3 L1, L2, L3

Theorem) using Bell Crank Lever

3 Equilibrium of Simply Supported 3 L1, L2, L3

Beams

4 Inclined plane (to determine 3 L1, L2, L3

coefficient of friction).

5 Compound pendulum. 3 L1, L2, L3

6 Collision of Elastic Bodies using 3 L1, L2, L3

Law of conservation of momentum
7 Design Design of Flywheel 3 L1, L2, L3
Experiments
8 Finding Equilibrant using Universal 3 L1, L2, L3
Force Table
9 Finding centroid of a composite 3 L1, L2, L3
plane area

10 Group Mini Project 3 L1, L2, L3

Activities
Total 30

Books and References:

SN Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

1 Engineering Mechanics Irving H. Prentice 4th 2006
Shames Hall Edition,

49
 2 Vector Mechanics for F. P. Beer McGraw 9th 2011
Engineers, Vol I - Statics, and E. R. Hill. Edition,
Vol II, – Dynamics Johnston

3 Engineering Mechanics R. C. Pearson 4th Edition 2006

Hibbler Press.
4 A Text Book of Bansal R.K Laxmi 6th Edition 2018
Engineering Mechanics Publications.

Online References:
Sr. No. Website Name URL Module
1 MIT http://web.mit.edu/4.441/1_lectures/1_lecture7/1_lecture7.html M1 & M2
2 BRITANNICA https://www.britannica.com/technology/tower M3 & M4
3 OCW-MIT https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/mechanical-engineering/2-003j- M5 & M6
dynamics-and-control-i-spring-2007/lecture-notes/lec08.pdf

50
 F.E. Semester –II
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic and Multidisciplinary Education
(CBCGS-HME 2020)
B.E. (All Branches) F.E. (SEM : II)
Course Name : Workshop/ Manufacturing Practices-II Course Code : ESC106
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Practical/Oral Term
Hours Per Week Theory Total
(25) Work
Contact
Theory Tutorial Practical Credits IA ESE PR TW
Hours

-- -- 2 2 1 - - 25 - 25

IA: In-Semester Assessment - Paper Duration – NA

ESE: End Semester Examination - Paper Duration – NA
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/ Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance/Learning Attitude (20%)
Prerequisite: Basic knowledge of Manufacturing Techniques

Course Objective: This course intends to give exposure to different Manufacturing Practices
/ Techniques and thereby understand how to fabricate components using different materials.
Also it is important to have basic knowledge of assembling and dismantling of different
components.

Course Outcome: Upon completion of the course students will be able to:

Sr. Course Outcomes Cognitive Levels of

No Attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
CO1 Student shall be able to identify tools, equipment and L1, L2
safety rules of workshop & manufacturing practice
CO2 Students shall be able to understand tools and process L1, L2
of carpentry, wood turning machine.
CO3 Students shall be able to identify the terms used for L1, L2
plastic moulding, metal casting and glass cutting.
CO4 Students shall be able to understand the terms on L1, L2
additive manufacturing and CNC’s Machining.
CO5 Students shall be able to identify the types of welding, L1, L2
plumbing process and its different joints.
CO6 Student shall be able to understand the various L1, L2
equipment for electrical and electronics.

51
 Suggested List of Practical/ Experiments:

Practical Practical/ Experiment Topic Hrs. Cognitive Levels of

Number Attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
1 Carpentry and Wood Turning 18 L1, L2, L3
2 Welding shop 12 L1, L2, L3
Total 30

Books and References:

SN Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

1 Elements of Hajra Choudhury S.K., Media promoters 1/2 2008 &
Workshop Hajra Choudhury A.K. and publishers 2010
Technology and Nirjhar Roy S.K private limited,
Mumbai
2 Manufacturing Kalpakjian S. And Pearson 4
Engineering and Steven S. Schmid education. 2002
Technology
3 Manufacturing Gowri P. Hariharan and Pearson Education -
Technology-I A. Suresh Babu 2008
4 Processes and Roy A. Lindberg Prentice Hall India 4
Materials of 1998
Manufacture
5 Manufacturing Rao P.N Tata McGraw Hill - 2017
Technology House

Online References:
Module
Sr. No. Website Name URL
covered
1 Plastic process https://www.pds.gov.in/downloads/PLASTIC_PROCESSING_T M-3
ECHNIQUE.pdf
2 Additive https://additivemanufacturing.com/basics/ M-4
Manufacturing
3 Welding & https://www.lucasmilhaupt.com/EN/Brazing-Academy/Brazing- M-5
Brazing vs-Welding.htm

52
 F.E. Semester –II
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic and Multidisciplinary Education
(CBCGS-HME 2020)
B.E. (All Branches) F.E. (SEM : II)
Course Name: English for Professional Communication Course Code : HSMC 101
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment/ Evaluation
Theory Practical/Oral Term Work
Hours Per Week Total
(100) (25) (00)
Contact
Theory Tutorial Practical Credits IA ESE OR TW
Hours

2 - 2 4 3 25 75 25 - 125

IA: In-Semester Assessment - Paper Duration – 1.5 Hours

ESE: End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/ Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance/Learning Attitude (20%)
Prerequisite- Basic knowledge of English language, Grammar and Vocabulary

Course Objective: The course will be able to develop communication skills with
professional and technical writing skills.

Course Outcomes: Upon completion of the course students will be able to:

Sr. Course Outcomes Cognitive Levels of

No. Attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
1 Produce appropriate vocabulary and correct words L1, L2, L3

2 Communicate effectively by using structure of English L1, L2, L3

language
3 Write effective and coherent paragraphs professionally L1, L2, L3

4 Enhance professional and technical writing skills L1, L2, L3

5 Understand and apply the communication patterns in L1, L2, L3

organization
6 To improve speaking ability in English both in terms of fluency L1, L2, L3
and comprehensibility

Detailed Syllabus (Total No. of Hours: 30):

53
Module Topics Hrs. Cognitive Levels of
No. Attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy

1 Communication Foundation 05 L1, L2, L3

1.1 Concept and Meaning: Etymology, Definition

and Process of Communication
1.2 Barriers: Linguistic, Semantic, Personal, Socio-
Psychological, Physical, Environmental,
Mechanical, Cross-Cultural
1.3 Methods of Communication: Verbal and Non-
Verbal Communication
Networks of communications: Understanding
Organizational Communication

2 Word Formation 05 L1, L2, L3

2.1 Concept of Word Formation: Reduplicating;

Clipping; Blending; Acronym; Conversion;
Compounding
2.2 Root Words; Affixation; Greek Words; Latin
Words
2.3 Contrast of Meaning: Synonyms; Antonyms;
homonyms; homophones; homographs
Standard Abbreviations and one-word substitution
3 Basic Language Skills 08 L1, L2
3.1 Listening: Types of Listening; Process of
Listening; Hearing and Listening; Exercises on
Listening Skill (Video/ Audio)
3.2 Speaking: Art of Public Speaking; Activities on
Speaking Skill
3.3 Reading: Concept and Types of Reading, Reading
Newspaper articles, Fiction and Non-fiction
works; Activities on Reading
3.4 Writing: Principles; Business Correspondence:
Elements, Types and Formats of Letter
3.1
4 Written Communication 05 L1, L2, L3
4.1 Parts of Speech; Sentence Structures; Types of
Sentences
4.2 Editing and Proofreading: Common Errors in
English
4.3 Comprehension and Summarization
4.4 Paraphrasing and Précis Writing: Exercises
5 Professional Writing Skills 05 L1, L2

54
 5.1 Introduction to Technical Writing: Definition,
Importance and Types of Technical Writing
5.2 Writing Instructions: Tips to Write Instructions;
Writing User Manuals
5.3 Describing: Describing Technical Object/
Product/ Process; Digital Content Development
Writing Research Paper: Structure of Writing
standard technical research paper: Exercises
6 Oral Communication 02 L1, L2, L3
6.1 Intonation Pattern for effective presentation
6.2 Common Everyday Situations: Conversation and
Dialogues
6.3 Compeering, Hosting, Anchoring
6.4 Presentation on Technical Research Paper (one
technical topic)

Suggested List of Practical/ Experiments:

Practical Type of Practical/ Experiment Topic Hrs. RBT

Number Experiment Levels
1 Basic Introduction 2 L1, L2, L3
Experiments
2 Public Speaking (Practice1) 2 L1, L2, L3
3 Public Speaking (Practice 2) 2 L1, L2, L3
4 Public Speaking (Practice 3) 2 L1, L2, L3

5 Activities based on Basic Language 2 L1, L2, L3

Skills.
6 Writing 2 L1, L2, L3

7 Reading 2 L1, L2, L3

8 Speaking 2 L1, L2, L3

9 Listening 2 L1, L2, L3

10 Practice Sessions in Language Lab 2 L1, L2, L3

(Consonants, Vowels, Diphthongs)
11 Tests on Building Vocabulary 2 L1, L2, L3

55
 12 Practice Tests on Pronunciation 2 L1, L2, L3

13 Watching Videos on Oratory 2 L1, L2, L3

14 Editing 2 L1, L2, L3

15 Proofreading 2 L1, L2, L3

Books and References:

Sr. Name of the Book Name of the Publisher Edition Year of

No Author Publication

1 Practical English Michael Swan OUP 4th Edition 1995

Usage

2 Remedial English F.T. Wood Macmillan 2014 Edition 2007

Grammar

3 On Writing Well William Zinsser Harper 25th 2001

Resource Anniversary
Book Edition

4 Study Writing Liz Hamp- Cambridge 2nd Edition 2006

Lyons and Ben University
Heasly Press

5 Communication Sanjay Kumar OUP 1st Edition 2011

Skills and PushpLata

6 Exercises in CIEFL University 1997 Edition 1997

Spoken English Press
Parts. I-III

Online References:

Modules
Sr. No. Website Name URL
Covered
1 Coursera https://www.coursera.org/learn/speak-english-professionally M 1-M 6
2 NPTEL https://nptel.ac.in/courses/109/106/109106129/ M 1-M 6
3 NPTEL https://nptel.ac.in/courses/109/106/109106094/ M 1-M 6

56
 F.E. Semester – II
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic and Multidisciplinary Education
(CBCGS-HME 2020)
B.E. (All Branches) F.E. (SEM : I/II)
Course Name: Professional Skills – I (Life / Presentation Skills) Course Code : HME-PS-201
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Presentation Report Total
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE (50) (25)
Hours
- - 2 2 1 - - 50 25 75

IA: In-Semester Assessment - Paper Duration – NA

ESE: End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - NA
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/ Report: Formative (40%),
Timely completion of practical (40%) and Attendance/Learning Attitude (20%)
Pre-requisite- Basic knowledge of English language, Grammar, Vocabulary and Computer Skills

Course Objective: The course will be able to make students efficient in making effective
power point presentations with advanced knowledge of MS Excel and graphics.
Course Outcomes: Upon completion of the course students will be able to:

Cognitive levels of
Sr. No. Course Outcomes attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
1 Build Confidence to communicate effectively L1, L2, L3
2 Learn basics of presentation L1, L2, L3
3 Deliver effective presentation using MS Power point L1, L2, L3
4 Enhance technical skills by using MS Excel, MS Word and MS L1, L2, L3
Power point.
5 Learn to use graphics, videos and images in presentation. L1, L2, L3
6 Effective delivery of power point presentation L1, L2, L3

Detailed Syllabus (Total No. of Hours: 30):

Module Topics Lectures Cognitive levels of

No. attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
1.0 Key Competencies 04 L1, L2, L3

57
 1.1 Managing Self
1.2 Posture and Gestures
1.3 Practice appreciation (Genuine Complements)
1.4 Strengths and Setting goals
1.5 Acceptance of imperfections and disapprovals
1.6 Voice Modulation
1.7 Audience Awareness
2.0 Introduction to MS Power Point Presentation 06 L1, L2, L3
2.1 Getting Started with PowerPoint
2.2 Create a new presentation
2.3 Using open source software for presentation like
Prexi
2.4 Modify presentation themes
2.5 Add and edit text to slides
2.6 Add new slides to a presentation
2.7 Performing Advanced Text Editing Operations
3.0 Essential of Presentation Skills 04 L1, L2
3.1 Preparing presentation and structure
3.2 Use of audio-visual aids
3.3 Effective content development
3.4 Signposting

4.0 MS Excel and MS Word in Power Point 06 L1, L2, L3

Presentation
4.1 Quick Review on MS Excel Options, Ribbon,
Worksheets and Tools
4.2 Using Excel Shortcuts
4.3 Conditional formatting
4.4 Importing data and text to columns
4.5 Functions: Mathematical; String; IF, AND, OR;
Searching; match, search
4.6 Use of MS Word in Power Point Presentation
4.7 Case Study: Managing Personal Finance using
MS Excel
5.0 Graphical Elements in Power Point Presentation 06 L1, L2

5.1 Insert clipart images and shapes to slides

5.2 Insert and modify tables and charts
5.3 Add sound and video to a slide presentation
5.4 Insert and edit animations and slide transitions.

6.0 Delivery of Presentation 04 L1, L2, L3

6.1 Review Presentation
6.2 Print Presentation
6.3 Deliver Presentation
6.4 Power point presentation on any selected topic
(Subject-specific)

58
 Books and References:

Sr. Name of the Book Name of the Publisher Edition Year of

No Author Publication
1 Exploring Mary Anne Poatsy, Paperback 1st Edition 2016
Microsoft Rebecca Lawson, Kindle
PowerPoint Cynthia Krebs,
Robert T. Grauer
2 Building Financial K. Scott Proctor John Willey 2004 2004
Models with & Sons Edition
Microsoft Excel
3 Excel: Quick Willam fischer 2016 2016
Start Guide from Edition
Beginner to Expert -
(Excel, Microsoft
Office)
4 Communication Peter Simon Ramesh 4th Edition 2013
Skills Publishing
House
5 The Power of your Joseph Murphy Bantam 2011 2001
Subconscious Mind Reprint of
1963
Edition
6 Communication Sanjay Kumar & Oxford 1st Edition 2011
Skills Pushp Lata University
Press

Online References:
Modules
Sr. No. Website Name URL
Covered
1 Coursera https://www.coursera.org/learn/slides M 1-M 6
2 NPTEL https://nptel.ac.in/courses/109/106/109106067/ M 1-M 6
3 Dale Carnegie https://www.dalecarnegie.com/en/courses-v2/191? M 1-M 6

59
 F.E. Semester – II
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic and Multidisciplinary Education
(CBCGS-HME 2020)
B.E. (All Branches) F.E. (SEM : II)
Course Name: Activity Based Learning 2 Course Code: HME-ABL 201
(Yoga Practice & Society Outreach-II)
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Presentation Report Total
(00) (50) (25)
Theory Tutorial Activity Contact Credits IA ESE
Course Hours
(AC) 75
- - 2 2 1 - - 50 25

The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/ Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance/Learning Attitude (20%)
Prerequisite: Social awareness

Course Objective: This course intends to explain the importance of physical and mental fitness
by participating in activities related to self-development and community building.

Course Outcomes: Upon completion of the course students will be able to:

SN Course Outcomes Cognitive Levels of

Attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
1 Demonstrate yogic exercises such as basic kriyas and asanas with L1, L2, L3
ease
2 Demonstrate yogic exercises such as pranayama and mudras for well L1, L2, L3
being

3 Understand the socio-economic conditions of community in which L1, L2

they work. Identify the needs and problems of the community and
involve them in day to day problem-solving

4 Develop competence required for group-living and sharing of L1, L2, L3

responsibilities. Acquire leadership qualities and democratic
attitudes.

5 Develop capacity to meet emergencies and natural disasters and L1, L2, L3
practice national integration and social harmony

60
Detailed Syllabus (Total No. of Hours: 30):
Module Topics Hrs. Cognitive Levels of
No. Attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
Orientation: Introduction & experience 06 L1, L2
sharing of Yoga Practice - I
1
Power point Presentation about stress
management and Yoga, benefits

Pranayam Types and its positive effects on 05 L1, L2, L3

human body: Kapal bhati, Anulom Vilom -
2 Demonstration by expert

Practice session (Previous semester and new

exercises)

Introduction to basic asanas (Supine 05 L1, L2, L3

postures): Setubandhasan,
Pawanmuktasan,Cycling, Twisting ,
3
swastikasan etc
Introduction to Surya Namaskar. Its benefits
and demonstration.
Orientation 04 L1
Seminar based on Domain (Environment),
4 Discussion on activities, Group formation (6
Groups consisting of 5 students each).

Poster
Selection of topic, Placards, Poster (A3 size),
Poster/Placards Presentation.
Survey 06 L1, L2, L3
Questionnaire preparation, Identification of
5 area, visit to specified area, Data collection

Impact
Compilation of collected data, Analysis of
data, Predicted Outcomes.

Project 04 L1, L2, L3

Project based on environmental activities
6
Demonstration

61
 Books and References:

SN Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

1 Light on Yoga B. K. S. Iyengar Allen & Unwin - -

2 Yoga for B.K.S. Iyengar Dorling - 2018

Everyone: A Kindersley
Step-by-Step
Illustrated Guide
to Iyengar Yoga
3 Social Work The Mark Doel Routledge Taylor - -
Basics & Francis Group

4 Handbook of Sarah Gehlert & John Wiley & 2nd -

Health Social Teri Browne Edition
Sons
Work

5 101 Careers in Dr. Jessica A. Springer - -

Social Work, Ritter, BSW, Publishing
Second Edition MSSW Company

6 National Service M. B. Dilshad Trust - 2001

Scheme in India Publications

Online References:

Module
Sr. No. Website Name URL
covered
1 Coursera https://www.coursera.org/lecture/engineering-health-yoga- M1-M3
physiology/welcome-and-introductions-b4dTw
2 Coursera https://www.coursera.org/lecture/engineering-health-yoga- M1-M3
physiology/yoga-and-nervous-system-health-aFD8h
3 Pinterest https://www.pinterest.ca/doyogawithme/ M1-M3
4 Youtube https://youtu.be/lbyHCkNEOKo M1-M3
5 You tube https://youtu.be/v7AYKMP6rOE M1-M3
6 You tube https://youtu.be/gEk6JLJNg0U M4-M6
7 Wikipedia https://en.m.wikipedia.org/wiki/Environmental_protection M4-M6
9 DCCAE https://www.dccae.gov.ie/en-ie/environment/topics/environmental- M4-M6
protection-and-awareness/Pages/default.aspx

62
 F.E. Semester –II
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic and Multidisciplinary Education
(CBCGS-HME 2020)
B.E. (All Branches) F.E. (SEM : II)
Course Name: Summer Internship Course Code: SI201
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Total Hours : # 120 to 160 Hours Theory Presentation Report Total
(00) (10) (15)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE
Hours
- - - # 3-4 - - 10 15 25

Note :
1. Internship will be done in institute laboratory under faculty mentorship.
2. Evaluation and assessment will be done as per AICTE guidelines.
Prerequisite: Fundamental knowledge of Engineering
# Contact Hrs: During Week End / Semester Break/ End of Semester (Between 21st and 25th Week) / During Semester

Course Objectives:
To get industry like exposure in the institute laboratories by carrying out activities / projects. Also design
innovative techniques / methods to develop the products.

Course Outcomes: Upon completion of the course students will be able to:

Sr. No. Course Outcomes Cognitive

levels of
attainment as
per Bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Apply subjects knowledge in the institute laboratories for
L3,L4,L5
carrying out projects
2 Developed innovative techniques / methods to develop the
L3,L4,L5
products
3 Contribute for the society
L3,L4,L5

Detailed Syllabus:

Module Topics Cognitive levels of

No. attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
Program Specific Internship
1 • Training and certification on emerging technologies in domains
offered by Department of Computer Engineering L3,L4,L5
• Applying classroom and laboratory knowledge to design , develop
and deploy the products
Inter disciplinary Internship L3,L4,L5
63
 2 • To explore and understand issues and challenges in the other
disciplines (EXTC, ELEX, MECH and CIVIL)
• Design , develop and deploy cost effective products using
multidisciplinary approach
Industry Specific Internship
3 • To explore and understand issues and challenges in industry
• Developing solutions for industry specific problems L3,L4,L5
• Design , develop and deploy products for startup and SMEs

Interpersonal Internship
• To develop interpersonal skills such as leadership, marketing
4 ,publicity and corporate ethics and communication L3,L4,L5
• To get competence in problem solving , presentation , negotiation
skills
Social Internship
5 • Identify and study different real-life issues in the society
L3,L4,L5
• Identify societal problems and provide engineering solutions to
solve these problems
Academic Internship
• Study report preparation, preparation of presentations, copy table
book preparation , business proposal and IPR
• Capture aspirations & expectations through interviews of students.
• Ways to connect research in technical institutes with industry. L3,L4,L5
6 • Taking inputs from self, local stakeholders and global stake holders
which will help to develop process with comparative and
competitive study.

Books and References:

Sr. Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

No.
1 The Ultimate Guide to
Internships: 100 Steps to Get
Eric Woodard Allworth I 2015
a Great Internship and Thrive
in It (Ultimate Guides)

Online References:

Sr. No. Website Name URL Modules

Covered
1 https://www.letsintern.com/ https://www.letsintern.com/internships/summer- M1-M6
internships
2 https://codegnan.com https://codegnan.com/blog/benefits-of- M1-M6
internships-and-importance
3 https://www.honorsociety.org https://www.honorsociety.org/articles?catego M1-M6
ry=internships

64
Semester – III & IV
 INDEX

Sr. No. Content Page No.

1 Scheme for SE Mechanical IIIrd Sem 1

2 Scheme for SE Mechanical IVth Sem 3

SYLLABUS FOR SEMESTER III

1 Applied Mathematics III 5

2 Thermodynamics 8

3 Strength of Materials 11

4 Materials Science and Metallurgy 14

5 Manufacturing Process I 18

6 Environmental studies 22

7 Professional Skills- III (Computer Aided machine Drawing) 25

8 Project Based Learning – I 28

9 Activity Based Learning-III 31

SYLLABUS FOR SEMESTER IV

1 Applied Mathematics IV 35

2 Fluid Mechanics 38

3 Theory of Machines-I 41
 4 Manufacturing Process- II 45

5 Mechatronics and Control System 49

6 Summer Internship 52

7 Employability Skill Development - II 55

8 Professional Skills- IV 57

9 Project Based Learning - II 60

10 Activity Based Learning-IV 63

SPECIALIZATION COURSES

1 Specialization –I (Energy Engineering) 68

2 Specialization- II (3 D Printing) 69
 VISION
"To become a department of eminence in the field of Mechanical Engineering"

MISSION
"To deliver an excellent undergraduate engineering program that prepares
students for successful careers with social sensitivity, and also actively promote
the culture of research amongst students and faculty."
 Program Outcomes (Graduate Attributes)
1. Engineering Knowledge: Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering
fundamentals and an engineering specialization to the solution of complex engineering
problems.
2. Problem Analysis: Identify, formulate, research literature and analyze complex
engineering problems reaching substantiated conclusions using first principles of
mathematics, natural sciences and engineering sciences.
3. Design/Development of solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering
problems and design system components or processes that meet specified needs with
appropriate consideration for public health and safety, cultural, societal and
environmental considerations.
4. Conduct investigations of complex problems using research based knowledge and
research methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data
and synthesis of information to provide valid conclusions.
5. Modern Tool Usage: Create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources and
modern engineering and IT tools including prediction and modeling to complex
engineering activities with an understanding of the limitations.
6. The Engineer and Society: Apply reasoning informed by contextual knowledge to
assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent
responsibilities relevant to professional engineering practice.
7. Environment and Sustainability: Understand the impact of professional engineering
solutions in societal and environmental context and demonstrate knowledge of and need
for sustainable development.
8. Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities
and norms of engineering practice.
9. Individual and Team work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a member
or leader in diverse teams and in multi-disciplinary settings.
10. Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the
engineering community and with society at large, such as being able to comprehend
and write effective reports and design documentation, make effective presentations and
give and receive clear instructions.
11. Lifelong learning: Recognize the need for and have the preparation and ability to
engage in independent and life-long learning in the broadest context of technological
change.
12. Project Management and Finance: Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of
engineering and management principles and apply these to one’s own work, as a
member and leader in a team, to manage projects in multidisciplinary environments.
 Program Educational Objectives
Students of BE Program in Mechanical Engineering will be able to:
PEO 1: Prepare with strong foundation in mathematical, scientific and engineering
fundamentals that will enable them to have successful career in Mechanical and
Interdisciplinary Industries.
PEO 2: Strengthen their knowledge and skills through self-learning abilities throughout
their professional career or during higher education.
PEO 3: Impart critical thinking skills and to develop innovative ideas for Research &
Development

Program Specific Outcomes

PSO 1: Design and analyze overall specifications of Cyber Physical System and translate
it to the different sub-systems design requirements
PSO 2: Adopt a multidisciplinary approach to design overall Cyber Physical System
using Hybrid system and other approaches and validate the model.
PSO 3: Independently carry out research / investigation to solve practical problems and
write / present a substantial technical report/document.
 S.E. Semester –III (Mechanical Engineering)
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development(CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)
Course Description Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination scheme
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Sr. Course Practical/ Term
Course Title Hours Per Week Theory (100)
No. Code Credits Oral (25) Work (25) Total
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Hours IA(25) ESE(75) PR/OR TW
1 BSC- ME301 Applied Mathematics III 3 1 - 4 4 25 75 - 25 125
2 ESC- ME301 Thermodynamics 3 1 - 4 4 25 75 - 25 125
3 ESC- ME302 Strength of Materials 3 - 2 5 4 25 75 25 25 150
4 ESC- ME303 Materials Science and Metallurgy 3 - 2 5 4 25 75 25 25 150
5 PCC- ME 301 Manufacturing Process I 3 - 2 5 4 25 75 50 25 175
Total 15 2 6 23 20 Total marks 725
Course Description Non Credited Mandatory Course (Passing is mandatory for this course) Term Work
1 MC-CS301 Environmental studies 1 - - 1 (Non Passing is mandatory for this course 25 25
Credit)
Course Description Contact Hrs. during Week End / Semester Break/ End of Semester (Between 21st and 25th Week)
1 SI-ME301 Summer Internship - - 160 * - 240* - - - - -
Course Description Contact Hrs. during Week End / Semester Break/ End of Semester (Between 21st and 25th Week) / During Semester
1 AP-ME301 Activity Points - - - 48@ - - - - -
Teaching scheme (Holistic Student Development – HSD) Assessment/Evaluation Scheme
Course Description
Presentation Report Term
(Conducted in the beginning of Semester during first 3 Weeks)
AC AC Work
1 ESD-ME301 Employability Skill Based on Parameters Decided by Training and Placement
30 30 1 50
Development – I Cell
HSD- Professional Skills- III (Computer
2 MEPS301 Aided machine 15 - 30 45 2 50 25 75
Drawing)
3 HSD- Project Based Learning – I - - 30 30 1 25 - 25
MEPBL301
HSD- Activity Based Learning-III (Co-
4 MEABL301 - - 30 30 1 25 25 50
curricular/ Extra- curricular/Extension)
Total 15 - 120 135 5 Total marks 200
Total 26 Grand Total marks: 950

1
 1. IA- In-Semester Assessment, ESE- End Semester Examination, PR- Practical Examination, TW – Term Work Examination, OR- Oral Examination, AC- Activity
evaluation
2. * This is part of Summer Internship but can start in winter. Students may go up to 240 hrs. to acquire maximum 6 credits in Semester
3. Total hrs. mentioned should be completed till end of Semester 4. Credits will be awarded at the end of 4th Semester and will be reflected in the Grade Card of 4th
Semester.
4. Student will get 1-year span to acquire the credits. Students should collectively acquire total contact hrs. in below given activities in a span of 1 year. Student will
submit a report to earn Term work marks in internship.

Following activities should be considered for Summer Internship: -

1. Participation in inhouse internship at the end of 3rd and 4th Semester of 2 week each.
2. Other activity which also will be considered are: Participation in Hackathon, Development of new Product/ Business Plan / Registration of start-up,
Participation in IPR workshop/Leadership talks/Idea/ Design / Innovation/Technical Expos, Internship with Industry / Govt. / NGO/ PSU/MSME/Online
Internship, Long Term Goals under Rural Internship

Note:- For Above Activities mentioned in point 2, if Student is part of Organizing Committee or Participating a Competition at University/State/National/international Level
then it will be considered as. Internship else it will be considered as Activity Points.

@ As per AICTE, Students has to earn 100 Points by participating in 400 Hrs. of activities during 4 years of Engineering. After Completing 48 hrs. of Activities,
Students can earn 12 Points. This Points will not be reflected in Grade Card. Separate transcript will be issued to students after completion of Final Year.

2
 S.E. Semester –IV (Branch Name)
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development(CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)
Course Description Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination scheme
Sr. Course Code Course Title Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
No. Hours Per Week Theory (100)
Practical/Oral Term Work
Total
(25) (25)
Credits
Practic IA(25) ESE(75)
Theory Tutorial Contact Hours PR/OR TW
al
1 BSC-ME401 Applied MathematicsIV 3 1 - 4 4 25 75 - 25 125
2 PCC- ME401 Fluid Mechanics 3 - 2 5 4 25 75 25 25 150
3 PCC- ME402 Theory of Machines-I 3 - 2 5 4 25 75 25 25 150
4 PCC -ME403 Manufacturing Process-
3 - 2 5 4 25 75 25 25 150
II
5 PCC-ME404 Mechatronics and
3 - 2 5 4 25 75 25 25 150
Control System
Total 15 1 8 24 20 Total marks 725
Course Description Non Credited Mandatory Course (Passing is mandatory for this course) Term
Work
1 MC-ME401 Value Education 1 - - 1 (Non- - 25 25
Credit)
Course Description Contact Hrs. during Week End / Semester Break/ End of Semester(Between 21st and 25th Week) Term Work

- - 160 * - 240* 4 *- 6* - - - 50
1 SI-ME401 Summer Intership - 50
2 AP-CS401 Activity Points - - - 52@ - - - - - -
Assessment/Evaluation Scheme
Teaching scheme (Holistic Student Development - HSD) Term
Course Description Presentation Report
(Conducted in the beginning of Semester during first 3 Weeks) Work
AC AC
1 ESD-ME401 Employability Skill Based on Parameters Decided by Training and
- - 30 30 1 50
Development - II Placement Cell
2 HSD-MEPS401 Professional Skills- IV 15 - 30 45 2 50 25 75
3 HSD- Project Based Learning - II
MEPBL401 - - 30 30 1 25 - 25

4 HSD- Activity Based Learning-

MEABL401 - - 30 30 1 25 25 50
IV
Total 15 - 120 135 5 Total marks 200
Total Grand Total marks: 1000
29

3
1. IA- In-Semester Assessment, ESE- End Semester Examination, PR- Practical Examination, TW – Term Work Examination, OR- Oral Examination, AC- Activity evaluation

* Students May go upto 240 hrs. to aquire maximum 6 credits. Students should collectively acquire total contact hrs in below given
activities in a span of 1 year(3rd and 4 th Semester). Student will submit a report to earn Termwork marks in internship at the end of 4th
Semester.

Following Activities should be considered for Summer Internship:-

1)Participitation in inhouse internship at the end of 3rd and 4th semester of 2 week each.
2)Other Activity which also will be considered are: Participation in Hackathon, Development of new Product/ Business Plan /
Registration of start-up, Participation in IPR workshop/Leadership talks/Idea/ Design / Innovation/Technical Expos, Internship with
Industry / Govt. / NGO/ PSU/MSME/Online Internship, Long Term Goals under Rural Internship.

Note:- For Above Activities mentioned in point 2, if Student is part of Organizing Committee or Participating a Compitition at
University/State/National/international Level then it will be considered as Internship else it will be considered as Activity Points.

@ As per AICTE, Students has to earn 100 Points by participating in 400 Hrs. of activities during 4 years of Engineering. After
Completing 52 hrs. of Activities, Students can earn 12 Points. This Points will not be reflected in Grade Card. Separate transcript will be
issued to students after completion of Final Year.

4
 S.E. Semester –III
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w. e. f. A.Y. 2020-21)
B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) S.E. SEM: III
Course Name: AppliedMathematics-III Course Code:BSC- ME301
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total
(100) (25) (25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR/OR TW
Hours
3 1 - 4 4 25 75 - - 25 125

IA: In-Semester Assessment - Paper Duration – 1.5 Hours

ESE: End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: Mathematics I, Mathematics II

Course Objectives:
Course intend to deliver the basics of Laplace transforms, Fourier series and differential
equations so that student should be able to apply them to solve different engineering problems.
Course Outcomes:

SN Course Outcomes Cognitive levels as

per bloom’s
Taxonomy

1 Able to apply the Laplace Transform and its properties to evaluate the L1, L2,L3
integrals.

2 Able to apply Laplace & Inverse Laplace Transform to the solution of L1, L2, L3
differential equations

3 Able to compute the Fourier Series, its complex form. L1, L2, L3

4 Able to apply the concept of Fourier Transform and Inverse Fourier L1, L2, L3
transform.

5 Able to apply initial and boundary value problems involving partial L1, L2, L3
differential equations

6 Able to use the numerical methods to solve ordinary and partial differential L1, L2, L3
equation.

5
Detailed Syllabus:
Module Topics Hrs Cognitive levels as
No. per bloom’s
Taxonomy

Laplace Transform -I

1 Laplace Transform, Properties of Laplace Transform, Laplace L1, L2,L3

6
transform of periodic functions, Evaluation of integrals by
Laplace transform,Heaviside unit step functions

Laplace Transform -II

Finding inverse Laplace transform by direct method, partial 7 L1, L2, L3
2 and based on their properties methods, convolution theorem,
solving ODEs by Laplace Transform method.

Fourier Series
Introduction: Orthogonal and Orthonormal set of functions, 7 L1, L2, L3
Introduction of Dirchlet’s conditions, Euler’s formulae.
3 Fourier Series of Functions: Exponential, trigonometric
functions of any period =2L, even and odd functions, half range
sine and cosine series, Complex form of Fourier
series,

Fourier Transform
Fourier integral representation, Fourier sine and cosine 6 L1, L2, L3
4 integral, Fourier Transform and Inverse Fourier transform of
constant and exponential function.

Partial Differential Equations

8 L1, L2, L3
5 Classification of partial differential equations of second order,
Variables and separable method, Heat equation, Wave
equation ‘Solution of one dimensional wave equation,
transverse vibrations of an elastic string , one dimensional heat
conduction equation, & steady state configurationfor
heat flow

Numerical Methods L1, L2, L3

Taylor’s series, Euler and modified Euler’s methods. Runge- 8
6 Kutta method of fourth order for solving first and second order
equations, Numerical Solution of Partial differential equations
using Bender-Schmidt Explicit
Method and simplified Crank- Nicolson implicit method.

6
Books and References:

SN Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

1 Advanced Engineering Erwin kreyszig John Wiley & 9th Edition 2006
Mathematics Sons

2 An Introduction to Ordinary E. A. Coddington Prentice Hall 3rd Edition 1995

Differential Equations India
3 Higher Engineering B.S. Grewal Khanna 36th Edition 2010
Mathematics Publishers
4 Engineering Mathematics Veerarajan T Tata McGraw- 3rd Edition 2008
Hill, New Delhi
5 Higher Engineering Ramana B.V Tata McGraw 11th Edition 2010
Mathematics Hill, New Delhi

6 Numerical Methods Kandasamy S. Chand & CO. - -

7
 S.E. Semester –III
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w. e. f. A.Y. 2020-21)

B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) S.E. SEM: III

Course Name: Thermodynamics Course Code:ESC- ME301
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total
(100) (25) (25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR/OR TW
Hours
3 1 - 4 4 25 75 25 125

IA: Mid Semester Assessment- Paper Duration – 1.5 Hours

ESE: End Semester Evaluation- Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work / Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: Physics, Chemistry, Mathematics I, Mathematics II
-

Course Objectives:

This course intends to deals with the fundamentals of Thermodynamics including thermodynamic
systems and properties, relationships among the thermos-physical properties, the laws of
thermodynamics and applications of these basic laws in thermodynamic systems. This course will
provide the essential tools required to study thermodynamic systems in Applied Thermodynamics.

Course Outcomes:

SN Course Outcomes Cognitive levels

as per bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Apply fundamental concepts of thermodynamics to thermodynamic L1, L2
systems.

2 Understand the process and the first law of thermodynamics and compute the L1, L2, L3, L4
work involved & heat transfer in the given system.

3 Understand the second laws of thermodynamics and their application to a wide L1, L2, L3, L4
range of systems with calculations of the efficiencies of heat engines and other
engineering devices.

4 To Understand the formation of steam. L1, L2

5 Identify and apply Vapor power laws to various subsystems processes. L1, L2, L3, L4

6 Identify and apply Gas power laws to various subsystems processes. L1, L2, L3, L4

8
Detailed Syllabus:
Module Topics Hrs. Cognitive
No. levels as
per bloom’s
Taxonomy
Introduction and Basic Concepts

1 Introduction, thermodynamic system, control volume, macroscopic and L1, L2

microscopic approaches, properties and state of a system, point and path 4
functions, thermodynamic equilibrium, processes and cycles, quasi-static
process, properties and types of properties, Zeroth law of thermodynamics,
temperature scales, Ideal gas , Equation of state, universal gas constant,
thermodynamic heat and work.

First Law of Thermodynamics 6

L1, L2, L3,
2 First Law of Thermodynamics: Statement and expressions for First Law of L4
Thermodynamics for a Closed System undergoing a Cycle and Change of State,
Joule's experiment, Concepts of Energy, Internal Energy, Enthalpy, Specific
heats, Latent heats,PMM-I.
Steady Flow process, Steady Flow Energy Equation (SFEE), First Law of
Thermodynamics (SFEE) applied to various thermal devices such as boilers,
nozzles and diffusers, turbines and engines, compressors and pumps, throttling
device, condensers and heat exchangers, Joules Thompson Coefficient and its
significance
Second Law of Thermodynamics
8
Limitations of first Law of thermodynamics, Kelvin- Planck and Clausius L1, L2, L3,
3 statements and their equivalence, thermal energy reservoirs, concept of heat L4
engine, refrigerator, heat pump and PMM II, Reversibility and Irreversibility,
Causes and conditions of Irreversibility, Carnot Cycle, Reversed Heat Engine,
Carnot Theorem and its corollary, Absolute Thermodynamic Temperature
Scale.
Entropy: Clausius Inequality, Clausius Theorem, Entropy is Property of a
system
High grade and Low Grade Energy, Available and Unavailable Energy, Dead
State.
Properties of Pure Substance
Properties of Pure Substance: Pure substance and Phase changes: Property 10 L1, L2, L3,
4 diagrams for phase change process (T-s and h-S diagrams), Sensible heat and L4
latent heat, dryness fraction of steam, Understanding of Steam Table and
Mollier chart with suitable examples.
Vapor Power cycle
Carnot cycle and its limitations as a vapor cycle, Rankine cycle with different 10 L1, L2, L3
5 turbine inlet conditions, Mean temperature of heat addition, Methods to improve
thermal efficiency of Rankine cycle – Reheat cycle and Regeneration
Cycle
Gas Power cycles L1, L2, L3
Assumptions of Air Standard Cycle, Otto cycle, Diesel Cycle and Dual cycle, 10
6 Brayton Cycle, Sterling Cycle and Ericsson Cycle

9
Books and References:

SN Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

1 Thermodynamics:An YunusÇengel and Tata McGraw 3rd Edition 2014
EngineeringApproach Michael, Boles Hill
2 Basic andApplied Nag P. K Tata McGraw- 4thEdition 2014
Thermodynamics Hill
3 Fundamental of Engineering R. Yadav Central 7th Edition 2012
Thermodynamics publication
house
4 . Engineering R.K.Rajput Laxmi 5thEdition 2016
Thermodynamics Publication.

10
 S.E. Semester –III
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w. e. f. A.Y. 2020-21)

B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) S.E. SEM: III

Course Name: Strength of Materials Course Code: ESC- ME302
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total
(100) (25) (25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR/OR TW
Hours
3 1 2 6 5 25 75 25 25 150

IA:In-Semester Assessment - Paper Duration – 1.5 Hours

ESE :End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: Engineering Mechanics

Course Objectives:
Course intend to deliver the fundamental knowledge of internal resistance offered by the materials, allowable
stress for working of beams and machine parts without failure.
Course Outcomes: Students will be able to:

Cognitive levels
SN Course Outcomes as per bloom’s
Taxonomy

Demonstrate fundamental knowledge about various types of loading and

1 L1, L2
stresses induced.

2 Draw SFD andBMDfor different types of loads and support conditions L1, L2, L3, L4

3 Compute and analyzestressesinducedinbasicmechanical components. L1, L2, L3, L4

4 Analyze effect of impact & twisting of components L1, L2, L3

5 Compute Principal Stress & strain for given system L1, L2, L3

6 Analyzebucklingand bendingphenomenonincolumns and beams respectively. L1, L2, L3

11
Detailed Syllabus:
Module Topics Hrs. Cognitive
No. levels as per
bloom’s
Taxonomy
Introduction to Stress and Strain

Stress and Strain:

Definition, Stress- strain, uni-axial, bi-axial and tri-axial stresses, tensile &
Compressive stresses, shear stress-Elastic limit, Hooke’s Law.
Elastic Constants: L1, L2
1 Poisson’s Ratio, Modulus of elasticity, Modulus of rigidity, Bulk modulus, 8
Yield stress, Ultimate stress.
Factor of safety, state of simple shear, relation between elastic constants,
Volumetric Strain, Volumetric strain for tri-axial loading, Deformation of
tapering members, bars of varying sections, composite sections,
Thermal Stress

Shear Force and Bending Moments in Beams

Axial force, shear force and bending moment diagrams for statically
Determinate beams including beams with internal hinges for different
2 types of loading, relationship between rates of loading, shear force& 8 L1, L2, L3, L4
bending moment.
Stress in Beams
Theory of pure Bending, Assumptions, Flexural formula for straight
beams,
moment of resistance, bending stress distribution, Section moduli for
3 different sections, beams for uniform strength, Fletched beams. 7 L1, L2, L3, L4
Shear Stress in Beams:
Distribution of shear stress, across plane sections used commonly for
Structural purposes, shear connectors.
Torsion
Torsion:
4 Torsion of circular shafts-solid and hollow, stresses in shafts when
Transmitting power, shafts in series and parallel. L1, L2, L3
Strain Energy: 7
Resilience, proof Resilience, strain energy stored in the member due to
Graduallyappliesload,suddenlyappliedload,impactload.Strainenergy
storedduetoShear,Bendingand Torsion.

Compund Stress and Deflection of beams

5 Compound Stresses: Introduction, state of stress at a point, General two

dimensional stress system, Principal stresses and principal planes. Mohr’s L1, L2, L3
circle of stresses 7
Deflection of Beams: Differential equation Macaulay’s methods –
Determination of slope and deflection for cantilever and simply supported
beams subjected to point loads, U.D.L
Application of stresses in cylinders , shells and columns
Thin Cylindrical and Spherical Shells:
6 Cylinders and Spheres due to internal pressure. Cylindrical Shell
withhemi L1, L2, L3
spherical End 6
Columns and Struts:
Buckling load, Types of end conditions for column, Euler’s column theory
and its limitations, Rankine- Gordon Formula

12
Books and References:

SN Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

Strength of Materials Subramanyam Oxford - 2005
1 University
Press
Mechanics of Materials S. S. Rattan TMH Pvt.Ltd. - -
2
3 Strength of Materials S. Ramamrutham DhanpatRaiPvt. - -
Ltd.

4 Mechanics of Materials B.C Lakshmi - -

PunmiaAshokJain,ArunJain Publications
5 Strength of Materials BasavarajaiahandMahadevappa Khanna - -
Publishers

6 Elements of Strength Timoshenko and Young Affiliated - -

of Materials East- West
Press

Online References:

S. No. Website Name URL Modules

Covered
1 www.nptel.ac.in https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112107146/ M1, M2
2 www.nptel.ac.in https://nptel.ac.in/courses/105105108/1 M1- M6

Suggested List of Practicals /Experiments:

Practical Type of Experiment Practical/Experiment Topic Hrs. Cognitive

Number levels asper
bloom’s
Taxonomy
01 Tension test on mild steel bar 02 L1, L2, L3, L4
(stress-strain behavior, modulus
determination)
02 Test on-tor-steel bar 02 L1, L2, L3, L4
Basic Experiments
03 Torsion test on mild steel bar/cast 02 L1, L2, L3, L4
iron bar
04 Brinell hardness test 04 L1, L2, L3, L4
05 Rockwell hardness test 02 L1, L2, L3, L4
06 Izod impact test 02 L1, L2, L3, L4
07 Design Experiments Charpy impact test 02 L1, L2,
08 Flexural test on beam (central 02 L1, L2, L3, L4,
point load)
09 Flexural test on beam (two 02 L1, L2, L3,
Mini/Minor pointload)
10 Projects/Case Seminar /Course Project 02 L1, L2, L3, L4
studies

13
 S.E. Semester –III
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w. e. f. A.Y. 2020-21)

B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) S.E. SEM :III

Course Name: Materials Science and Metallurgy Course Code :ESC- ME303
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total
(100) (25) (25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR/OR TW
Hours
3 - 2 5 4 25 75 25 25 150

IA: In-Semester Assessment - Paper Duration – 1.5 Hours

ESE :End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: Physics, Applied Mechanics

Course Objectives:

Course intend to deliver introduction to engineering materials, fundamental knowledge of Phase diagrams and various
heat treatment processes for specific application.

Course Outcomes: Student shall be able to

SN Course Outcomes Cognitive levels

as per bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Identify various crystal imperfections, deformation mechanisms, and L1, L2
strengthening mechanisms
2 Able to analyze advanced mechanisms for their effectiveness. L1, L2

3 Interpret Iron-Iron carbide phase diagram, and different phases in L1, L2, L3
microstructures of materials at different conditions.
4 Select appropriate heat treatment process for specific applications. L1, L2, L3

5 Identify effect of alloying elements on properties of steels L1, L2

6 Illustrate basics of composite materials, Nano- materials and smart materials. L1, L2

14
Detailed Syllabus:

Module Topics Hrs. Cognitive

No. levels as
per bloom’s
Taxonomy
1.1 Classification of Materials: Metallic materials, Polymeric Materials,
Ceramics and Composites: Definition, general properties, applications
with examples
1 1.2 Lattice Imperfections: Definition, classification and significance of 8 L1, L2
Imperfections Point defects: vacancy, interstitial and impurity atom defects,
Their formation and effects, Dislocation - Edge and screw dislocations
Burger’s vector, Motion of dislocations and their significance, Surface
defects - Grain boundary, sub-angle grain boundary and stacking faults, their
significance, Generation of dislocation, Frank Reed source, conditions of
multiplication and significance.

1.3 Deformation: Definition, elastic and plastic deformation, Mechanism of

deformation and its significance in design and shaping, Critical Resolved
shear stress, Deformation in single crystal and polycrystalline materials,
Slip systems and deformability of FCC, BCC and HCP lattice systems.
1.4 Strain Hardening: Definition importance of strain hardening,
Dislocation theory of strain hardening, Effect of strain hardening on
engineering behavior of materials, Recrystallization Annealing: stages of
recrystallization annealing and factors affecting it
Failure Mechanisms
2.1 Fracture: Definition and types of facture, Brittle fracture: Griffith’s
2 theory of fracture, Orewa’s modification, Dislocation theory of fracture, L1, L2
Critical stress and crack propagation velocity for brittle fracture, Ductile 8
fracture: Notch effect on fracture, Fracture toughness, Ductility transition,
Definition and significance

2.2 Fatigue Failure: Definition of fatigue and significance of cyclic stress,

Mechanism of fatigue and theories of fatigue failure, Fatigue testing, Test data
presentation and statistical evolution, S-N Curve and its interpretation,
Influence of important factors on fatigue, Notch effect, surface effect, Effect
of pre-stressing, corrosion fatigue, Thermal fatigue.
2.3 Creep: Definition and significance of creep, Effect of temperature and creep
on mechanical behaviors of materials, Creep testing and data presentation and
analysis, Mechanism and types of creep, Analysis of classical creep curve and
use of creep rate in designing of products for loadbearing
applications, Creep Resistant materials
Theory of Alloys& Alloys Diagrams
3.1 Significance of alloying, Definition, Classification and properties of
different types of alloys, Solidification of pure metal, Different types of phase
diagrams (Isomorphous, Eutectic, Peritectic, Eutectoid, Peritectoid) and their L1, L2, L3
analysis, Importance of Iron as engineering material, Allotropic forms of Iron, 10
3 Influence of carbon in Iron- Carbon alloying Iron-Iron carbide diagram and its
analysis, TTT diagram, CCT diagram Hardenability concepts and tests
3.2 Graphitization of Iron- Grey iron, white iron, Nodular and malleable irons,
their microstructures, properties and applications
Heat treatment Process
4.1 Technology of heat treatment, Classification of heat treatment process,
4 Annealing- Principle process, properties and applications of full annealing, L1, L2, L3
Diffusion annealing, process annealing and Cyclic annealing, Normalizing, 8
Hardening heat treatment, Tempering, Subzero treatment, Austempering,
Martempering, Maraging and Ausforming process,

15
 4.2 Surface hardening: Hardening and surface Hardening methods.
Carburizing, Nitriding, Cyaniding, Carbonitriding, induction hardening and
flame hardening processes
Effect of Alloying Elements in Steels
5.1 Limitation of plain carbon steels, Significance of alloying elements, Effects
5 of major and minor constituents, Effect of alloying elements on phase 4 L1, L2
transformation Classification of tool steels and metallurgy of tool steels and
stainless steel, High strength steels such as HSS 800 & DOMEX 650
Introduction to New materials
6.1 Composites: Basic concepts of composites, Processing of composites, L1, L2
6 advantages over metallic materials, various types of composites and their
applications 7
6.2 Nano Materials: Introduction, Concepts, synthesis of nanomaterials,
examples, applications and Nano composites
6.3 An overview to Smart materials

Books and References:

Sr.No. Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

1 Materials Science and William D. Callister, Jr. Wiley India (P) 2ndEdition 2014
Engineering – Adapted by Ltd
Balasubramanian
2 Material Science and V.D. Kodgire Everest -- 2013
Metallurgy Publishing
House
3 Mechanical Metallurgy G.E. Dieter McGraw Hill -- 2007
International
New Delhi
4 Introduction of B.K. Agrawal McGraw Hill -- 2017
Engineering Materials Pub. Co. ltd

Online References:

Sr.No. Website Name URL Modules Covered

1 https://nptel.ac.in https://nptel.ac.in/courses/113106032/ M1-M6

16
Suggested List of Practical /Experiments:

Practical Type of Experiment Practical/Experiment Topic Hrs. Cognitive levels as

Number per bloom’s
Taxonomy
01 Study of Metallurgical L1, L2
Microscope 02

02 Metallographic sample L1, L2, L3, L4

preparation and etching 02

03 Microstructures of plain carbon L1, L2, L3

steels 02

04 Microstructures of cast irons L1, L2, L3

04
Basic Experiments
05 Annealing, Normalizing and L1, L2, L3
Hardening of medium carbon
steel and observation of 02
Microstructures

06 Study of tempering characteristics L1, L2, L3

of hardened steel 02

07 Determination of hardenability of L1, L2, L3, L4

steel using Jominy end Quench 02
Test

08 Fatigue test – to determine L1, L2, L3,

number of cycles to failure of a 02
given material at a given stress
Design Experiment
09 Case study on New Materials L1, L2, L3,
02

10 Mini/Minor/Projects/Case Seminar /Course Project L1, L2, L3 ,

studies 02

17
 S.E. Semester –III
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w. e. f. A.Y. 2020-21)

B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) S.E. SEM :III

Course Name: Manufacturing Process- I Course Code :PCC- ME 301
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total
(100) (25) (25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR/OR TW
Hours
3 - 2 5 4 25 75 50 25 175

IA:In-Semester Assessment - Paper Duration – 1.5 Hours

ESE :End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: Engineering drawing, ,Physics ,Workshop Practices

Course Objective:
Course intendtostudy basic production processes. Able to select appropriate production processes for a specific
application.

Course Outcomes: Students will able to:

SN Course Outcomes Cognitive levels

as per bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Demonstrate various concepts of cold and hot working operations L1

2 Demonstrate applications of various types of welding processes. L1, L2, L3, L4

3 understanding of casting process L1

4 Illustrate the concept of producing polymer components and ceramic L1, L2

5 Demonstrate chip forming processes turning, drilling L1, L2, L3, L4

6 Differentiate such as milling, shaping, grinding etc. L1, L2, L3, L4

18
Detailed Syllabus:

Module Topics Hrs. Cognitive levels

No. as
per bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Hot and cold working of metals 7 L1, L2
Principles of rolling, forging, drop, press, upset, roll forging, extrusion,
drawing, spinning, and effect of hot working. Cold working processes, Cold
rolling, swaging, forging, extrusion- forward, backward and impact roll
forming, tube drawing, wire drawing, spinning, shot penning, high energy rate
forming, sheet metal working, types of presses, drives, different operations
and types of dies.
2 Joining processes 7 L1, L2, L3, L4
Arc welding- Theory, SMAW, GTAW, GMAW, FCAW, Submerged arc
welding, Stud welding Resistance welding- Theory, spot and seam projection
welding processes Gas welding Friction welding, Ultrasonic welding, Thermit
welding, EBW and LASER welding Use of adhesive for joining, classification
of adhesives, types of adhesive and their application, surface preparation and
various joints welding defects and quality.
3 Foundry- Pattern making, moulding and casting 7 L1, L2
Sand casting, types of pattern material, pattern making allowances, core print
moulding, sand properties and testing, hand and machine moulding, core
boxes, core making, melting and pouring, melting furnaces- Cupola, fuel fired,
electric arc and induction furnaces. Cleaning, finishing and heat treatment of
casting, defects in casting lost foam processes, shell moulding and investment
casting. Permanent mould dies casting- Die-casting, low-pressure permanent
mould casting, hot and cold chamber processing, centrifugal casting, semi
centrifugal casting and continuous casting. Gating system design, Risering
Design, product design for sand casting.
4 Processing of Powder metals, Ceramics and Glass 8 L1, L2
Powder-metallurgy process & its applications, Production of metal powders,
compaction of metal powder, sintering, design considerations, process
capabilities, shaping ceramics, forming and shaping of glass, designing
consideration for ceramics and glasses

5 Lathe and drilling Machine 8 L1, L2, L3, L4,

Turning and boring, lathe construction, accessories and operations. Thread L5, L6
cutting- single and multi start threading, concept of speed, feed and depth of
cut. Introduction to boring Machines, Capstan and Turret lathe. Fundamentals
of drilling processes, hoist, drill geometry, tool holder, types of drilling
machines, operations performed on drilling machines, type of drill. Reaming
processes and reamer types.
6 Milling, shaping and planning 8 L1, L2, L3, L4,
Fundamental aspects, cutter types and geometry, Operations performed on L5, L6
milling machine, dividing head method of indexing. Construction, working
and operations performed on shaper, planer, and broaching machines.

Grinding :
Wheels, wheel marking, wheel selection, wheel mounting, types of grinding
machines. Honing, lapping, super finishing, buffing and burnishing processes.

19
Books and References/Online Resources:

SN Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

1 “Workshop technology” Vol. Chapman Edward 2ndEdit 2013
I, II & III; Arnold ion
Publications
Ltd.
London.

2 “Workshop Technology” Hajara Chaudhary S. K Media Prom 3rdEditi 2015

Vol. I & II & on
Publication,
Mumbai.
3 Production Technology”; R. K. Jain Khanna 3rd 2017
Publications Edition
4 “Introduction to Jigs and Hoffman Galgotia 2nd 2012
fixtures”, Publishers Edition
5 “Manufacturing processes for SeropeKalpakjian& Steven - - -
engineering materials R. Schmid,
6 “Production technology”, HMT Hand book Tata 3rdEditi 2015
Mcgraw on
Hill
Education
Pvt. Ltd.
“Manufacturing processes”, S. E. Rusinoff Times India 2nd 2015
7 Press. Edition
8 “Manufacturing processes Doyle Prentice 3rdEditi 2012
and materials for engineers”, Hall of on
India Press

Online References:

S. No. Website Name URL Modules

Covered
1 www.nptel.ac.in https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112105127/ M1-M6
2 www.nptel.ac.in http://www.nptelvideos.in/2012/12/manufacturing- M1-M6
processes-ii.html

20
Suggested List of Practical/ Experiments:

Practical Type of Experiment Practical/Experiment Topic Hrs. Cognitive levels as

Number per bloom’s
Taxonomy
01 Study of Safety & Working 02 L1, L2
instruction in Machine shop.
02 Basic Experiments Study of Measuring Instruments 02 L1, L2, L3, L4
and cutting tools

03 Report on machining processes 02 L1, L2, L3, L4

performed on lathe machine.
04 One Job consisting of Plain and 05 L1, L2,
Taper Turning operations
performed on mild steel,
cylindrical component on lathe
Machine.
05 Report on machining processes 02 L1, L2, L3, L4
performed on Shaping Machine.

06 Design Experiments Fabrication of one job on shaping 05 L1, L2, L3, L4

machine to make horizontal and
inclined surface on MS Steel
component.
07 Fabrication of one simple job on 04 L1, L2, L3, L4
Milling machine
08 Report on forging tools. 02 L1, L2, L3, L4,
09 Fabrication of one on Forging of 04 L1, L2, L3, L4,
Single point cutting tool used on
Lathe Machine.
10 Mini/Minor Projects/Case Preparation of lap joint of GI 02 L1, L2, L3, L4
studies sheet using Spot compressive
Welding

21
 Semester –III (Second Year)
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
Approved by Adhoc Board of Studies and Academic Council under TCET Autonomy Scheme (w. e. f. A.Y. 2019-20)

B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) S.E. SEM : III

Course Name : Environmental Studies Course Code :MC 301
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total
(100) (25) (25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR/OR TW
Hours
1 - - 1 1 - - - 25
25
IA:In-Semester Assessment
ESE : Semester End Examination
The weightage of marks for evaluation of Term work/ Report: Formative (40%), Timely completion of Case
Study (40%) and Attendance (20%)

Prerequisite: NA

Course Objectives:

Course intend to develop an understanding of effect of Population on environment, Renewable and Non-
renewable resources, Ecosystem, Pollution and Sustainable Social and Environmental Development

Course Outcomes:

Sr. Course Outcomes Cognitive levels as

No. per bloom’s
Taxonomy
Able to understand effect of population on environment L1, L2
1
2 Able to understand Renewable and Non-renewable resources L1, L2, L3, L4
3 Able to understand structure, function and energy flow in ecosystem L1, L2, L3, L4
4 Able to understand biodiversity at local, national and global level L1, L2, L3, L4
5 Able to understand cause, effect and controlling measures of Pollution L1, L2, L3, L4
6 Able to understand sustainable social and environmental development L1, L2, L3, L4

22
Detailed Syllabus:
Module Topics Hrs. RBT Levels
No.
1 The Multidisciplinary nature of environmental studies
Definition, scope and importance. Need for public awareness

Human population and the environment:

• Population growth, variation among nations
L1,
• Population Explosion- family welfare program 2
• Environment and human health
• Women and child welfare
• Role of information technology in environment and human
health

2 Natural resources
Renewable and non-renewable resources
Natural resources & associated problems:
a. Forest resources:
b. Water resources: L1,
2
c. Mineral resources:
d. Food resources:
e. Energy resources:
Role of an individual in conservation of natural resources:
• Equitable use of resources for sustainable lifestyles.
3 Ecosystems
• Concepts of an ecosystem.
• Introduction, types, characteristic features, structure and function
of the following ecosystem:
a. Forest ecosystem
b. Grassland ecosystem 2 L1, L2, L3, L4
c. Desert ecosystem
d. Aquatic ecosystem (ponds, streams, lakes, rivers, oceans,
estuaries)

Case study on various ecosystems in India.

4 Biodiversity and its conservation

Introduction-Definition: genetic species and ecosystem diversity
Bio-geographical classification of India Value of biodiversity :
Consumptive use, productive use, social, ethical, aesthetic and option L1,
3
values, Bio-diversity at global, national, local levels
India as a mega diversity nation

Case study on Bio diversity in India.

5 Environmental Pollution Definition 3 L1, L2, L3, L4

23
 • Causes, effects and control measures of:
a. Air pollution
b. Water pollution
c. Soil pollution
Solid waste management: Causes, effect and control measures of urban
and industrial wastes
Role of an individual in prevention of pollution

Case study on Pollution

Disaster management: floods, earthquake, cyclone and land slides

Carbon Credits for pollution prevention

6 Social issues and environment

• From unsustainable to sustainable development

• Urban problems related to energy
• Water conservation, rain water harvesting, watershed management
• Environmental ethics: issues and possible solution
Climate change, global warming, acid rain, ozone layer depletion, L1, L2
3
nuclear accidents and holocaust. Case studies.
• Consumerism and waste products
• Environment protection act
• Public awareness

Case study on Environmental Ethics

Books and References:

Sr.
No. Title Auther Publisher Edition Year
Universities
Text book of environmental
1 ErachBharucha Press/Orient First 2005
studies Blackswan
2 Environmental Studies D L Manjunath Pearson First 2006
Tata McGRAW
3 Environmental Studies Benny Joseph Second 2009
HILL
Wiley India Private
Environmental Studies JagdishKrishnaswami, R J
4 Ltd. New delhi First 2009
Ranjit Daniels
Environmental Studies
5 AninditaBasak Pearson First 2009

Cengage learning,
The Environmental Studies
Thomason India
6 Deeksha Dave Second 2012
edition

24
 S.E. Semester –III
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w. e. f. A.Y. 2020-21)

B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) S.E. SEM :III

Course Name :Computer Aided Machine Drawing Course Code: HSD-MEPS301
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total
(100) (25) (25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE Presentation Report
Hours
1 - 2 3 2 - - 50 25 75

The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: Manufacturing Process – I, Manufacturing Process – II, Material Science & Metallurgy

Course Objectives: Course intend to deliver the fundamental knowledge of various machine parts , their
assembly and proper reading of the drawing sheets so that student should be able to use different machine parts
as per the application.

Course Outcomes: Students will able to:

SN Course Outcomes Cognitive levels

as per bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Acquire the knowledge of various standards and specifications about L1, L2
standard machine components.
2 Read and interpret the drawing L1, L2, L3, L4
3 Draw details and assembly of different mechanical systems L1, L2, L3, L4

4 Convert detailed drawing into assembly drawing using modelling software L1, L2, L3, L4

5 Convert assembly drawing into detailed drawing using modelling software L1, L2, L3, L4

6 Prepare detailed drawing of any given physical object/machine element with L1, L2, L3, L4
actual measurements

25
Detailed Syllabus:

Module Topics Hrs. Cognitive

No. levels as
per
bloom’s
Taxonomy
Introduction to Machine Drawing

Introduction to Machine Drawing: Introduction, Importance, Classifications

of machine drawings with examples, Different of Sections, Dimensioning
methods: Counter Sunk, Counter Bores, Spot Faces, Chamfers, Screw
Threads, Tapered Features, Conventional Representation of Materials and L1, L2, L3,
1 3 L4
Machine Components.
Interpenetration of Surfaces (Emphasis on Applied Cases)

Line or curve of intersection of two penetrating cylinders, Cone and cylinder,

prism and a cylinder, cone and prism, Forged ends, etc.
Screwed Fastenings and Joints
Screwed Fastenings - Screw Thread Nomenclature and types, Bolted Joints,
2 Riveted Joints, Locking Arrangements for Nuts, Foundation Bolts and Key, 2 L1, L2
Cotter, Riveted joints,Welded joints. Pipe Joints, Pulleys and Couplings.
Preparation of details and assembly drawings
Preparation of details and assembly drawings of Clapper block, Single
tool post, Lathe tail stock, jigs and fixtures, Simple, solid, Bushed bearing, L1, L2, L3,
3 I.S. conventional representation of ball and roller bearing, Pedestal bearing, 3 L4
footstep bearing, IC Engine Parts.
Valves
Expansion joints, stuffing box and glands, piping layouts, conventional 2 L1, L2, L3,
4 representation of pipe fittings, valves etc. L4
Limits, Fits and Tolerances
ISO system of tolerance, Tolerance charts, Hole - base and shaft -base system
5 of tolerance, Types of fits, symbols and applications. Geometric Tolerances :
Introduction, Nomenclature, Rules, Symbols, values obtained from various 3 L1, L2, L3,
manufacturing processes, Surface Textures, Roughness values and L4
Roughness Grades.
Reverse Engineering of a physical model
disassembling of any physical model having not less than five parts, measure
6 the required dimensions of each component, sketch the minimum views
required for each component, convert these sketches into 3-D model and L1, L2, L3,
2 L4
create an assembly drawing with actual dimensions.

Reading of Industry Drawings

26
Books and References/Online Resources:

SN Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

1 Machine Drawing N.D. Bhatt Charotar 6th 2015
Publishing House
Pvt Ltd
2 A textbook of Laxminarayan and M.L. Jain brothers 7th 2016
Machine Drawing Mathur Delhi
3 Machine Drawing K.I.Narayana, P. Kannaiah, New Age 3rd 2006
K.Venkata Reddy Publications
Online References:

S. No. Website Name URL Modules

Covered
1 www.nptel.ac.in https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112106075/ M1-M6
Suggested List of Practical/ Experiments:

Practical Type of Experiment Practical/Experiment Topic Hrs. Cognitive levels as

Number per bloom’s
Taxonomy
01 Solid works Introduction and 02 L1, L2
Basic Experiments Tutorials 1 & 2
02 To prepare 3-dimensional models 03 L1, L2, L3, L4
of Nut-Bolt-Washer assembly
(comprising of Hexagonal
&Square Bolt, Wing nut) and
its 2- dimensionaldrawings
03 To prepare 3-dimensional model 03 L1, L2, L3, L4
of an assembly of Single Tool
Post/Clapper Block and its 2-
dimensionaldrawings.
04 To prepare 3-dimensional model 03 L1, L2,
of an assembly of Drill Jig/ Bench
or machine Vice and its 2-
dimensional drawings
05 To prepare 3-dimensional model 03 L1, L2, L3, L4
of an assembly of Universal
Coupling and its 2-dimensional
Design Experiments drawings.
06 To prepare 3-dimensional models 03 L1, L2, L3, L4
of component parts of Expansion
Joint/ Socket and Spigot Joint and
their 2-dimensional drawings.
07 To prepare 3-dimensional models 03 L1, L2, L3, L4
of component parts of Non-
Return Valve and their 2-
dimensionaldrawings.
08 Four Problems on Intersection of 03 L1, L2, L3, L4,
Solids of different combinations
on A3 Size Sketch Book.
09 Any two types of Screwed 03 L1, L2, L3, L4,
Fastenings and Joints each and
types of fits with applications on
A3 Size Sketch Book.
10 Mini/Minor Projects/Case Mini- Project : 3-D model of 04 L1, L2, L3, L4
studies Engine Block

27
 S.E. Semester –III
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
Approved by Adhoc Board of Studies and Academic Council under TCET Autonomy Scheme (w. e. f. A.Y. 2019-20)

B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) S.E. SEM: III

Course Code: HSD-MEPBL301
Course Name: Project Based Learning I
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Practical/Oral Term Work Total
(25) (25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE AX AC
Hours
25
25 -
- - 2 2 1 - -

AC- Activity evaluation

The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of term work/report: Formative (405), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance/learning Attitude (25%)
Prerequisite: Core Subjects

Course Objectives: Course intends to convert theoretical concepts into practical ideas.

Course Outcomes:

Cognitive Levels as
Sr.
Course Outcomes per bloom’s
No.
Taxonomy
Demonstrate a systematic understanding of project contents
1 L1, L2, L3, L4

Understand methodologies and professional way of documentation

2 L1, L2, L3, L4

Know the meaning of different project contents

3 L1, L2, L3, L4

Understand established techniques of project report development.

4 L1, L2, L3, L4

Application of knowledge and techniques learnt in theoretical classes for

5
developing the Machine/Mechanism for real problems. L1, L2, L3, L4

Gaining deeper understanding in specific functional areas

6 L1, L2, L3, L4

28
INTRODUCTION:

The project report should be documented with an engineering approach to the solution of the problem that you
have sought to address. The project report should be prepared in order to solve the problem in a methodical and
professional manner, making due references to appropriate techniques, technologies and professional standards.
You should also include the details from your project notebook, in which you would have recorded the progress of
your project throughout the course. The project report should contain enough details to enable examiners to
evaluate your work. The details, however, should not render your project report as boring and tedious. The
important points should be highlighted in the body of the report, with details often relegated to appendices. This
unit covers all the details on the structure of mini project report contents; it also contains detailed explanations on
each of thesecontents.

IMPORTANCE OF THE MINIPROJECT:

The Mini Project is not only a part of the course work, but also a mechanism to demonstrate your abilities and
specialization. It provides the opportunity for you to demonstrate originality, teamwork, inspiration, planning and
organization in a Mechanism/Machine project, and to put into practice some of the techniques you have been
taught throughout the previous courses. The Project is important for a number of reasons. It provides students
with:

• Opportunity to specialize in specific areas of Engineeringscience

• Future employers will most likely ask you about your project atinterview

• Opportunity to demonstrate a wide range of skills and knowledge learned,and

• Encourages integration of knowledge gained in the previous courseunits.

The project report is an extremely important aspect of the project. It serves to show what you have achieved and
should demonstrate that:

REQUIRMENT ANALYSIS:

Problem Definition:

Define the problem on which you are working in the project. Provide details of the overall problem and then divide
the problem in to sub problems. Define each sub-problem clearly. Requirements Specification: In this phase you
should define the requirements of the system, independent of how these requirements will be accomplished. The
Requirements Specification describes the things in the system and the actions that can be done on these things.
Identify the operation and problems of the existing system. Planning and Scheduling: Planning and scheduling is
a complicated part of project development. Planning, for our purposes, can be thought of as determining all the
small tasks that must be carried out in order to accomplish the goal. Planning also takes into account, rules, known
as constraints, which, control when certain tasks can or cannot happen. Scheduling can be thought of as
determining whether adequate resources are available to carry out the plan. You should show the Gantt chart and
Program Evaluation Review Technique(PERT).

Software and Hardware Requirements: Define the details of all the software and hardware needed for the
development and implementation of your project.

• Hardware Requirement: In this section, the equipment, graphics card, numeric co-processor, mouse, disk
capacity, RAM capacity etc. necessary to run the software must be noted. • Software Requirements: In this section,
the operating system, the compiler, testing tools, linker, and the libraries etc. necessary to compile, link and install
the software must belisted.

29
GUIDELINES FOR THE PROJECT FORMULATION:

Every student is required to carry out Project work in a group of 4 under the supervision of a Mentor
provided by the Project Coordinator.

The mentor shall monitor progress of the student continuously. A candidate is required to present the progress of
the Project work during the semester as per the schedule provided by the Project Coordinator.

PROJECT SYNOPSIS CONTENT:

Project proposal should be prepared in consultation with the Mentor. It should clearly state the objectives and
environment of the proposed Project to be undertaken. Ensure to include the following items while submitting
your Project synopsis. Project synopsis may contain 10-20 pages and sequence of contents strictly should be in the
followingorder:

1) Title of theProject

2) Synopsis ApprovalPerforma

3) Index

4) Acknowledgement

5) Introduction and Objective of the MiniProject

6) Analysis (FeasibilityStudy,Diagrametc)

7) H/W and S/WRequirement

8) Table and Structure, Number of Modules, Detail of Modules

9) Types ofReports

10) FutureScope

MINI PROJECT EVALUATION :

As per the TCET College norms Project based learning Report shall be evaluated by the examiner at the end of
the semester. Howeverthere will be continuous monitoring of the Mini Project progress report during the
semester.

30
 S.E. Semester –III
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w. e. f. A.Y. 2020-21)

B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) S.E. SEM: III

Course Name: Activity Based Learning III Course Code:HSD-MEABL301
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total
(100) (25) (25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR/OR TW
Hours
- - 2 2 1 - - - 25 25

The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/ Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance/Learning Attitude (20%)
Prerequisite: Basics of Computer Programming, General knowledge, Social awareness,

Course Objectives:

• The larger objective of the course is to prepare students for Leadership and Excellence in their life
roles by continually engaging students in both individual and team activities that explore important
issues or phenomena, use multiple media and technologies, create products that embody the results of
the students explorations, and call the students to explain their work and products to adult andstudent
audience.
• Further the course also aims to develop the Society Sensitive Citizens by creating awareness among
students and take up the initiatives in the Activity mode for theneedy.
• The course intends to deliver the understanding of the concepts of critical thinking, encourage the
students to look beyond their textual knowledge, establish the relationship between theory and the
applications of the learnedconcepts.
• It also intends to address the social issues and help the society in the area ofwork.

Course Outcomes:

SN Course Outcome Cognitive Levels

as per bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Student will be able to outline the procedures for debate and demonstrate L1, L2, L3
parliamentary debate and policy debate styles
Learn on multidisciplinary subjects.This brings out the excellence attribute
in students with updated awareness in either topics technical or current
affairs.
2 Student will in the process figure out the various benefits of quiz L1, L2, L3
competitions, also Work as a team.
3 Students will be to make the society awareness about various social issues L1, L2, L3
which teaches them a overall team spirit with decisive acumen qualities
for excellence .

31
 Detailed Syllabus:
Module Topics Hrs. Cognitiv
No. e Levels
as per
bloom’s
Taxon
omy
1 Extempore/Debate L1, L2, L3
I. Introduction to debate, Definition and types ofDebate
Brainstorming session among students on various topics floated for debate. Topics can be 4
Academic or Parliamentary, Financial, International affairs, technology trends, Technical or
philosophical. Expressing views by each student for /against topic for 1 minute.
II. Debate competition. Formation of four teams for two topics. Two teams (For and
against) for topic I will debate first and the other two team will be audience and for topic II
vice-versa.
Evaluation by faculty as per format.

2 General Knowledge (Technical and Current Affairs)

I. Introduction to Quiz, Definition, Types of quiz, Rules of quiz, quiz rounds. Quiz L1, L2,
competition on Technical topic with 50MCQ. L3
II. Quiz competition on current affairs with 50MCQ. 2
Evaluation by faculty as per format.

3 Personality Development L1, L2,

I. Word association (Test Sentence Building) (2 Hrs.) Students are shown 60 English L3
words one after other and a short sentence using the words shown are to be written. Each 2
word will appear for 15 seconds and sentence is to be written within this period only. At least
45 words are to be attempted to get goodmarks
II. Thematic Apperception Test (Short Story Writing)(2Hrs.)
12 Slides will be projected, and stories are to be written in 03 Minutes.
Discussions on Stories written by students 2
Evaluation by faculty as per format.

4 TURNING A WASTE INTO USEFUL PRODUCTS/ RENEWABLE ENERGY L1, L2,

I Introduction: Minimize the generation of wastes and to reuse and recycle them. This L3
activity bringS out the excellence in critical thinking and application in team. This is to be 2
practised for designing the flow chart for application and not to develop product.
1. A physical beneficiation of automobile, electrical and electronicwaste.
2. Reduction of automobile emission is an important aspect of Mechanical
Engineering.
3. Another area one can look into is power generation and biogas production using
waste produced ininstitute.
4. Designing of plants also welcome with unique ideas. Example A captive power
plant, also called autoproduceror embeddedgeneration, is an electricity generation
facility used and managed by an industrial or commercial . A designcan
be worked out at initial stage for college self sustaining electric power generation
with the resources like solar energy etc.
5 Game Based Learning 2 L1, L2,
I Introduction :Games provide a different pedagogical perspective within a higher education L3
context. They provide an stimulating environment with an learning outcome in fun style..
Different Games viz. Puzzle, Sccriblenaut , computer aided design assembly delivery using
the game in mechanical engineering branch ,can be played in class with a game concept
document as a learning outcome

32
 6 Extended Work
I. Introduction to Role play)(4 Hrs.), types of Role play. Writing and demonstration of 2
street Play on socialIssues
Water
Conservation
Waste
Management 6 L1,
Plastic Ban etc. L2, L3
II. Education forneedy
Education on social Issues like social media, youth related issues
etc. Education on healthissues
Education on issues related to senior citizen etc.
6
III. The education/ awareness needs to be conducted in campus
through presentation (placards, posters etc.), survey’s, data analysis
and evaluation by faculty as performat
Total 30
Books and References:
Sr.
No. Title Author Publisher Edition Year

1 Competitive Debate Richard Earl - - -

Times Quiz book by
2 OLovBjortomt - - -
Times Mind Games
3 Cracking the coding Gayle Laakmann - - -

Online References:
S. No. Website Name URL Modules
Covered
1 www.cleverism.com https://www.cleverism.com/18-best-idea- M1-M4
generation-techniques/

2 www.thebetterindia.com https://www.thebetterindia.com/111/teaching- M1-M4

street-children-a-thing-or-two/

33
SEMESTER IV- SYLLABUS

34
 S.E. Semester –IV
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w. e. f. A.Y. 2020-21)

B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) S.E. SEM: IV

Course Name: Applied Mathematics-IV Course Code:BSC-ME401
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total
(100) (25) (25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR/OR TW
Hours
3 1 - 4 4 25 75 - 25 125

IA:In-Semester Assessment - Paper Duration – 1.5 Hours

ESE :End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: Mathematics I, Mathematics II , Applied Mathematics III

Course Objectives:
Course intend to deliver the Basic Probability, Basic Statistics, Linear Programming problems, Large Samples
Test, Small Samples Test and Applied Statistics.. It aims to equip the students with standard concepts and tools
at an intermediate to advanced level that will serve them well towards tackling more advanced level of
mathematics and applications that they would find useful in their disciplines.

Course Outcomes:

SN Course Outcomes Cognitive levels

as per bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Able to differentiate the discrete and continuous random variables. L1, L2,L3

2 Able to apply the Binomial, Poisson and Normal distribution distributions. L1, L2, L3

3 Able to evaluate the Maximization and minimization of two and three L1, L2, L3
variables.

4 Able to apply the concept of large samples in testing the difference between L1, L2, L3
means.

5 Able to apply the concept of small samples test, Chi-square test for L1, L2, L3
goodness of fit and independence of attributes

6 Able to apply the concept of curve fitting, Correlation and Regression to the L1, L2, L3
engineering problems

35
Detailed Syllabus:
Module Topics Hrs. Cognitive
No. levels as
per bloom’s
Taxonomy
Basic Probability

1 Probability spaces, conditional probability, independence(review),Discrete and L1, L2,L3

Continuous random variables, Independent random variables, sums of 7
independent random variables; Expectation of Discrete Random Variables,
Moments, Variance of a sum, Chebyshev'sInequality

Basic Statistics
Measures of Central tendency(review),Moments, skewness and Kurtosis , 7 L1, L2, L3
2 Binomial, Poisson and Normal distribution and evaluation of statistical
parameters for these three distributions,

Linear Programming problems

Types of solutions to linear programming problems, standard form of L.P.P. 8
Simplex method, Big M method (Penalty method) to solve L.P.P, Duality, Dual L1, L2, L3
3 simplexmethod.

Large Samples Test

Test of significance: Large sample test for single proportion, difference of 7 L1, L2, L3
4 proportions, single mean, difference of means, and difference of standard
deviations.

Small Samples Test

Test for single mean, difference of means, test for ratio of variances -Chi- square 8 L1, L2, L3
5
test for goodness of fit and independence of attributes, Case study on sampling
theory.

Applied Statistics
Correlation and regression – Rank correlation, Curve fitting by the method of 8 L1, L2, L3
6 least squares- fitting of straight lines, second degree parabolas and more general
curves.

36
Books and References:

SN Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

1 Advanced Engineering Erwin kreyszig John Wiley & 9th Edition 2006
Mathematics Sons

2 A text book of N.P. Bali and Manish Laxmi 10th Edition 2008
Engineering Goyal Publications
Mathematics
3 Higher Engineering B.S. Grewal Khanna 36th Edition 2010
Mathematics Publishers

4 Engineering Veerarajan T Tata McGraw- 3rd Edition 2008

Mathematics Hill, New
Delhi
5 Introduction to P. G. Hoel, S. C. Port and Universal Reprint 2003
Probability Theory C. J. Stone BookStall
6 Operations Research S.D. Sharma S. Chand - -
&CO.
7 A First Course in S. Ross Pearson 6th Ed 2002
Probability Education
India

37
 S.E. Semester –IV
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
Approved by Adhoc Board of Studies and Academic Council under TCET Autonomy Scheme (w. e. f. A.Y. 2019-20)

B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) S.E. SEM :IV

Course Name :FLUID MECHANICS Course Code :PCC-MES401
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total
(100) (25) (25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR/OR TW
Hours
3 - 2 5 4 25 75 25 25 150

IA:In-Semester Assessment - Paper Duration – 1.5 Hours

ESE :End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: Thermodynamics, Applied Mechanics

Course Objectives:
Course intend to study the application of mass, momentum and energy equations in fluid flow

Course Outcomes: Student shall be able to

SN Course Outcomes Cognitive levels as

per bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Define properties of fluids and classification of fluids L1, L2

2 Evaluate hydrostatic forces on various surfaces and predict stability of floating L1, L2
bodies

3 Formulate and solve equations of the control volume for fluid flow systems L1, L2, L3

4 Apply Bernoulli’s equation to various flow measuring devices L1, L2, L3, L4

5 Calculate resistance to flow of incompressible fluids through closed conduits L1, L2

and over surfaces

6 Apply fundamentals of compressible fluid flows to relevant systems L1, L2

38
Detailed Syllabus:
Module Topics Hrs. Cognitive
No. levels as
perbloom’s
Taxonomy
Introduction– Fluid and flow definitions and types; Properties of fluids i.e.
mass density, specific weight, specific gravity, viscosity etc, Newton’s law of
viscosity concept of continuum, Classification of fluids
1 Fluid Statics: Definition of body and surface forces, Pascal’s law, Basic 7 L1, L2
hydrostatic equation, Forces on surfaces due to hydrostatic pressure,
Buoyancy and Archimedes’ principle.
Eulerian and Lagrangian approach to solutions; Velocity and acceleration in an
Eulerian flow field; Definition of streamlines, path lines and streak lines;
2 Definition of steady/unsteady, uniform/non-uniform, one-two and three L1, L2
dimensional flows; Definition of control volume and control surface, 7
Understanding of differential and integral methods ofanalysis
Definition and equations for stream function, velocity potential function in
rectangular and cylindrical co-ordinates, rotational and irrotational flows;
Definition and equations for source, sink, irrotational vortex, circulation
Integral equations for the control volume: Reynold’s Transport theorem,
equations for conservation of mass, energy and momentum, Bernoulli’s
equation and its application in flow measurement, pitot tube, venture, orifice
and nozzle meters. L1, L2, L3
Differential equations for the control volume: Mass conservation in 2 and 3 7
3 dimension in rectangular, Euler’s equations in 2,3 dimensions and subsequent
derivation of Bernoulli’s equation; Navier-Stokes equations (without proof) in
rectangular Cartesian co-ordinates; Exact solutions of Navier-Stokes
Equations to viscous laminar flow between two parallel planes (Couette flow
and plane Poiseuille flow)
Differential equations for the control volume: Mass conservation in 2 and 3
dimension in rectangular, Euler’s equations in 2,3 dimensions and subsequent
4 derivation of Bernoulli’s equation; Navier-Stokes equations (without proof) in L1, L2, L3,
rectangular Cartesian co-ordinates; Exact solutions of Navier-Stokes Equations 8 L4
to viscous laminar flow between two parallel planes (Couette flow and plane
Poiseuilleflow)

Definition of Reynold’s number, Laminar flow through a pipe (Hagen-

Poiseuille flow), velocity profile and head loss; Turbulent flows and theories of
5 turbulence-Statistical theory, Eddy viscosity theory and Prandtl mixing length 8 L1, L2
theory; velocity profiles for turbulent flows- universal velocity profile, 1/7th
power law; Velocity profiles for smooth and roughpipes
Darcy’s equation for head loss in pipe (no derivation),Moody’s diagram, pipes
in series and parallel, major and minor losses inpipes

Concept of boundary layer and definition of boundary layer thickness,

displacement, momentum and energy thickness; Growth of boundary layer L1, L2
6 laminar and turbulent boundary layers, laminar sub-layer; Von Karman
Momentum Integral equation for boundary layers (without proof), analysis of 8
laminar and turbulent boundary layers, drag, boundary layer separation and
methods to control it, streamlined and bluff bodies
Aerofoil theory: Definition of aerofoil, lift and drag, stalling of aerofoils,
induced drag

39
Books and References:

Sr.No. Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

1 Fluid Mechanics R K Bansal 2nd Edition 2014

2 Fluid Mechanics Yunus A Cengel and McGraw Hill 3rd Edition

John M Cimbala Education
3 Introduction to Fluid SOM &Biswas McGraw Hill -- 2007
Mechanics International
4 Introduction to Fluid Fox and McDonald -- 2017
Mechanics

Online References:

Sr.No. Website Name URL Modules Covered

1 https://nptel.ac.in https://nptel.ac.in/courses M1-M6

Suggested List of Practicals /Experiments:

Practical Type of Experiment Practical/Experiment Topic Hrs. Cognitive levels as

Number per bloom’s
Taxonomy
01 Verification of Archimedes’ L1, L2
Principle 02

02 Verification of Bernoulli’s L1, L2, L3, L4

Equation 02

03 Calibration of Venturimeter L1, L2, L3

02
04 Basic Experiments Calibration of Orifice meter L1, L2, L3
04
05 Calibration of Nozzle meter L1, L2, L3
02
06 Determination of minor losses in L1, L2, L3
Pipe systems 02

07 Determination of major in Pipe L1, L2, L3, L4

systems 02

08 Calculation of Lift and Drag over L1, L2, L3,

an aerofoil 02
Design Experiment
09 Determine the pressure profile L1, L2, L3,
over an aerofoil 02

10 Mini/Minor/Projects/Case Mini project L1, L2, L3 ,

02
studies

40
 S.E. Semester –IV
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w. e. f. A.Y. 2020-21)

B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) S.E. SEM: IV

Course Name: Theory of Machines-I Course Code:PCC-ME402
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total
(100) (25) (25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR/OR TW
Hours
3 - 2 5 4 25 75 25 25 150

IA:In-Semester Assessment - Paper Duration – 1.5 Hours

ESE :End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: Engineering Mechanics

Course Objectives:

Course intend to deliver the fundamental knowledge of the various mechanisms which in turn becomes effective
machines for different applications

Course Outcomes:

SN Course Outcomes Cognitive levels as

per bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Able to understand and interpret various kinematic and special mechanisms L1, L2
used in practice.
2 Able to analyse advanced mechanisms for their effectiveness. L1, L2, L3

3 Able to analyze planar mechanisms up to 6 links for velocity, acceleration by L1, L2, L3, L4
using graphical methods.
4 Able to design and fabricate simple cam mechanisms. L1, L2, L3

5 Able to identify and select appropriate power transmission elements in L1, L2, L3, L4
machines.

6 Able to select appropriate toothed gear mechanism for various applications. L1, L2, L3, L4

41
Detailed Syllabus
Module Topics Hrs. Cognitive
No. levels as
per bloom’s
Taxonomy
Basic Kinematics & Mechanisms

1.1 Basic Kinematics:Kinematic link, Types of links, Kinematic pair, Types of

1 constrained motions, Types of Kinematic pairs, Kinematic chain, Types of 6 L1, L2
joints, Mechanism, Machine, Degree of freedom (Mobility), Kutzbach
criterion, Grubler’s criterion
1.2 Basic Kinematic Mechanisms: Four bar chain and its inversions,
Grashoff’s law, Slider crank chain and its inversions, Double slider crank
chain and its inversions
Special Mechanisms

2 2.1 Straight line generating mechanisms: Peaucellier mechanism, Hart L1, L2, L3
mechanism, Watts mechanism, Tchebicheff's mechanism, Scott Russel 6
modified mechanism
2.2 Hooke's joint - Single & Double, Ackerman & Davis steering gear
mechanisms, Offset slider crank mechanism
Velocity & Acceleration Analysis

3.1 Velocity Analysis of mechanisms (up to 6 links): Velocity analysis by L1, L2, L3,
instantaneous center of rotation method (Graphical approach) Velocity analysis L4
by relative velocity method (Graphical approach) Analysis is extended to find 8
3 rubbing velocities at joints, (Graphicalapproach)
3.2 Acceleration Analysis of Mechanisms (up to 6 links): analysis by relative
method including pairs involving Coriolis acceleration (Graphical Approach)
Cam Mechanisms

4 4.1 Cam and its Classifications. Followers and its Classification L1, L2, L3
4.2 Motion analysis and plotting of displacement-time, velocity-time, 8
acceleration- time, jerk-time graphs for uniform velocity. UARM, SHM and
Cycloid motions (combined motions during one stroke excluded)
4.3 Pressure angle and method to control pressure angle, Layout of cam
profiles
Power Transmission Mechanisms – Belt drives & Chain drives
5.1 Belt drives: Types , velocity ratio, slip & creep, length of belt for open &
5 cross system. Law of belting, Dynamic analysis- driving tensions, centrifugal 6 L1, L2, L3,
tension, initial tension, condition of maximum power transmission L4
5.2 Chain drives: Types of chains, chordal action, variation in velocity ratio,
pitch, length of chain and number of links in chain
Power Transmission Mechanisms – Gear drives
6.1 Gear Terminology and classification, Law of gearing, Involute and L1, L2, L3,
6 Cycloid gear tooth profile L4
6.2 Path of contact, arc of contact, contact ratio for involutes tooth profile, 8
Interference in involutes gears. Critical Numbers of teeth for interference free
motion. Methods to control interference in involutes gears, Construction of
involute and cycloidal tooth profile

42
Books and References:
SN Title Authors Publisher Edition Year
1 Theory of Machines S. S. Rattan Tata McGraw 4th Edition 2014
Hill
Publications
2 Theory of Machines & P. L. Ballaney Khanna 3rd Edition 2005
Mechanisms Publishers

3 Theory of Machines & A. G. Ambekar Prentice Hall -- 2007

Mechanisms India
4 Theory of Machines Thomas Bevan Pearson 3rd Edition 2005
Education
India
5 Theory or Mechanisms Amitabh Ghosh and A. Affiliated 3rd Edition 2017
and Machines Kumar Malik East-West
Press Pvt. Ltd.
6 Kinematics of R. T. Hinkle Prentice Hall 2nd Revised 2008
Machines Inc. Edition

Online References:

Sr.No. Website Name URL Modules

Covered
1 https://nptel.ac.in https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104121/ M1-M6

Suggested List of Practicals /Experiments:

Practical Type of Experiment Practical/Experiment Topic Hrs. Cognitive levels as

Number per bloom’s
Taxonomy
01 To analyse kinematic mechanisms 02 L1, L2, L3, L4
for velocity by Instantaneous
Centre of Rotation method

02 To analyse kinematic mechanisms 02 L1, L2, L3, L4

for velocity by Relative Velocity
method
03 To analyse kinematic mechanisms 02 L1, L2, L3, L4
Design Experiments for acceleration by Relative
Velocity method with considering
Coriolis Component of
acceleration
04 To analyse Motion of follower and 04 L1, L2, L3, L4
plot displacement-time, velocity-
time,acceleration-time,
jerk-time and Layout of cam
profiles
05 To Construct conjugate / involved 02 L1, L2, L3, L4
profiles of gears
06 To study various types of 02 L1, L2, L3, L4
kinematic links andmechanisms
07 Basic Experiments To study power transmission 02 L1, L2,
mechanisms – Cam &follower,
Gear drives, Belt drives&Chain

43
 drives
08 To study and analyse straight line 02 L1, L2, L3, L4, L5,
generating mechanisms L6
09 To design and develop power 02 L1, L2, L3, L4, L5,
Mini/Minor Projects/Case
transmission mechanism for L6
studies
suitableapplication
10 Case Study – Engine Indicator 02 L1, L2, L3, L4
Mechanisms

44
 S.E. Semester –IV
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w. e. f. A.Y. 2020-21)

B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) S.E. SEM :IV

Course Name :Manufacturing Process - II Course Code :PCC-ME403
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total
(100) (25) (25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR/OR TW
Hours
3 - 2 5 4 25 75 25 25 150

IA:In-Semester Assessment - Paper Duration – 1.5 Hours

ESE :End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: Workshop Practices

Course Objectives:
Course intend to impart the knowledge of basic manufacturing processes so that student should be able to choose
proper process for manufacturing any component

Course Outcomes: Students will able to:

SN Course Outcomes Cognitive levels as

per bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Analyze the forces on the tools L1, L2

2 Identify different types of surface treatment process and understand broaching L1, L2, L3, L4
process and gear manufacturing
3 Identify different types of Non-conventinal processes L1, L2, L3, L4

4 Analyze the dimensions sheet metal processes properly L1, L2, L3, L4

5 Use different types of jigs and fixtures for fixing the workpiece L1, L2, L3, L4

6 Understand the working of CNC machines L1, L2, L3, L4

45
Detailed Syllabus:
Module Topics Hrs. Cognitive
No. levels as
perbloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Theory of metal cutting 8 L1, L2, L3,
Mechanics of chip formation, oblique and orthogonal cutting, single point tool L4
geometry, types of chips, cutting ratio, shear plane angle, velocities in cutting,
Merchant circle, shear strain, power in cutting, cutting tool materials, cutting
fluid, machinability, evaluation of machinability, optimum cutting speed, tool
life, factors affecting tool life, computation of tool life.

2 Broaching 10 L1, L2,

Broach-geometry/elements, principle, Types of broaching machines,
comparison of broaching with other processes, applications, broach design.
Gear manufacturing
Gear manufacturing by forming processes, gear generating processes such as
gear shaping, hobbing, milling, hobbing, Gear finishing processes- shaving,
roll finishing, grinding, lapping
Surface treatment processes
Introduction to surface engineering, surface structure and properties, surface
texture, need of surface treatment processes, various types of surface
treatment processes, Introduction to any four surface treatment processes such
as peening, burnishing, heat treatment etc.
3 Non conventional methods of machining 7 L1, L2, L3,
Need of nonconventional methods of machining, classification of non L4
conventional methods of machining, Operating principle, process parameters,
advantages, disadvantages and applications of any four non conventional
methods of machining like USM, ECM, AJM & PAM which uses different
forms of energy.
4 Sheet metal working 7 L1, L2, L3,
Introduction to sheet metal working, press-types and main parts of power L4
press, die details and accessories, metal cutting in a punch and die set up, die
details and accessories, types of dies, clearance, angular clearance, various
press operations, strip layout, centre of pressure, cutting forces, methods of
reducing cutting forces, Blanking die design, drawing- blank size calculations,
number of draws, drawing force, Bending- Bend allowance, bending force
calculations
5 Jigs and fixtures 8 L1, L2, L3,
Introduction to jigs and fixtures, need, 3-2-1 principle of location, various L4
locating devices, cavity location, redundancy in location, fool proofing,
clamping devices, general guidelines for design of jig/fixtures. Design of jig
for simple component, design of milling fixture for simple component

6 Modern Machine Tools 5 L1, L2, L3,

Introduction to CAD/CAM, NC-Basic components, procedure, coordinate L4
system, motion control, applications, merits and problems, CNC-types,
functions and advantages, CNC Lathe Programming, DNC- Types, functions
and advantages. Introduction to adaptive control, FMS and machining centre

46
Books and References/Online Resources:

SN Title Authors Publisher

1 ―Workshoptechnology‖Vol.I,II&III Chapman Edward Arnold Publications
Ltd. London.

2 Workshop Technology‖ Vol. I & II HajaraChaudhary S. K. Media Prom & Publication,

Mumbai
3 Production Technology R. K. Jain Khanna Publications
4 Introduction to Jigs and fixtures Hoffman Galgotia Publishers
5 Manufacturing Engineering and SeropeKalpakjian& Pearson Education
Technoplogy Steven R. Schmid
6 Production technology HMT Hand book Tata Mcgraw Hill Education
Pvt. Ltd.

7 www.nptel.ac.in

Online References:

S. No. Website Name URL Modules

Covered
1 www.nptel.ac.in https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112105127/ M1-M6
2 www.nptel.ac.in http://www.nptelvideos.in/2012/12/manufacturing- M1-M6
processes-ii.html

Suggested List of Practical/ Experiments:

Practical Type of Experiment Practical/Experiment Topic Hrs. Cognitive levels as

Number per bloom’s
Taxonomy
01 Study of Safety & Working 03 L1, L2
Instruction in Machine shop.
02 Study OfVernierCalliper, Height 03 L1, L2, L3, L4
Gauge, Micrometer, V Block,
Surface Plate.
03 Study Of Cutting Tools.- Single 03 L1, L2, L3, L4
Point Cutting Tool, Milling
Basic Experiments
Cutters ,GrindingWheel
04 Report on machining operations 03 L1, L2,
performed on Lathe machine.
05 Fabrication of Fixture body- 03 L1, L2, L3, L4
consisting of Plain, Taper
Turning, Knurling, Boring,
Drilling, Chamfer, and Threading
Operations performed on mild
steel component on Lathe
Machine.
06 Report on Shaping machine, 03 L1, L2, L3, L4
Surface Grinding Machine And
Universal Milling Machine.
07 Fabrication of Fixture Nut- 03 L1, L2, L3, L4
comprising of Drilling, Internal
Tread Cutting on Lathe Machine
and Flat Surface cutting on
Shaping Machine.

47
08 Fabrication of Fixture Washer- 03 L1, L2, L3, L4,
Design Experiments comprising of internal taper
turning, and facing on MS Steel
component. on Lathe Machine
09 Assignment –Report CNC 03 L1, L2, L3, L4,
Machine.
10 Fabrication of one Fixture Gear- 03 L1, L2, L3, L4
comprising of turning, facing,,
drilling boring on Lathe Machine
Mini/Minor Projects/Case and Simple/ Compound Indexing
studies And Form Cutting on milling
machine.

48
 S.E. Semester –IV
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w. e. f. A.Y. 2020-21)
B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) S.E. SEM: IV
Course Name: Mechatronics & Control System Course Code: PCC-ME404
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total
(100) (25) (25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR/OR TW
Hours
2 - 2 5 4 25 75 25 25 150

IA:In-Semester Assessment - Paper Duration – 1.5 Hours

ESE :End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: Basic of Electronics & Electrical

Course Objective:

Course intend to deliver fundamental knowledge about design of mechatronics system and study concept of
mathematical modeling of the controlsystem

Course Outcomes: Students will be ableto:

SN Course Outcomes Cognitive levels

as per bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Identify the suitable sensor and actuator for a mechatronics system L1, L2

2 Select suitable logic controls L1, L2, L3, L4

3 Analyse continuous control logics for standard input conditions L1, L2, L3, L4
4 Design mathematical model of system/process for standard input responses L1, L2, L3, L4
5 Analyse error and differentiate various types of control systems and time domain L1, L2, L3
specifications
6 Analyse the problems associated with stability L1, L2, L3

49
Detailed Syllabus:

Module Topics Hrs. Cognitive

No. levels as per
bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Introduction of Mechatronics and its block diagram representation Understand(U)
Key elements of mechatronics, Applications of Mechatronics domestic,
industrial etc. Mechatronics Design process, advantages & disadvantages of 6
mechatronics

2 Selection of Sensors Apply (A)

Sensors: Criteria for selection of sensors based on requirements, principle of
measurement, sensing method, performance chart etc. (Displacement, 8
temperature, acceleration, force/pressure) based on static and dynamic
characteristics.
3 Selection of Actuators Apply (A)
Actuators: Selection of actuators based on principle of operation,
performance characteristics, maximum loading conditions, safety etc. 9
Principle and selection of mechano-electrical actuators (1) DC motors (2)
Stepper Motors (3) Solenoid Actuators (4) Servo Motors (5) BLDC
4 Introduction to control systems Apply(A),
Introduction to control systems, Classification of control system. Open loop
and closed loop systems. 5

5 Mathematical modelling of control systems Apply (A)

Mathematical modelling of control systems, concept of transfer function,
Block diagram algebra 8
6 Transient and steady state analysis of first and second order system Apply(A)
Time Domain specifications. Step response of second order system. Steady-
state error, error coefficients, steady state analysis of different type of 9
systems using step, ramp and parabolic inputs

Books and References:

SN Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

1 Applied Mechatronics A. Smaili and F. Mrad OXFORD 9th Edition 2011
university
press
2 Mechatronics System Shetty and Kolk Cengage 9th Edition 2006
Design Learning
3 Mechatronics Kenji Uchino and Jayne Marcel 3rd Edition 2012
R Dekker

4 11th Edition 2010

Control System Nagrath IJ and Gopal M Wiley
Engineering EasternLtd

5 36th Edition 2010

Modem Control KOgata Prentice Hall
engineering

50
Online References:

S. Website Name URL Modul

N es
o. Cover
ed
1 www.slideshare.co https://www.slideshare.net/Bilal_11kb/introduction-to-mechatronics- M1-
m 60666773 M2
1 www.researchgat https://www.researchgate.net/publication/323827333_Unit_I_An_Introduction M1-
e .net _to_Mechatronics M3
2 nptel.ac.in/ https://nptel.ac.in/courses/107106081/ M4-
M6
3 swayam.gov.in https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc19_de04/preview M4-
M6

Suggested List of Practical/ Experiments:

Practical Type of Experiment Practical/ Experiment Topic Hrs. RBT

Number Levels
Study of basic principles of sensing and Apply (A)
1 Basic Experiments actuation techniques used in Mechatronics 2
systems
Measurement and Calibration of Load / 2 Apply (A)
2
Force
Measurement, Calibration and Comparison Apply (A)
3 2
of Temperature Sensors
Interfacing of Stepper Motor with Apply (A)
4 microcontroller and its programming for 2
Rotational or XY table
Interfacing of DC Motor with Apply (A)
5 Design Experiments microcontroller and its programming for 2
characterization of DC motor setup
Experiment on steady state response of 2 Apply (A)
6
a control system.
Experiment on transient state response 2 Apply (A)
7
of a control system.
Experiment on open & Close loop for DC 2 Apply (A)
8
motor speed control
Demonstration and study of functions 2 Apply (A)
9
of components of robotics arm.
Mini Project:Example
Mini/Minor 1. Self BalancingBot
10
Projects/ Seminar/ 2. HomeAutomation 6 Create (C)
Case Studies 3. Automation in Packaging industry

51
 Semester –IV
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w. e. f. A.Y. 2020-21)

B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) S.E. SEM :IV

Course Name :Value Education Course Code : MC-ME401
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total
(100) (25) (25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR/OR TW
Hours
1 -- -- 1 1 -- -- - 25 25

IA:In-Semester Assessment
ESE :Semester End Examination
The weightage of marks for evaluation of Term work/ Report: Formative (40%), Timely completion of Case
Study (40%) and Attendance (20%)

Prerequisite: NA

Course Objectives:

Course intend to develop an understanding of Ethics in Engineering & Human Values, role of education in
building society and importance of value education towards personal, national and global development

Course Outcomes:

SN Course Outcomes Cognitive levels as

per bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Able to apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and L1, L2, L3, L4
responsibilities and norms of the engineering practice.

2 Able to develop a good moral character and social attitude. L1, L2, L3, L4

3 Determine the proper use of engineering knowledge to uplift quality of life. L1, L2, L3, L4

4 Propagate ethics and values in society. L1, L2, L3, L4

5 Apply values such as care and compassion; doing their best; fair go; L1, L2, L3, L4
freedom; honesty and trustworthiness; integrity; respect; responsibility and
understanding, tolerance and inclusion

52
Detailed Syllabus:

Module Topics Hrs Cognitive

No. levels as per
bloom’s
Taxonomy
Value Education - Introduction L1, L2, L3, L4

1 Understanding Value Education, Type of Education, Importance of Value 2

Education, Need in modern Society, Benefits for students, Adding Value to
Life, Self-Exploration as the Process for Value Education,
Values and Ethics L1, L2, L3, L4
Definition, Concept, Classification, value based life, Present day
materialistic approach, importance of value in human lives, Humility,
Attitude, self-confidence, 2
2 Theory, Criteria and Sources of values.
Ethics , Role of Ethics , Educational Ethics, Missing things in modern
education system, Healing the wounded modern world , The value we have
are real value, imparting ethics in during educational age , integrating
spiritualty with education, positive and negative Attitudes of Professional
Right Understanding L1, L2, L3, L4

Providing the Basis for Universal Human values and Ethical Human 2
3
Conduct ,Basis for the Holistic Alternative Unit Universal Human Order,
Professional Ethics in the Light of Right Understanding ,Vision for Holistic
Technologies , Journey towards the Holistic Alternative- The Road Ahead
Dealing with Habits L1, L2, L3, L4
Introduction to Habits- Simple , Serious and Grave bad Habits, Habit
Addictive, Cause of Addicting to bad habits, How some bad habit are bad 3
4 though the feel good, what implies one to go on with bad habits, How to
have right perception, The Power of Good habits, importance of wright
association, Power of good habits

Dealing with Stress L1, L2, L3, L4

About Stress, definition of Stress ,Positive stress, Negative Stress, Statics
of Stress, importance of stress, Cause of Stress, Suicides the present day 3
5
Stupid idea, How to deal with cries in our life , Art of Tolerance , Making
Right Choice ,Life Style Management

Harmony at Various Levels

L1, L2, L3, L4
6 Understanding the Human Being as co-existence of self and body, Harmony 3
in Self, Harmony with the body, Harmony in the Family, Harmony in the
Society, Harmony in Nature, and Harmony in Existence.

53
Books and References:

SN Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

Value Education Dr. P Hari Krishna Vashnavi Krishna 2nd Edition 2015
1. for Young Leaders Publication
2. Value education Singh Y K APHPublishingCorporation 2nd Edition 2009
3. Professional Ethics R. Subramanian Oxford Publication 4th Edition 2017
Beyond Illusion A. C Bhaktivedanta BBT 5th Edition 2017
4. and Doubt Swami Prabhupada

Open eye Shubha Vilas Das FinGer Print Belief 2nd Edition 2016
5. Meditation

Life Amazing Gaur Gopal Das Penguin India 1st Edition 2018
6. Secrete

Ethics from Epic Govinda Das Tulsi Publication 1st Edition 2015
7.
Peace and Value Kiruba Charles & V. Neelkamal Publications 1st Edition 2016
8. Education Arul Selvi

54
 S.E. Semester –IV
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
Approved by Adhoc Board of Studies and Academic Council under TCET Autonomy Scheme (w. e. f. A.Y. 2019-20)

B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) S.E. SEM: IV

Course Name: Summer Internship Course Code:SI-ME401
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Total Hours : Maximum 2 Weeks ( 60 to 80 Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total
Hours ) during summer vacation ( Week 21st to (100) (25) (25)
25th Week)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR/OR TW
Hours
- - 160-240 4-6 - - - 50 50

Prerequisite: Fundamental knowledge of Mechanical Engineering

Course Objectives:
To get industry like exposure in the college laboratories by carrying out projects using subject studied till 4 th
semester. Also design innovative techniques / methods to develop the products.
To gain knowledge of marketing and publicizing products developed.

Course Outcomes: Upon completion of the course students will be able to:

Sr. Course Outcomes Cognitive levels

No. of attainment as
per Bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 To apply subjects knowledge in the college laboratories for carrying out
L1, L2,L3
projects
2 Able to developed innovative techniques / methods to develop the products
L1, L2,L3
3 Able to do marketing and publicity of products developed
L1, L2,L3

Detailed Syllabus:
Module Topics Cognitive levelsof
No. attainment as per
Bloom’sTaxonomy
Program Specific Internship
1 • Training and certification on emerging technologies indomains
offered by Department of MechanicalEngineering L1, L2, L3
• Applying classroom and laboratory knowledge to design ,develop
and deploy theproducts
Inter disciplinary Internship L1, L2, L3

55
 2 • To explore and understand issues and challenges in the other
disciplines (EXTC, ELEX, MECH andCIVIL)
• Design ,develop and deploy cost effective products using
multidisciplinaryapproach

Industry Specific Internship

3 • To explore and understand issues and challenges inindustry
• Developing solutions for industry specificproblems L1, L2, L3
• Design ,develop and deploy products for startup andSMEs

Interpersonal Internship
• To develop interpersonal skills such as leadership,marketing
4 ,publicity and corporate ethics and communication L1, L2, L3
• To get competence in problem solving , presentation ,negotiation
skills
Social Internship
5 • Identify and study different real life issues in thesociety
L1, L2, L3
• Identify societal problems and provide engineering solutionsto
solve theseproblems
Academic Internship
• Study report preparation, preparation of presentations, copy table
bookpreparation , business proposal and IPR
• Capture aspirations & expectations through interviews ofstudents.
• Ways to connect research in technical institutes withindustry. L1, L2, L3
6 • Taking inputs from self, local stakeholders and global stake holders
which will help to develop process with comparative and
competitivestudy.

Books and References:

Sr. Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

No.
1 The Ultimate Guide to
Internships: 100 Steps to Get a
Eric Woodard Allworth I 2015
Great Internship and Thrive in It
(Ultimate Guides)

Online References:

Sr. Website Name URL Modules

No. Covered
1 https://www.letsintern.co https://www.letsintern.com/internships/summer-internships M1-M6
m/
1 https://codegnan.com https://codegnan.com/blog/benefits-of-internships-and- M1-M6
importance

2 https://www.honorsociety. https://www.honorsociety.org/articles?category=internships M1-M6

org

56
 S.E. Semester –IV
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w. e. f. A.Y. 2020-21)

B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) S.E. SEM: IV

Course Name: Professional Skills – IV (Mathematical Simulation) Course Code:HSD-ME401
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Presentation Report (25) Total
(100) (25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE AC AC
Hours
15 - 30 45 2 - - 50 25 75

AC- Activity evaluation

The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of term work/report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance/learning Attitude (25%)
AC- Activity evaluation
Prerequisite: Elementary knowledge of computer programming and basic understanding of matrices,
linear algebra, calculus, trigonometric functions and geometry.

Course Objectives:
Familiarization of the syntax, semantics, data-types and library functions of numerical computing languages
such as MATLAB and/or SCILAB, and application of such languages for implementation/simulation and
visualization of basic mathematical functions.

Course Outcomes:
SN Course Outcomes Cognitive levels
as per bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Understand the need for simulation/implementation for the verification of L1, L2, L3,
mathematical functions.
2 Understand the main features of the MATLAB/SCILAB program L1, L2, L3,
development environment to enable their usage in the higher learning.
3 Implement simple mathematical functions/equations in numerical computing L1, L2, L3,
environment such as MATLAB/SCILAB.
4 Interpret and visualize simple mathematical functions and operations thereon L2, L3, L4
using plots/display.
5 Analyze the program for correctness and determine/estimate/predict the L2, L3, L4
output and verify it under simulation environment using MATLAB/SCILAB
tools

57
Detailed Syllabus:
Module Topics Hrs Cognitive levels as
No. per bloom’s
Taxonomy

INTRODUCTION TO SIMULATION SOFTWARE :

1 About SCILAB/MATLAB, SCILAB/MATLAB System,
Starting and Quitting SCILAB/MATLAB
6
MATRICES AND ARRAYS: Entering Matrices sum and L1, L2
transpose, subscripts, colon Operator, magic Function

WORKING WITH MATRICES: Generating Matrices, The

2 load Function, M-Files, Concatenation, Deleting Rows and
Columns, Linear Algebra, Arrays Multivariate Data, Scalar
Expansion, Logical Subscripting, find Function. 4

EXPRESSIONS: Variables Numbers, Operators Functions, L1, L2

Expressions.

COMMAND WINDOW: The format Function,

Suppressing Output, Entering Long Statements, Command
3 Line Editing.
3
GRAPHICS: Plotting Process, Editing Process, Preparing
L1, L2
Graphs, Basic Plotting Functions, Mesh & Surface Plot, and
Image Reading & Writing, Printing graphics.

FLOW CONTROL: If, else, and else if, switch and case,
4 for, while, continue, break try - catch, return.
2
OTHER DATA STRUCTURE: Multidimensional Arrays,
L1, L2
Cell Arrays, Characters and Text, Structures

Books and References:

SN Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

1 Introduction to SCILAB Amazon Asia- 2019
Rachna Verma and Pacific
Arvind Verma Holdings
Private
Limited

2 SCILAB—A Beginner’s Anil Kumar Verma Cengage 2018

Approach

58
Online Reference

Website URL Modules

name covered
1 CSE.IITB.ac.in https://www.cse.iitb.ac.in/~sohoni/TD604/sundry/Scilab_Tutorial.pdf M1-M4

List of Practicals / Experiments

Sr. No Type of Experiments Experiment topic Hrs. Cognitive levels of

attainment per
Bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Scilab Environment & The Basic Experiments 2 L1, L2
Workspace and Working
Directory.

2 Creating Matrices and Some Basic Experiments 2 L1, L2, L3

Simple Matrix Operations

3 Sub-matrices. Basic Experiments 2 L1, L2, L3

4 Statistics, Working with Basic Experiments 2 L1, L2, L3

Polynomials

5 Plotting Graphs, Design Experiments 2 L1, L2, L3

6 Plotting 3D Graphs. Design Experiments 2 L1, L2, L3

7 Scilab Programming Language. Design Experiments 2 L1, L2, L3

8 Script Files and Function Files. Design Experiments 2 L1, L2, L3

9 Polynomial Curve Fitting. Advance 2 L1, L2, L3

Experiments

10 Reading Microsoft Excel Files Advance 2 L1, L2, L3

& Miscellaneous Commands Experiments

59
 Semester –IV (Second Year)
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w. e. f. A.Y. 2020-21)

B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) S.E. SEM: IV

Course Code: HSD-MEPBL401
Course Name: Project Based Learning - II
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Presentation Report (25) Total
(25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE AC AC
Hours
50
- - 30 30 1 25 25

AC- Activity evaluation

The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of term work/report: Formative (405), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance/learning Attitude (25%)
Prerequisite: Core Subjects

Course Objectives: Course intend to convert theoretical concepts into practical ideas.

Course Outcomes:

Cognitive Levels as
Sr.
Course Outcomes per bloom’s
No.
Taxonomy
Demonstrate a systematic understanding of project contents
1 L1, L2, L3, L4

Understand methodologies and professional way of documentation

2 L1, L2, L3, L4

Know the meaning of different project contents

3 L1, L2, L3, L4

Understand established techniques of project report development.

4 L1, L2, L3, L4

Application of knowledge and techniques learnt in theoretical classes for

5
developing the Machine/Mechanism for real problems. L1, L2, L3, L4

Gaining deeper understanding in specific functional areas

6 L1, L2, L3, L4

60
INTRODUCTION:

The Mini project report should be documented with an engineering approach to the solution of the problem that
you have sought to address. The project report should be prepared in order to solve the problem in a methodical
and professional manner, making due references to appropriate techniques, technologies and professional
standards. You should also include the details from your project notebook, in which you would have recorded the
progress of your project throughout the course. The project report should contain enough details to enable
examiners to evaluate your work. The details, however, should not render your project report as boring and tedious.
The important points should be highlighted in the body of the report, with details often relegated to appendices.
This unit covers all the details on the structure of mini project report contents; it also contains detailed explanations
on each of thesecontents.

IMPORTANCE OF THE MINIPROJECT:

The Mini Project is not only a part of the course work, but also a mechanism to demonstrate your abilities and
specialization. It provides the opportunity for you to demonstrate originality, teamwork, inspiration, planning and
organization in a Mechanism/Machine project, and to put into practice some of the techniques you have been
taught throughout the previous courses. The Mini Project is important for a number of reasons. It provides
studentswith:

• Opportunity to specialize in specific areas of Engineeringscience

• Future employers will most likely ask you about your project atinterview

• Opportunity to demonstrate a wide range of skills and knowledge learned,and

• Encourages integration of knowledge gained in the previous courseunits.

The project report is an extremely important aspect of the project. It serves to show what you have achieved and
should demonstrate that:

REQUIRMENT ANALYSIS:

Problem Definition:

Define the problem on which you are working in the project. Provide details of the overall problem and then divide
the problem in to sub problems. Define each sub-problem clearly. Requirements Specification: In this phase you
should define the requirements of the system, independent of how these requirements will be accomplished. The
Requirements Specification describes the things in the system and the actions that can be done on these things.
Identify the operation and problems of the existing system. Planning and Scheduling: Planning and scheduling is
a complicated part of project development. Planning, for our purposes, can be thought of as determining all the
small tasks that must be carried out in order to accomplish the goal. Planning also takes into account, rules, known
as constraints, which, control when certain tasks can or cannot happen. Scheduling can be thought of as
determining whether adequate resources are available to carry out the plan. You should show the Gantt chart and
Program Evaluation Review Technique(PERT).

Software and Hardware Requirements: Define the details of all the software and hardware needed for the
development and implementation of your project.

• Hardware Requirement: In this section, the equipment, graphics card, numeric co-processor, mouse, disk
capacity, RAM capacity etc. necessary to run the software must be noted. • Software Requirements: In this section,
the operating system, the compiler, testing tools, linker, and the libraries etc. necessary to compile, link and install
the software must belisted.

61
GUIDELINES FOR THE MINI PROJECT FORMULATION:

Every student is required to carry out Mini Project work in a group of 4 under the supervision of a Mentor
provided by the Project Coordinator.

The mentor shall monitor progress of the student continuously. A candidate is required to present the progress of
the Mini Project work during the semester as per the schedule provided by the Project Coordinator.

MINI PROJECT SYNOPSIS CONTENT:

Mini Project proposal should be prepared in consultation with the Mentor. It should clearly state the objectives and
environment of the proposed Mini Project to be undertaken. Ensure to include the following items while
submitting your Mini Project synopsis. Mini Project synopsis may contain 10-20 pages and sequence of contents
strictly should be in the followingorder:

1) Title of theProject

2) Synopsis ApprovalPerforma

3) Index

4) Acknowledgement

5) Introduction and Objective of the MiniProject

6) Analysis (Feasibility Study, Diagram,etc)

7) H/W and S/WRequirement

8) Table and Structure, Number of Modules, Detail ofModules

9) Types ofReports

10) FutureScope

MINI PROJECT EVALUATION :

As per the TCET College norms Mini Project Report shall be evaluated by the examiner at the end of the
semester. However there will be continuous monitoring of the Mini Project progress report during the semester.

62
 S.E. Semester –IV
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w. e. f. A.Y. 2020-21)

B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) S.E. SEM: IV

Course Name: Activity Based Learning IV Course Code:HSD-MEABL401
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Presentation Report (25) Total
(100) (25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE AC AC
Hours
- - 30 30 1 - - 25 25 50

AC- Activity evaluation

The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of term work/report: Formative (405), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance/learning Attitude (25%)
AC- Activity evaluation
Prerequisite: Basics of Computer Programming, General knowledge, Social awareness,

Course Objectives:

Course intendto look beyond their textual knowledge and establish a relationship between theory and
application of the learnt concepts.

Course Outcomes:

SN Course Objectives Cognitive Levels

as per bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Student will be able to converse through listening attentively and then L1, L2, L3, L4
having the perseverance to mould it towards his/her own direction by
active participation.
2 Students will able to develop their individual style and tone. Engage L1, L2, L3, L4,
critically with creative texts across multiple genres. Develop critique skills L5, L6
for effective in-class workshops of peer work.
3 Students will be able to generate and collect new ideas to uncover L1, L2, L3, L4,
creative, tacit knowledge. L5, L6
4 Students will be able reach out the society of under privileged and help L1, L2, L3
them for education.

63
Detailed Syllabus:

Module Topics Hrs. Cognitive Levels

No. as per bloom’s
Taxonomy

1 Group Discussion
Definition of GD,Types of GD Prepare, Know the Participants. Discussion points to L1, L2, L3, L4
be noted Importance of posture,Reasoning to find the GD topic category that you are 6
comfortable with Taking charge at right time,retaining the balance. Strictly Follow
your Domain.Time Management an important asset. Presenting your view with air of
confidence, Paraphrasing/summarizing. Topics. Group Discussion may be based on
three kinds of topics: Social
Economica
l Political
Internation
al affairs
Evaluation will be based on Creativity skills supported by listening and
participating proactively.
2 Creative writing/technical
writing
Orientation and Introduction to Writing skills both article form and paper writing 6
(IEEE format) with emphasize on originality, plagiarism check.Select the topic of L1, L2, L3
article/ paper either from choice or in consultation with teacher. Discussion forum or
Use of internet is allowed for the same.Understand the format of article/ paper ,
Choose mentor faculty from college if needed. Students will then shape the
article/paper .Drafting and editing of paper for final stage taking care of plagiarism.
Demonstration of article/paper by students and evaluation.

Technical writing
session Non
technical
writingsession.
Evaluation will be on quality of content developed
3 Idea Generation 6 L1, L2, L3
Introduction to invention and innovation, managing creativity, Techniques for
generating ideas, Steps for Idea generation to implementation. Transforming Idea
into project with implementation

Brainstorming session with peers for idea generation and assessment, Experience
sharing by entrepreneurs or Hackathon Winners

Idea competition and evaluation

4 Extension: Education 8 L1, L2, L3, L4,
Introduction to Street play, types of Street play. Presentation aboutStreet L5, L6
play Theme 1: Adult education
Theme 2:Slum children
education Theme 3:
Career Counseling
Evaluation will be based on Creativity skills and Presentation Skills
Total Hours 26

64
Books and References:
Sr.
No. Title Author Publisher Edition Year
1 Competitive Debate Richard Earl - - -
Times Quiz book by
2 OLovBjortomt - - -
Times Mind Games
3 Cracking the coding Gayle Laakmann - - -

65
S. No. Website Name URL Modules
Covered
1 www.cleverism.com https://www.cleverism.com/18-best-idea- M1-M4
generation-techniques/

2 www.thebetterindia.com https://www.thebetterindia.com/111/teaching- M1-M4

street-children-a-thing-or-two/

66
SPECIALIZATION COURSES

67
 Specialization –I (Energy Engineering)

Sr.
Sem Course Name Duration
No. URL

Concepts of https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_
1 III 12 week
Thermodynamics noc20_me51/preview

Fluid dynamics and https://nptel.ac.in/noc/courses/n

08 week
turbomachines oc18/SEM2/noc18-me47/
IV
2 Selection of
Nanomaterials for
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/1
Energy Harvesting 04 week
07/112107283/
and Storage
Application

Fundamentals of
https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_
3 V Conduction and 12 week
noc20_me85/preview
Radiation

Energy Conservation
https://nptel.ac.in/course
4 VI and Waste Heat 12 week
s/112/105/112105221/
Recovery

Non-Conventional https://nptel.ac.in/courses/121/1
5 VII 12 week
Energy Resources 06/121106014/

Energy Economics https://nptel.ac.in/courses/109/1

6 VII 08 week
and Policy 06/109106161/

68
 Specialization- II (3 D Printing)
Se URL
Sr. m Area Course Name Duration
No.
https://www.courser
3 D printing software Approximate 15 hrs a.org/learn/3d-
printing-software

https://www.courser
3 D printing Approximately 20 hr a.org/learn/3d-
3D printing applications printing-applications
1 III
basics
https://www.courser
3 D printing evolution Approx. 8 hour a.org/learn/3d-
printing-revolution

Total Approx. 43 hrs

Approx. https://www.coursera.org/le
3 D CAD fundamental arn/3d-cad-fundamental
15hours

Approx. 10 hours https://www.coursera.org/le

3 D CAD application
arn/3d-cad-application

2 IV 3D https://www.coursera.org/le
Modelling Digital Approx. 6 hours arn/digital-manufacturing-
Manufacturing & design
Design
Intro to Digital https://www.coursera.org/le
Manufacturing Approx. 15 hours
arn/introduction-digital-
with
manufacturing-fusion-360
Autodesk Fusion 360
Approx. 46 hours
Total

Introduction to https://www.courser
Mechanical a.org/learn/mechanic
Autodesk Approx. 17 hours al-engineering- design-
Engineering Design
CAD/CAM/
and Manufacturing manufacturing
CAE for
3 V Mechanical with Fusion 360
Engineering
Modeling and Design https://www.courser
-I
for Mechanical Approx. 23 hours a.org/learn/modeling
Engineers with -design-mechanical-
Autodesk Fusion 360 engineers

https://www.courser
Approx. a.org/learn/3d-
3D Printing Capstone
8hours printing-capstone

Approx 48 hrs
Total

69
 VISION
"To become a department of eminence in the field of Mechanical Engineering"

MISSION
"To deliver an excellent undergraduate engineering program that prepares
students for successful careers with social sensitivity, and also actively promote
the culture of research amongst students and faculty."
 Program Outcomes (Graduate Attributes)
1. Engineering Knowledge: Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering
fundamentals and an engineering specialization to the solution of complex
engineering problems.
2. Problem Analysis: Identify, formulate, research literature and analyze complex
engineering problems reaching substantiated conclusions using first principles of
mathematics, natural sciences and engineering sciences.
3. Design/Development of solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering
problems and design system components or processes that meet specified needs with
appropriate consideration for public health and safety, cultural, societal and
environmental considerations.
4. Conduct investigations of complex problems using research based knowledge and
research methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data
and synthesis of information to provide valid conclusions.
5. Modern Tool Usage: Create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources and
modern engineering and IT tools including prediction and modeling to complex
engineering activities with an understanding of the limitations.
6. The Engineer and Society: Apply reasoning informed by contextual knowledge to
assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent
responsibilities relevant to professional engineering practice.
7. Environment and Sustainability: Understand the impact of professional engineering
solutions in societal and environmental context and demonstrate knowledge of and
need for sustainable development.
8. Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities
and norms of engineering practice.
9. Individual and Team work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a member
or leader in diverse teams and in multi-disciplinary settings.
10. Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with
the engineering community and with society at large, such as being able to
comprehend and write effective reports and design documentation, make effective
presentations and give and receive clear instructions.
11. Lifelong learning: Recognize the need for and have the preparation and ability to
engage in independent and life-long learning in the broadest context of technological
change.
12. Project Management and Finance: Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of
engineering and management principles and apply these to one’s own work, as a
member and leader in a team, to manage projects in multidisciplinary environments.
 Program Educational Objectives
Students of BE Programme in Mechanical Engineering will be able to:
PEO 1: Prepare with strong foundation in mathematical, scientific and engineering
fundamentals that will enable them to have successful career in Mechanical and
Interdisciplinary Industries.
PEO 2: Strengthen their knowledge and skills through self-learning abilities throughout
their professional career or during higher education.
PEO 3: Impart critical thinking skills and to develop innovative ideas for Research &
Development

Program Specific Outcomes

PSO 1: Identify, Formulate and Analyze complex Engineering problems in Thermal

Engineering, Design Engineering and Manufacturing Engineering domains
PSO 2: An ability to find out, articulate the local industrial problems and solve with the
use of Mechanical Engineering tools for realistic outcomes.
PSO 3: An ability of collaborative learning to find out cost-effective, optimal solution
sustainable growth.
 T.E. Semester –V (Mechanical Engineering)
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)
Course Description Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination scheme
Modes of Continuous Assessment /
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Evaluation
Practical/Or Term Work
Sr. Course Hours Per Week Theory (100)
Course Title al (25) (25)
No
. Code Credits Total
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact IA(25) ESE(75) PR/OR TW
Hours
1 PCC-ME501 Heat Transfer 3 - 2 5 4 25 75 - 25 125
Mechanical Measurements
2 PCC-ME502 3 - 2 5 4 25 75 25 25 150
and Control
3 PCC-ME503 Theory of Machine-II 3 - 2 5 4 25 75 25 25 150
4 HSMCME 501 Soft Skills and Interpersonal 3 - - 3 3 25 75 - - 100
Communication
5 PEC-ME501X Professional Elective 1 3 - 2@ 5 4 25 75 25 25 150
Total 15 - 08 23 19 Total marks 675
Course Description Non Credited Mandatory Course Term Work
1 MC-ME501 Indian constitution 1 - - 1 (Non- Passing is mandatory for this course 25 25
Credit)
Course Description Contact Hrs. during Week End / Semester Break/ End of Semester (Between 21 st and 25th Week)
- - 160 * - - - -
1 SI-ME501 Summer Internship - -
st th
Description Contact Hrs. during Week End / Semester Break/ End of Semester (Between 21 and 25 Week)/During Semester
1 AP-ME501 Activity Points - - 48# - - - - -
Assessment/Evaluation Scheme
Teaching scheme (Holistic Student Development - HSD)
Course Description (Conducted in the beginning of Semester during first 3 Weeks)
Presentation Report Term
AC AC Work
Employability Skill
1 ESD-ME501
Development - III
- - 30 30 1 Based on Parameters Decided by Training and Placement Cell 50
Professional Skill V (Modeling,
2 HSD-MEPS501 simulation in Scilab & Xcos 15 - 30 45 2 50 25 75
programming in Scilab)
HSD-
3 MEPBL501
Project Based Learning -III - - 30 30 1 25 - 25
HSD-
4 MERBL501
Research Based Learning I - - 30 30 1 25 25 50
Total 15 - 120 135 5 Total marks 200
Total 24 Grand Total marks: 900
 PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE I
Course Code Course name Domain
PEC-ME5011 Internal Combustion Engine 1
PEC-ME5012 Mechatronic Systems 2
PEC-ME5013 Mechanical Vibration 3
`

1. IA- In-Semester Assessment, ESE- End Semester Examination, PR- Practical Examination, TW – Term Work Examination, OR- Oral Examination, AC- Activity
evaluation
2. @-Professional Elective Courses Lab will be conducted in the form of Capstone Project
*This is part of Summer Internship but can start in winter. Students may go unto 160 hrs. to acquire maximum 6 credits in Semester 6.

Total hrs. mentioned should be completed till end of Semester 4. Credits will be awarded at the end of 4th Semester and will be reflected in the Grade
Card of 4th Semester.
Student will get 1-year span to acquire the credits. Students should collectively acquire total contact hrs in below given activities in a span of 1 year.
Student will submit a report to earn Teamwork marks in internship.

Following activities should be considered for Summer Internship: -

1) Participation in inhouse internship at the end of 3rd and 4th Semester of 2 week each.
2) Other activity which also will be considered are:
Participation in Hackathon, Development of new Product/ Business Plan / Registration of start-up, Participation in IPR workshop/Leadership talks/Idea/
Design / Innovation/Technical Expos, Internship with Industry / Govt. / NGO/ PSU/MSME/Online Internship, Long Term Goals under Rural Internship

Note:-For Above Activities mentioned in point 2, if Student is part of Organizing Committee or Participating a Competition at
University/State/National/international Level then it will be considered as Internship else it will be considered as Activity Points.

# As per AICTE, Students has to earn 100 Points by participating in 400 Hrs. of activities during 4 years of Engineering. After Completing 48 hrs. of
Activities, Students can earn 12 Points. This Points will not be reflected in Grade Card. Separate transcript will be issued to students after completion of
Final Year.

Dr. Siddesh S. Dr. Deven Shah Dr. B. K. Mishra

BOS Chairman Vice-Principal Principal
 T.E. Semester –VI (Mechanical Engineering)
Proposed Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)
Course Description Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination scheme
Sr. Course Course Title Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
No. Code Hours Per Week Credits Theory (100) Practical/Oral (25) Term Work (25) Total
Theory Tutorial Pract Contact Hours IA (25) ESE (75) PR/OR TW

1 PCC-ME601 Machine Design I 3 1 - 4 4 25 75 - 25 125

2 PCC-ME602 Applied Thermodynamics
3 - 2 5 4 25 75 25 25 150
3 PCC-ME603 Metrology and Quality
3 - 2 5 4 25 75 25 25 150
engineering
4 PEC- Professional Elective II
3 - 2@ 5 4 25 75 25 25 150
ME601X
5 OEC- Open Elective 1
3 - - 3 3 25 75 - - 100
ME601X
Total 15 1 6 22 19 - - Total marks 675
Course Description Non Credited Mandatory Course (Passing is mandatory for this course) Term Work
1 MC-ME601 Essence of Indian Knowledge (Non-
1 - - 1 - 25 25
Tradition Credit)
Course Description Contact Hrs. during Semester Break/ End of Semester(Between 21 st and 25th Week) Term Work
- - 160 * - 240* 4 *- 6* - - - 50
1 SI-ME601 Summer Intership - 50
2 AP-ME601 Activity Points - - 52# - - - - - -
Course Description Teaching scheme (Holistic Student Development -HSD) Assessment/Evaluation Scheme
(Conducted in the beginning of Semester during first 3 Weeks) Presentation Report Term
Work
AC AC
1 ESD-ME601 Employability Skill
- - 30 30 1 Based on Parameters Decided by Training and Placement Cell 50
Development - IV
1 HSD- Professional Skill VI(Finite
MEPS601 Element Analysis) 15 - 30 45 2 50 25 75

2 HSD- Project Based Learning-IV

MEPBL601 - - 30 30 1 25 - 25

3 HSD- Research Based Learning-II

- - 30 30 1 25 25 50
MERBL601
Total 15 - 120 135 5 Total marks 200
Total 28 Grand Total marks: 950
 PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE II OPEN ELECTIVE I
Course Code Course name Domain Course Code Course name
PEC-ME6011 Design of Pressure Vessels 1 OEC-ME6011 Digital Marketing
PEC-ME6012 Power Plant Engineering 2 OEC-ME6012 Software Process Automation
PEC-ME6013 Robotics 3 OEC-ME6013 Entrepreneurship development
and management
PEC- ME6014 Refrigeration & Air Conditioning 2 OEC-ME6014 Cyber Security and Laws
OEC-ME6015 Reliability Engineering
OEC-ME6016 Product life cycle management

1. IA- In-Semester Assessment, ESE- End Semester Examination, PR- Practical Examination, TW – Term Work Examination, OR- Oral Examination, AC- Activity evaluation
2. @-Professional Elective Courses Lab will be conducted in the form Capstone Project
* Students may go upto 240 hrs. to acquire maximum 6 credits. Students should collectively acquire total contact hrs in above activities
in a span of 1 year (5th and 6th Semester). Student will submit a report to earn Term work marks in internship at the end of 6th Semester.

Following activities should be considered for tr:-

1)Participitation in inhouse internship at the end of 5th and 6th semester of 2 week each.
2)Other activity which also will be considered are: Participation in Hackathon, Development of new Product/ Business Plan /
Registration of start-up, Participation in IPR workshop/Leadership talks/Idea/ Design / Innovation/Technical Expos, Internship with
Industry / Govt. / NGO/ PSU/MSME/Online Internship, Long Term Goals under Rural Internship.

Note:- For Above Activities mentioned in point 2, if Student is part of Organizing Committee or Participating a Compitition at
University/State/National/international Level then it will be considered as Internship else it will be considered as Activity Points.

#As per AICTE, Students has to earn 100 Points by participating in 400 Hrs. of activities during 4 years of Engineering. After
Completing 52 hrs. of Activities, Students can earn 12 Points. This Points will not be reflected in Grade Card. Separate transcript will be
issued to students after completion of Final Year.
 T.E. Semester –V
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
Under TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)

B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) T.E. SEM : V

Course Name : Heat Transfer Course Code :PCC ME501
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total
(100) (25) (25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR/OR TW
Hours
3 2 5 4 25 75 - 25 125

IA: Mid Semester Assessment- Paper Duration – 1.5 Hours

ESE : End Semester Evaluation- Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work / Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: Physics , Thermodynamics, Fluid mechanics

Course Objectives:
This course intends to deals with the fundamentals of Heat Transfer including Basic modes of heat
transfer, the governing laws of these modes of heat transfer and mathematical modeling and
applications of these basic laws in heat transfer engineering. This course will provide the basis for
designing the equipment’s like heat exchangers, Heat pipe based on the concepts of heat transfer.

Course Outcomes:
SN Course Outcomes Cognitive levels
as per bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Identify & explain the three modes of heat transfer L1, L2
(conduction, convection and radiation).

2 Develop the mathematical model for heat transfer by L1, L2, L3, L4
conduction with steady state condition.

3 Develop the mathematical model for heat transfer by L1, L2, L3, L4
conduction for Unsteady state condition and for extended surfaces.

4 Develop the mathematical model for heat transfer by L1, L2

convection.

5 Develop the mathematical model for heat transfer by radiation L1, L2, L3, L4

6 Develop the mathematical model for different heat exchangers. L1, L2, L3, L4
Detailed Syllabus:

Module Topics Hrs. Cognitive

No. levels as
per bloom’s
Taxonomy
Introduction

1 Typical heat transfer situations, Modes of heat transfer, heat transfer L1, L2
parameters, various thermo physical properties 4
Conduction (Steady state with and without internal heat 7
generation) L1, L2, L3,
2 Fourier’s law of heat conduction, thermal conductivity, differential equation of L4
heat conduction with heat generation in unsteady state in the Cartesian
coordinate system, Boundary and initial conditions, Solution to three
dimensional steady heat conduction problems, Steady heat conduction in plane
walls, composite walls, Concept of thermal resistance and thermal resistance
network, Heat conduction in cylinders and spheres, Differential equation of
heat conduction in cylindrical co- ordinates, Conduction through
Cylindrical and Spherical composite walls (Derivation NOT INCLUDED
for Spherical walls), Critical thickness/radius of insulation and its importance.
Extended Surfaces and Transient Heat Conduction
Heat transfer from finned surfaces, Types of fins, Fin equation for 7
rectangular fin and its solution, Fin efficiency, Fin effectiveness, Transient L1, L2, L3,
3 L4
conduction, Lumped system analysis, One dimensional transient problems
analytical solutions, One dimensional Heisler charts
Convection
Physical mechanism of convection, Natural and Forced convection, 9 L1, L2, L3,
4 Velocity/hydrodynamic and Thermal boundary layer, Velocity and L4
temperature profile, Differential equation of heat convection, Laminar flow
heat transfer in circular pipe, constant heat flux and constant wall temperature,
thermal entrance region, Turbulent flow heat transfer in circular pipes, Pipes
of other cross sections, Heat transfer in laminar and turbulent flow over a flat
plate, Heat pipe introduction and applications, Principles of dimensional
analysis and its application in convective heat transfer, Empirical correlations
for convection, Physical significance of various dimensionless numbers useful
in natural and forced convection
Radiation
Thermal radiation, Blackbody radiation, Radiation intensity, Radiative 9 L1, L2, L3
5 properties, Basic laws of radiation (Plank’s law, Kirchoff’s law, Stefan-
Boltzman law, Wien’s displacement law, Lambert’s cosine law, Radiation
exchange between black surfaces, Shape factor, Radiation exchange between
gray surfaces, Radiosity- Irradiation method, Radiation shield and the
radiation effect
Heat Exchangers, Boiling and Condensation L1, L2, L3
9
6
 Types of heat exchangers, Overall heat transfer coefficient, Analysis of heat
exchangers, LMTD method, Effectiveness-NTU method, Correction factor
and effectiveness of heat exchangers
Boiling heat transfer, Pool boiling, Flow boiling, Condensation heat transfer,
Film condensation, Drop wise condensation

Books and References:

SN Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

1 Fundamentals of Heat and F. P. Incropera and D. Wiley 3rd Edition 2014
Mass Transfer P.DeWitt India

2 Heat and Mass Transfer R K Rajput S.Chand and 4th Edition 2014
Company
3 Fundamental of Engineering Yunus A Cengel McGraw Hill 2nd Edition 2012
Thermodynamics International
4 . Heat and Mass Transfer P K Nag Tata McGraw 2nd Edition 2016
Hill
5 Heat Transfer S P Sukhatme University Press 2nd Edition 2016

Cognitive
Sr. No levels as
Type of Practical/Experiment Topic Hrs.
Experiment per bloom’s

01 Heat transfer through lagged pipe 02 L1, L2, L3

02 Heat transfer through composite wall 02 L1, L2, L3

03 Thermal conductivity of insulating powder 02 L1, L2, L3
04 Basic Experiments Pin Fin apparatus 04 L1, L2, L3

05 Natural convection heat transfer 02 L1, L2, L3

Forced convection heat transfer
06 02 L1, L2, L3
Emissivity measurement apparatus
07 02 L1, L2, L3, L4

08 Parallel flow/ counter flow Heat Exchanger 02 L1, L2, L3,

Design Experiment
09 Unsteady state heat transfer 02 L1, L2, L3,
Mini/Minor/Projects
10 /Case Mini Project 02 L1, L2, L3 ,
 T.E. Semester –V
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
under TCET Autonomy Scheme (w. e. f.A.Y. 2020-21)

B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) S.E. SEM: V

Course Name: Mechanical Measurements and
Control Course Code: MEPC502

Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)

Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Theory Practical/Oral Term Work
Hours Per Week (100) (25) (25) Total
Contact
Theory Tutorial Practical Credits IA ESE PR/OR TW
Hours

3 - 2 5 4 25 75 - 25 125

IA:In-Semester Assessment - Paper Duration – 1.5 Hours ESE : End

Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: Mechatronics and control system , Fluid Mechanics , Basic electrical concepts

Course Objectives:
Course intends to deliver the knowledge of various types of electrical and mechanical methods which can be
used to measure different types of variables like pressure , temperature ,etc.It also provides the knowledge of the
control system which can be used to control the variables and also how to provide the stability to the system.

Course Outcomes: Student shall be able to

SN Course Outcomes Cognitive levels as per

bloom’s Taxonomy
Classify various types of static characteristics and types of errors occurring in the
1 L1, L2
system.
Classify and select proper measuring instrument for displacement and strain
2 L1, L2, L3
measurement.
Classify and select proper measuring instrument for angular velocity and
3 L1, L2, L3
acceleration and temperature measurement
Classify and select proper measuring instrument for pressure and flow , force ,
4 L1, L2, L3
torque and power measurement.
Analyse error and differentiate various types of control systems and time domain
5 L1, L2, L3,L4
specifications
6 Analyse the problems associated with stability L1, L2, L3,L4
Detailed Syllabus:
Module Topics Hrs. Cognitive levels as
No. per bloom’s
Taxonomy
Introduction to Measurement

1 Significance of Mechanical Measurements, Classification of L1, L2,L3

measuring instruments, generalized measurement system, types of 7
inputs: Desired, interfering and modifying inputs.

Static characteristics: Static calibration, Linearity, Static Sensitivity,

Accuracy, Static error, Precision, Reproducibility, Threshold,
Resolution, Hysteresis, Drift, Span & Range etc.

Errors in measurement: Types of errors, Effect of component errors,

Probable errors.
Displacement and Strain Measurement
7 L1, L2, L3
2 Displacement Measurement: Transducers for displacement, displacement
measurement, potentiometer, LVDT, Capacitance Types, Digital
Transducers (optical encoder) , Nozzle Flapper Transducer
Strain Measurement: Theory of Strain Gauges, gauge factor, temperature
Compensation, Bridge circuit, orientation of strain gauges for force and
torque, Strain gauge based load cells and torque sensors
Angular velocity, Acceleration and temperature measurement
7
Measurement of Angular Velocity: Tachometers, Tachogenerators,
L1, L2, L3
3 Digital tachometers and Stroboscopic Methods.
Acceleration Measurement: theory of accelerometer and vibrometers,
practical accelerometers, strain gauge based and piezoelectric
accelerometers
Temperature Measurement: Electrical methods of temperature
measurement Resistance thermometers, Thermistors and thermocouples,
Pyrometers
Pressure , Flow and force,Torque and Power measurement
8 L1, L2, L3
4 Pressure Measurement: Elastic pressure transducers viz. Bourdon tubes,
diaphragm, bellows and piezoelectric pressure sensors, High Pressure
Measurements, Bridge man gauge. Vacuum measurement: Vacuum gauges
viz. McLeod gauge, Ionization and Thermal Conductivity gauges
Flow Measurement: Bernoulli flowmeters, Ultrasonic Flowmeter,
Magnetic flow meter, rotameter
Force, Torque and Power Measurement: Direct methods and indirect
method, force measuring inst. Torque measuring inst., Types of
dynamometers, Absorption dynamometer, prony brake and rope brake
dynamometer, and power measuring inst. Etc

Analysis of Systems

Transient and steady state analysis of first and second order system. 8 L1, L2, L3,L4
5
Time Domain specifications. Step response of second order system.
Steady-state error, error coefficients, steady state analysis of different
type of systems using step, ramp and parabolic inputs
 Stability Analysis
Introduction to concepts of stability, The Routh criteria for stability 8 L1, L2, L3,L4
6
Experimental determination of frequency response, Stability
analysis using Root locus, Bode plot and Nyquist Plots

State space modelling

Process control systems, ON-OFF control. P-I-D Control

Books and References:

SR
N Title Authors Publisher Edition Year
Measurement Systems: 5th
EO Doebelin McGraw Hill 2006
1 Applications and Design Edition
Mechanical Engineering A K Sawhney Dhanpat Rai&
2 Measurements Sons, New Delhi

3 Control systems Dhanesh Manik Cengage Learning

Control System Nagrath IJ and
Wiley EasternLtd
4 Engineering Gopal M,

Online References:

Sr.
No. Website Name URL Modules Covered
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Z6evuxYjYMs&list=
1 https://nptel.ac.in M1-M4
PLSGws_74K019wiWyVU3CnVMMqAcF3_sxz

Suggested List of Practicals /Experiments:

Cognitive levels as
Practic per bloom’s
al Type of Experiment Practical/Experiment Topic Hrs.
Taxonomy
No.

01 Calibration of Displacement sensors 02 L1, L2, L3

LVDT
02 Calibration of Pressure Gauges 02 L1, L2, L3
03 Calibration of tachometers 02 L1, L2, L3
04 Basic Experiments Calibration of strain gauges 04 L1, L2, L3

05 Speed measurement using stroboscope 02 L1, L2, L3

Experiment on transient state response of
06 a control system L1, L2, L3
02
Experiment on frequency response system
07 02 L1, L2, L3, L4
identification
Experiment on design of PID controller
08 for a system. 02 L1, L2, L3,
Design Experiment
09 Torque measurement using strain gauges 02 L1, L2, L3,
Mini/Minor/Projects/Cas
10 e Mini project 02 L1, L2, L3 ,
 S.E. Semester –V
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
Under TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)

B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) S.E. SEM: V

Course Name: Theory of Machines II Course Code: MEPC503
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total
(100) (25) (25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR/OR TW
Hours
3 - 1 4 4 25 75 25 25 150

IA:In-Semester Assessment - Paper Duration – 1.5 Hours

ESE : End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: Knowledge of Principles studied in Engineering Mechanics, Strength of Materials, Theory
of Machines - I

Course Objectives:

Course intend to deliver the fundamental knowledge of the various machine elements which in turn becomes
effective for different applications

Course Outcomes:

SN Course Outcomes Cognitive levels as

per bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Able to Analyze and select appropriate clutches for different operating L1, L2
conditions.
2 Able to Analyze brakes for torque absorbed in different operating conditions L1, L2, L3

3 Able to Analyze governors and gyroscopes and study their applications L1, L2, L3, L4

4 Able to Design gear trains and flywheel for any application L1, L2, L3

5 Able to identify and select appropriate power transmission elements in L1, L2, L3, L4
machines.

6 Able to select appropriate toothed gear mechanism for various applications. L1, L2, L3, L4
Detailed Syllabus
Module Topics Hrs. Cognitive
No. levels as
per bloom’s
Taxonomy
Clutches
1.1 Introduction to Clutches, classification, Types, Requirement of clutch
Torque carrying capacity using uniform pressure, and uniform wear of
1 Single Plate Clutch, multi-plate clutch , Cone Clutch 6 L1, L2
1.2 Centrifugal Clutches

Brakes and Dynamometers

2.1 Introduction to Brakes, classification and its types, Requirement of brake, L1, L2, L3
2 Working, construction and analysis of Block or Shoe brake, Band brakes, Band 10
and Block brake, Braking of vehicle on front wheel, Rear wheel, All four wheels
2.2 Dynamometer, types of dynamometer, Prony brake dynamometer, Rope
brake dynamometer
Governors
Introduction to governors, classification, its Types, Force analysis of the watt
governor, Porter governor, Proell governor ,Hartnell governor, Hartung L1, L2, L3,
3 Governor and Wilson- Hartnell governor. Characteristic of the governor - 8 L4
Sensitiveness, Hunting, Stability, Isochronism, Effort and Power of Governor,
Controlling force diagram.(Numerical only on Porter and Hartnell governors)
Flywheels

Flywheel: Introduction to Flywheel and Turning moment diagram, 5 L1, L2, L3

4
Fluctuation of Energy, Estimating Inertia of flywheel for reciprocating,
prime mover and machine
Gyroscope
Introduction to Gyroscope, Derivation of gyroscopic couple, Gyroscopic
5 effects in Naval Ships during steering, pitching and rolling, Gyroscopic 8 L1, L2, L3,
effects in Aero planes, Stability of vehicles in Four Wheeler and Two L4
Wheeler (Numericals only on Stability vehicles in Two Wheeler)
Gear Trains
Introduction, its Classification, Types of gear trains, Kinematic and L1, L2, L3,
6 dynamic analysis of the simple gear trains, compound gear trains, epicyclic 8 L4
gear trains, reverted gear trains
Books and References:
SN Title Autho Publisher Edition Year
rs
1 Theory of Machines S. S. Rattan Tata McGraw 4th Edition 2017
Hill
Publications
2 Theory of Machines & P. L. Ballaney Khanna 3rd Edition 2005
Mechanisms Publishers

3 Theory of Machines & A. G. Ambekar Prentice Hall Seventh 2007

Mechanisms India Printing
(October)
4 Theory of Machines Thomas Bevan Pearson 3rd Edition 2005
Education
India
5 Theory or Mechanisms Amitabh Ghosh and Affiliated 3rd Edition 2017
and Machines A. Kumar Malik East-West
Press Pvt. Ltd.
6 Kinematics of R. T. Hinkle Prentice Hall 2nd Revised 2008
Machines Inc. Edition

7 Theory of Machines Khurmi, R. S. Chand & 14th Edition 2017

Co. Ltd.,

Online References:

Sr.No. Website Name URL Modules

Covered
1 https://nptel.ac.in https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104121/ M1-M6

Suggested List of Practicals /Experiments:

Cognitive levels as
Practical
Type of Experiment Practical/Experiment Topic Hrs. per bloom’s
Number
Taxonomy
01 To study clutches Single Plate 02 L1, L2
Clutch, multi-plate clutch , Cone
Basic Experiments Clutch
02 To study power transmission 02 L1, L2
mechanisms – Gear trains
03 Experiment on Governors - Watt 02 L1, L2, L3, L4
Governor
04 Experiment on Governors- Porter 02 L1, L2, L3, L4
Governor
05 Design Experiments Experiment on Governors - 02 L1, L2, L3, L4
Hartnell Governor
06 Experiments on Gyroscope 02 L1, L2, L3, L4
07 To study working of rope brake 02 L1, L2
dynamometer
06 To study working of prony 02 L1, L2, L3, L4
brake dynamometer
07 To study and model flywheel 02 L1, L2, L3, L4
08 To design a power transmission 02 L1, L2, L3, L4, L5,
mechanism for suitable application L6
09 Mini/Minor To develop mini project 02 L1, L2, L3, L4, L5, L6
Projects/Case studies
10 Case Study – E-Vehicle 02 L1, L2, L3, L4
(mechanical Parts)
 T.E. Semester –V
Proposed Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development(CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2021-22)
B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) B.E. SEM: V
Course Name: Soft Skills and Interpersonal Communication Course Code: HSMC-MECH601

Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)

Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total
(100) (20) (20)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR/ OR TW
Hours
100
3 - - 3 3 25 75 - -

IA: In-Semester Assessment- Paper Duration-1

Hours ESE : End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely completion of
practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: Engineering : Basic knowledge of English language, Grammar and Vocabulary

Course Objectives: The course intends to understand basics of soft skills, learn essential life skills, understand and
develop self and incorporate ethics and etiquette in day to day life

Course Outcomes: Upon completion of the course students will be able to:

SN Course Outcomes Cognitive Levels of

attainment as per
Blooms Taxonomy
1 Understand basics of soft skills L1, L2, L3
2 Learn essential life skills L1, L2, L3
3 Understand and develop self L1, L2, L3

4 Understand others with empathy L1, L2, L3

5 Use employment skills for placement and higher studies L1, L2, L3
6 Incorporate ethics and etiquette in day to day life L1, L2, L3
 Detailed Syllabus:

Module No. Topics Cognitive

Levels of
attainment as
per Blooms
Taxonomy
Introduction to Soft Skills
1.1 Meaning and Concept
1.2 Importance of soft Skills L1, L2, L3
1 1.3 Soft Skills for Lifelong learning- Building a better world
Essential Soft Skills
2.1 Personal integrity
2.2 Taking responsibility
2.3 Professionalism
2 2.4 Communication L1, L2, L3
2.5 Critical Thinking
2.6 Creativity and Innovation
Self-Development
3.1 Self-assessment, Awareness,
3 3.2 Perception and Attitudes, Values and beliefs,
3.3 Personal goal setting, career planning, Self-esteem. L1, L2, L3
3.4 Personal memory
3.5 Rapid reading & Taking Notes
3.6 Complex problem solving
3.7 Creativity
Introduction to Interpersonal Skills L1, L2, L3
4.1 Teamwork: Mentorship, Motivation
4 4.2 Problem Solving
4.3 Decision Making
4.4 Time Management
4.5 Emotional Intelligence
4.6 Negotiation Skills
4.7 Stress Management
Employability Skills
5.1 Cover Letter
5 L1, L2, L3
5.2 Resume
5.3 Group Discussion
5.4 Presentation skills
5.5 Interview skills
Introduction to Corporate Ethics and Etiquette
6.1 Business etiquette (meeting etiquette, Dining etiquette, Interview etiquette,
6 Professional and work etiquette and Social Skills)
6.2 Greetings and art of conversation L1, L2, L3
6.3 Dressing and grooming
6.4 Ethical codes of conduct in business
 Books and References:

Sr. Name of the Book Name of the Publisher Edition Year of

No Author Publication
1 Practical English Michael Swan OUP 4th Edition 1995
Usage
2 Remedial English F.T. Wood Macmillan 2014 Edition 2007
Grammar
3 Pocket Style Manual Diane Hacker Bedford 2003 Edition 2003
publication, (ISBN
New York 0312406843)
4 You Can Win Shiv Khera Macmillan 2003 Edition 2003
Books, New
York
5 Technical Writing & Thomas N. McGraw Hill 2011 Edition 2011
Professional Huckin & Leslie Education
Communication for A. Olsen
non-native speakers
of English
6 The 7 Habits of Stephen Covey Free Press 2016 Edition 2016
Highly Effective
People

Online Reference

Sr. Website name URL Modules

No. covered

1 NPTEL NPTEL :: Humanities and Social Sciences - NOC:Developing M1 to M6

Soft Skills and Personality
2 NPTEL NPTEL :: Humanities and Social Sciences - NOC:Soft skills M1 to M6

3 NPTEL https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc21_hs02/ M1 to M6

4 REED Free Online Reboot Your CV Skills Course | reed.co.uk M5

 T.E. Semester –V
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
Under TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)

B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) T.E. SEM: V

Course Name: Professional Skills – V (Modeling, simulation Course Code: HSD-MEPS501
in Scilab & Xcos programming in Scilab)
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Presentation Rep Total
(Conducted in the beginning of Semester during first 3 ort
Weeks)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits AC AC
Hours
15 - 30 45 2 50 25 75
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: Engineering Mathematics, Basic Control System, Scilab

Course Objectives:
Course intend to deliver the Modeling, simulation in Scilab & Xcos programming in Scilab

Course Outcomes:

SN Course Cognitive
Outcomes levels
as per
bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Able to solve linear equation using Scilab L1, L2, L3, L4

2 Able to use ODE suite of Scilab L1, L2, L3, L4

3 Able to apply knowledge of control system & build Transfer function & L1, L2, L3, L4
plot first order & second order Response in Scilab

4 Able to use Xcos module of scilab L1, L2, L3, L4

Detailed Syllabus:

Cognitive levels as per

Module No. Topics Hrs
bloom’s Taxonomy
File Handling- Scilab File handling, Working
with Excel , Solving Nonlinear Equations
1 Linear equations Gaussian Methods, Linear 4 L1,L2,L3,L4
equations Iterative Methods
Interpolation

ODE Euler methods

ODE Applications
2 Solving ODEs using Scilab ode Function Use 2 L1,L2,L3,L4
Scilab ode function Solve typical examples of
ODEs Plot the solution
Control system engineering in Scilab - Building
transfer function of control system
3 3 L1,L2,L3,L4
Plotting of step, ramp response of first and second
order control systems

Introducing xcos - Scilab connected object

simulator-Block diagram representation of control
system
4 Stability concepts - Pole-zero representation. 6 L1,L2,L3,L4
Plotting of RL & Bode Plot in Scilab,
From Transfer Function to state space and from
state space to transfer function.
Books and References:

SN Ti Autho Publisher Year

tle rs
1 Introduction to SCILAB Rachna Verma and Amazon Asia 2019
Rachna Verma and Arvind Arvind Verma Pacific
Verma Holdings
Private
Limited
2 SCILAB—A Beginner’s Anil Kumar Verma Cengage 2018
Approach

Online Reference

Website name URL Modules covered

1 Spoken Tutorial https://spoken- M1-M4
tutorial.org/tutorial-
search/?search_foss=Scilab&sear
ch_language=English
List of Practicals / Experiments

Sr. Experiment topic Type of Experiments Hrs. Cognitive levels of

No attainment per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
1 File handling & working with Basic Experiments 2 L1, L2
Excel
2 Solving linear equation using Scilab Basic Experiments 2 L1, L2, L3

3 Solving ODE using Euler method Basic Experiments 2 L1, L2, L3

4 Solving ODE using ode function Basic Experiments 2 L1, L2, L3

5 Building transfer function of Design Experiments 2 L1, L2, L3

control system
6 Plotting of step, ramp response of Design Experiments 2 L1, L2, L3
first and second order control
systems
7 Plotting of root locus in Scilab Design Experiments 2 L1, L2, L3

8 Plotting of Bode Plot in Scilab Design Experiments 2 L1, L2, L3

9 Case Study Case Study 2 L1, L2, L3,L4

10 Mini Project Mini Project 2 L1, L2, L3,L4

 T.E. Semester –V
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
Under TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)

B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) T.E. SEM: V

Course Name: Professional Skills –V Course Code: HSD-MEPS501
(Modeling, simulation in Scilab & Xcos programming in Scilab)
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Presentation Report Total

Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits AC AC

Hours
1 - 2 3 2 50 25 75

The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely completion of
practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: Engineering Mathematics, Basic Control System, Scilab

Course Objectives:
Course intend to deliver the Modeling, simulation in Scilab & Xcos programming in Scilab

Course Outcomes:

SN Course Outcomes Cognitive levels

as per bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Able to solve linear equation using Scilab L1, L2, L3, L4

2 Able to use ODE suite of Scilab L1, L2, L3, L4

3 Able to apply knowledge of control system & build Transfer function & plot L1, L2, L3, L4
first order & second order Response in Scilab

4 Able to use Xcos module of scilab L1, L2, L3, L4

Detailed Syllabus:

Cognitive levels as per

Module No. Topics Hrs
bloom’s Taxonomy
File Handling- Scilab File handling, Working
with Excel ,Solving Nonlinear Equations
1 Linear equations Gaussian Methods,Linear 4 L1,L2,L3,L4
equations Iterative Methods
Interpolation

ODE Euler methods

ODE Applications
2 Solving ODEs using Scilab ode Function Use 2 L1,L2,L3,L4
Scilab ode function Solve typical examples of
ODEs Plot the solution

23
 Control system engineering in Scilab - Building
transfer function of control system
3 3 L1,L2,L3,L4
Plotting of step, ramp response of first and second
order control systems

Introducing xcos - Scilab connected object

simulator-Block diagram representation of control
system
4 Stability concepts - Pole-zero representation. 6 L1,L2,L3,L4
Plotting of RL & Bode Plot in Scilab,
From Transfer Function to state space and from
state space to transfer function.
Books and References:

SN Title Authors Publisher Year

1 Introduction to SCILAB Rachna Rachna Verma and Arvind Amazon Asia 2019
Verma and Arvind Verma Verma Pacific Holdings
Private Limited
2 SCILAB—A Beginner’s Anil Kumar Verma Cengage 2018
Approach

Online Reference

Website name URL Modules covered

1 Spoken Tutorial https://spoken-tutorial.org/tutorial- M1-M4
search/?search_foss=Scilab&search
_language=English

List of Practicals / Experiments

Sr. Experiment topic Type of Experiments Hrs. Cognitive levels of

No attainment per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
1 File handling & working with Excel Basic Experiments 2 L1, L2

2 Solving linear equation using Scilab Basic Experiments 2 L1, L2, L3

3 Solving ODE using Euler method Basic Experiments 2 L1, L2, L3

4 Solving ODE using ode function Basic Experiments 2 L1, L2, L3

5 Building transfer function of control Design Experiments 2 L1, L2, L3

system
6 Plotting of step, ramp response of first Design Experiments 2 L1, L2, L3
and second order control systems
7 Plotting of root locus in Scilab Design Experiments 2 L1, L2, L3

8 Plotting of Bode Plot in Scilab Design Experiments 2 L1, L2, L3

9 Case Study Case Study 2 L1, L2, L3,L4

10 Mini Project Mini Project 2 L1, L2, L3,L4

24
 T.E. Semester –V

Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
Under TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)

BE (Mechanical Engineering) T.E. (SEM: V)

Course Name: Project Based Learning III Course Code: HSD- MEPBL501
Teaching Scheme (Holistic Student Development - HSD) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Presentation Rep Total
ort
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits AC AC
Hours
50
--- 2 2 1 25 25

Prerequisite: Mechanism

Course Objectives:

The course intends to develop the ability to integrate knowledge and skills from various areas through more complex
and multidisciplinary projects. The course also aims to build 21st century success skills such as critical thinking,
problem solving, communication, collaboration and creativity/innovation.

Course Outcomes:

Upon completion of the course students will be able to:

Sr. Course outcomes Cognitive levels of

No. attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
1 Think divergently to solve real time problem through project management and
L1, L2, L3, L4, L5, L6
with knowledge of different domains to implement a unique solution.

A) Guidelines:
1. Project Topic: To proceed with the project work it is very important to select a right topic. Project can
be undertaken on any domain of electronics and telecommunication program.
Department has six domain namely i) Electronic Devices and Modeling ii) Communications
Engineering iii) Antenna and Microwave Engineering iv) Signal processing v) Information Technology
and vi) Embedded System.
2. Student must consult internal guide in selection of topic.
3. Project work must be carried out by a group of at least two students and maximum four. Students
can continue their previous projects and can add new dimension to it.
4. Students should carry out project work every week according to time table and report to the
internal guide regarding the progress of the project.

25
5. Internal guide has to keep track on the progress of the project and also has to maintain attendance
report. This progress report can be used for awarding the term work marks.
6. At the end of the term students should demonstrate the working of the project with the help of a
working model.

Project Report Format:

At the end of semester, a project report should preferably contain at least following details.
1. Abstract
2. Introduction
3. Literature Survey a) Survey Existing system b) Limitation of the Existing system or research
gap c)Problem Statement and Objectives)Scope
4. Proposed System a) Analysis/Framework/ Algorithm b) Details of Hardware & Software
c)Design details d)Methodology (your approach to solve the problem)
5. Results/Output (photograph of working model)
6. Conclusion
7. Reference

Term Work:
Distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:
a) Weekly Attendance as per time table
b) Contribution in the Project work
c) Project Report (Spiral Bound)
d) Term End Presentation

Oral & demonstration:

Oral & Practical examination of Project should be conducted by Internal and External examiners.

26
 T.E. Semester –V
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w. e. f. A.Y. 2019-20)

TE (ALL BRANCHES) SEM: V

Course Name: Research Based Learning 1 Course Code: HSD-MERBL501

Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)

Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Assessment/Evaluation Scheme
Hours Per Week Presentation Report Total
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits AC AC
Hours

- - 2 2 1 25 25

Audit course evaluated by Teacher Guardian

Mid Semester Assessment for Term work will be on continuous
basis Prerequisite: Subject knowledge, Domain knowledge

Course Objectives:

This course is focused to engage the learner in research by upgrading domain knowledge by participation
in technical quiz and debate, critical thinking, innovative idea generation and technical writing.

Course Outcomes:

Upon completion of the course students will be able to:

Sr.No. Course Outcome Cognitive level attainment as per

revised Bloom Taxonomy
1 Upgrade the knowledge of latest technologies in their discipline in L1, L2
a competitive environment.

2 Create new idea for problem solving related to industry or societal L1, L2, L3
issues.
3 Understand research methodologies. L1, L2, L3, L4

4 Students will be able to write a technical paper. L1, L2, L3,L4, L5

Detailed Syllabus:

Module Topics Cognitive level

No. attainment as per revised
Bloom Taxonomy
1 Technical Quiz and Technical Debate L1, L2
I. Quiz competition on technical topics from different domains
with 50 MCQ (Questions will vary according to department).
II. Formation of 8 teams for four topics. 2 teams (For and

27
 Against) for topic I will debate first and the other teams will
be audience.
2 Idea generation with design thinking aspects and related literature survey L1, L2, L3
I. Introduction to design thinking and its stages.
II. Formation of groups, generation of an idea and conducting
literature survey.
3 Proof of concept and validation of idea through survey L1, L2, L3,L4
Seminar on Research methodology
I. Validate the idea by conducting the survey (through Google
docs, interviews or any other suitable method).
II. Seminar on different research methods and procedures for
designing and conducting scientific research.
4 Paper writing skills (Seminar/workshop) L1, L2, L3,L4,L5
Documentation of Selected Idea and its validation
I. Seminar or workshop on paper writing skills.
II. Write a research paper on idea generated.

References:

Sr. No. Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

1. Writing Research Papers: A James D. Lester Longman 10th 2001
Complete Guide
2. Creativity in Product Innovation Jacob Goldenberg Cambridge Kindle 2002
University
Press

Online References:

Sr. Website Name UR Modules

No. L Covered
1. https://www.geeksforgeeks.o https://www.geeksforgeeks.org/tag/c-quiz-references/ M1
rg
2. Interaction Design https://www.interaction- M2
design.org/literature/topics/design-
Foundation: Design Thinking thinking
3. Scribbr: How to write a https://www.scribbr.com/dissertation/methodology/ M3
research methodology.
4. https://www.statpac.com https://www.statpac.com/online-software-manual/Basic- M4
Research-Concepts.htm
5. https://www.slideshare.net https://www.slideshare.net/AsirJohnSamuel/1introduction M4
-to-
research-methodology?next_slideshow=1

28
 T.E. Semester –V
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development
(CBCGS- H 2020) Approved by Board of Studies under TCET Autonomy Scheme
(w. e. f. A.Y. 2020-21)

B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) B.E. SEM: VII

Course Name: Internal Combustion Engines Course Code: PEC-ME5011
Examination Scheme (Formative/
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific)
Summative)
Modes of Continuous Assessment /
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage
Evaluation
Term
Theory Practical/Oral
Hours Per Week Work Total
(100) (20)
(20)
Contact
Theory Tutorial Practical Credits IA ESE PR/ OR TW
Hours

3 - 2 5 4 20 80 25 25 150

IA : In-Semester Assessment- Paper Duration-1

Hours
ESE : End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: Thermodynamics

Course Objectives:
Course should be able to familiarize with the working of S.I. and C.I. engines and acquaint with the various
methods for measurement of engine performance and aware with the latest technological developments in engine
technology

Course Outcomes:

Cognitive levels
Course
SN as per bloom’s
Outcomes
Taxonomy
1 Demonstrate the working of different systems and processes of S.I. L1, L2
engines
2 Demonstrate the working of different systems and processes of C.I. L1, L2, L3, L4
engines
3 Illustrate the working of lubrication, cooling and supercharging systems. L1, L2, L3, L4

4 Analyse engine performance L1, L2, L3

5 Illustrate emission norms and emission control L1, L2, L3

6 Comprehend the different technological advances in engines and L1, L2, L3

alternate fuels

29
 Detailed Syllabus:

Cognitive
Module levels as per
Topics Hrs.
No. bloom’s
Taxonomy

Introduction:
Classification of I.C. Engines; Parts of I.C. Engine and their
materials, Cycle of operation in Four stroke and Two-stroke IC
1
engines and their comparative study; Fuel air cycles and their
analysis, Actual working cycle, Valve Timing Diagram. LHR 8 L1, L2, L3
Engines, Homogeneous charge compression Ignition,Rotary
engine-Six stroke engine concept
SI Engine
Fuel Supply System: Spark ignition Engine mixture requirements,
Fuel-Air ratio, Simple carburettor and auxiliary circuits (excluding
mathematical analysis of carburettors) Injection systems: Single-
point and Multipoint injection, Gasoline Direct Injection
Ignition System:
Battery Ignition System, Magneto Ignition System, Functions and
working of
ignition coil, spark plug, contact breaker point, Requirements and
working of
Ignition advance mechanisms; mechanical and vacuum, Electronic 8
2 Ignition L1, L2, L3,
Systems; Capacitor Discharge Ignition System, Transistorized Coil L4
Assisted
Ignition System, Transistor Ignition system with contactless
breaker
Combustion :
Combustion phenomenon in SI Engines, Ignition delay, Flame
propagation, Pressure-Crank angle diagram, Abnormal combustion,
Auto ignition, Detonation and Knocking, Factors affecting
combustion and detonation, Types of combustion chambers
CI Engine
Fuel Injection Systems: Air injection systems, Airless/solid
injection systems, Common rail, individual pump, distributor and
unit systems. Injection pumps, Fuel injector, Types of nozzle,
Electronically controlled unit fuel injection System Combustion: L1, L2, L3,
8
3 L4
Combustion phenomenon in C I engines, Stages of combustion,
Delay period, Knocking, Pressure-Crank angle diagram, Factors
affecting combustion and knocking, Types of combustion
chambers

30
 Engine lubrication: Types of lubricants and their properties, SAE 8 L1, L2, L3,
4 L4
rating of lubricants, Types of lubrication systems
Engine Cooling: Necessity of engine cooling, disadvantages of
overcooling, Cooling systems and their comparison: Air
cooling, Liquid cooling
Supercharging/Turbo-charging: Objectives, Limitations,
Methods and Types, Different arrangements of turbochargers
and superchargers

Engine Testing and Performance Measurement of Brake Power,

Indicated Power, Frictional Power, Fuel Consumption, Air flow,
BMEP, Performance characteristic of SI and CI Engine Effect of
load and speed on Mechanical, Indicated Thermal, Brake Thermal L1, L2, L3,
and Volumetric efficiencies, Heat balance sheet. 8
5 L4
Engine Exhaust Emission and its control Constituents of exhaust
emission at its harmful effect on environment and human health,
Formation of NOx, HC, CO
Alternative Fuels Alcohol
Alternative Fuels Alcohol - Hydrogen - Natural Gas and
Liquefied Petroleum Gas – Biodiesel- Biogas - Producer Gas -
Properties - Suitability - Engine Modifications - Merits and
Demerits as fuels. Basics of Electronic Engine Controls: Electronic
Control module (ECM), Inputs required and output signals from
6 8 L1, L2, L3, L4
ECM, Sensors: Throttle Position, Inlet Air Temperature, Coolant
Temperature, Crankshaft Position, Camshaft Position, Mass Air
flow and Exhaust Gas Oxygen sensors, their construction and
importance in ECM. Electronic Spark control, Air Management
system, Idle speed control

3 Books Recommended:
1. IC Engine fundamentals: Jhon B. Heywood,Me grew Hill
2. Fundamentals of IC engine: P.W.Gill and James smith, oxford IBH
3. Introduction to Internal Combustion engine: Richard Stone,SAE Inc.,1999
4. IC Engine Fundamentals: V. Ganeshan, Tata McGraw Hill
5. Internal Combution Engine : M.L.Mathur & R.P.Sharma, Dhanpat Rai Publications
6. IC Engine ( Combustion & Emissions):B.P.Pundir,Narosa Publications
7. Thermodynamics: Yunus Cengel,Tata McGraw Hill

31
4. Course Objective :
Course should be able to familiarize with the working of S.I. and C.I. engines and acquaint with the
various methods for measurement of engine performance and aware with the latest technological
developments in engine technology
5. Course Outcome:
1. Demonstrate the working of different systems and processes of S.I. engines
2. Demonstrate the working of different systems and processes of C.I. engines

3. Illustrate the working of lubrication, cooling and supercharging systems.

4. Analyse engine performance

5. Illustrate emission norms and emission control

6. Comprehend the different technological advances in engines and alternate fuels

Online References:

S. Modules
No. Website Name URL
Covered
1 www.nptel.ac.in https://nptel.ac.in/ M1-M6

List of Experiment :

32
 T.E. Semester –V
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2020)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w. e. f. A.Y. 2020-21)

B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) T.E. SEM: V

Course Name: Mechatronic Systems Course Code: PEC-ME5012
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total
(100) (25) (25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR/OR TW
Hours
3 - 2 5 4 25 75 25 25 150

IA: In-Semester Assessment - Paper Duration – 1.5 Hours

ESE : End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: Knowledge of Principles studied in Basic Electricals & Electronics Engineering,
Mechatronics & Control Systems

Course Objectives:

Course intend to deliver the fundamental knowledge of the various mechatronic systems and their components
which in turn becomes effective for different applications in automation.

Course Outcomes:

SN Course Outcomes Cognitive levels as

per bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Able to represent block diagram for suitable application of mechatronic L1, L2, L3
system.
2 Able to design and synthesis pneumatic and hydraulic systems for suitable L1, L2, L3, L4
applications.
3 Able to develop ladder diagrams for suitable applications in mechatronics. L1, L2, L3, L4

4 Able to analyze different control systems. L1, L2, L3, L4

5 Able to select suitable signal conditioning techniques in mechatronic system L1, L2, L3
design.

6 Able to program microcontroller 8051 for different operations. L1, L2, L3

33
Detailed Syllabus
Module Topics Hrs. Cognitive
No. levels as
per bloom’s
Taxonomy
Mechatronic system and its block diagram representation
1.1 Block diagram representation of mechatronic systems, Concept of transfer
function for each element of mechatronic system, Block diagram
1 representation of mechatronic systems in domestic, office, industry, 6 L1, L2
applications
1.2 Case studies on mechatronic system design
Pneumatics and hydraulics
2.1 Pneumatics and hydraulic devices: Different types of valves, Actuators and L1, L2, L3,
2 auxiliary elements, use of their ISO symbols, Design and synthesis of 9 L4
pneumatic and hydraulic circuits (upto 2 cylinders)
2.2 Design and synthesis of electro-pneumatic and electro-hydraulic circuits
(upto 2 cylinders)
Programmable logic controllers
Introduction to programmable logic controller, Architecture, Ladder logic
3 9 L1, L2, L3,
programming for different types of logic gates, Latching, Internal relays,
Timers, Counter, Practical Examples of ladder programming L4
Control system design and analysis
4.1 Root locus method, Frequency response method, Stability margin, Bode
diagram 8 L1, L2, L3,
4 4.2 P, I and D control actions, P, PI, PD and PID control systems, Transient L4
response:- Percentage overshoot, Rise time, Delay time, Steady state error,
PID tuning (manual), Zigler Method
Data Acquisition, Signal Conditioning & Filters
Concept of bit accuracy/width and sampling speed, sampling theorem,
5 Aliasing, Nyquist criteria, ADC (Analog to Digital Convertor): Successive 8 L1, L2, L3
approximation method and sample and hold circuitry, DAC (Digital to
Analog Convertor): R-2R circuit and DAC resolution, Signal Filters: Low
pass, High Pass and Band Pass with circuit diagrams for simple cases
Microcontrollers
6 Microcontroller 8051, Pin diagram of 8051, Architecture of 8051, Software 5 L1, L2, L3
concept of microcontrollers, Introduction to microcontroller programming

34
Books and References:
SN Title Autho Publisher Edition Year
rs
1 Mechatronic System Devdas Shetty and Cengage 2nd Edition 2010
Design Richard A. Kolk Learning

2 MECHATRONICS: William Bolton Pearson 6th Edition 2019

Electronic control
systems in mechanical
and engineering
3 MECHATRONICS: A. Smaili and F. Mrad Oxford South Asia 2015
INTEGRATED University Edition
TECHNOLOGIES FOR Press
INTELLIGENT
MACHINES
4 Mechatronics Tilak Thakur Oxford 1st Edition 2016
University
Press
5 Mechatronics HMT Tata McGraw- - 2017
Hill Education

6 Mechatronics: M.S.Balasundaram, Wiley - 2014

Integrated K.P. Ramachandran
Mechanical and G.K.
Vijayaraghavan
Electronic Systems
7 Programmable Logic W. Bolton Elsevier 4th Edition 2006
Controllers Newnes

Online References:

Sr.No. Website Name URL Modules

Covered
1 https://nptel.ac.in https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112103174/ M1-M6

Suggested List of Practicals /Experiments:

Cognitive levels as
Practical Type of
Practical/Experiment Topic Hrs. per bloom’s
Number Experiment
Taxonomy
01 To analyze mechanical system for frequency 02 L1, L2, L3, L4
response
02 Basic To analyze thermal system for its stability using 02 L1, L2, L3, L4
Experiments root locus technique
03 To experimentally demonstrate application of 02 L1, L2, L3
PLC microcontroller using standard PLC demo
Design setup for controlling DC motor
04 Experiments 02 L1, L2, L3
To experimentally demonstrate application of
PLC microcontroller using standard PLC demo
setup for controlling water level
05 To design sequential operation for two cylinders 02 L1, L2, L3
using electro-hydraulic circuits

35
06 To Design sequential operation for two cylinders 02 L1, L2, L3, L4
using electro- pneumatic circuits
07 To Design & Experimentally implement PID 02 L1, L2
control strategy for Real Time Temperature
Control of furnace
06 To implement logic of ladder programming using 02 L1, L2, L3, L4
OpenPLC Software Platform
07 To interface DC Motor with microcontroller and 02 L1, L2, L3, L4
program for characterization of DC motor
setup
08 To design a mechatronic system for controlling 02 L1, L2, L3, L4, L5,
Mini/Minor manufacturing handling equipment L6
09 Projects/Case To design and develop mechatronic system for 02 L1, L2, L3, L4, L5,
studies suitable application L6
10 Case study – Pick and Place Robot 02 L1, L2, L3, L4

36
 th
VI Sem Syllabus

37
 T.E. SEM VI
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)
B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) T.E. SEM : VI
Course Name: Machine Design I Course Code : PCC-ME601
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Theory
(100) Practical/Oral
(25) Term Work
(25)
Hours Per Week Total

Contact
Theory Tutorial Practical Credits IA ESE PR/OR TW
Hours
125
3 1 - 4 4 25 75 - 25

IA: Mid Semester Assessment- Paper Duration – 1.5 Hours ESE : End
Semester Evaluation- Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work / Report: Formative (40%), Timely completion of practical
(40%) and Attendance (20%)

Prerequisite: Engineering Mechanics, Strength of Materials, Theory of Machines

Course Objectives:
Course should be able to deliver the fundamental knowledge of the use of design data books & various codes of practice to design
various mechanical components.

Course Outcomes:

Cognitive levels as per bloom’s

SN Course Outcomes
Taxonomy

1 Demonstrate understanding of various design considerations L1, L2

2 Illustrate basic principles of machine design. L1, L2, L3,

3 Design machine elements for static as well as dynamic loading. L1, L2, L3, L4

4 Design machine elements on the basis of strength/ rigidity concepts. L1, L2

5 Use design data books in designing various components. L1, L2, L3, L4
Acquire skill in preparing production drawings pertaining to various
6 L1, L2, L3, L4
designs.

38
Detailed Syllabus:

Module Topics Hrs. Cognitive

No. levels as
per
bloom’s
Taxonomy
Introduction to Machine design L1, L2
Mechanical Engineering Design, Design methods, Aesthetic and
1 Ergonomics consideration in design, Material properties and their uses in 6
design, Modes of failures, Factor of safety, Design stresses, Theories of
failures (Selection in the process of designing), Standards, I.S. Codes,
Preferred Series and Numbers.
Design of Curved beams and Thick Cylinders L1, L2,L3
Curved Beams: Assumptions made in the analysis of curved beams, Design
of curved beams: Bending stresses in curved beams, such as crane hook,
2 6
Cframe, etc.
Thick Cylinders: Design of thick cylinders subjected to an internal pressure
using Lame’s equation
Design against static loads L1, L2, L3, L4
3 Design against static loads: Cotter joint, Knuckle joint, Bolted and welded 10
joints under eccentric loading; Power Screw – screw presses, Screw Jack.
Design of fluctuating loads L1, L2
Design against fluctuating loads: variables stresses, reversed, repeated,
Fluctuating stresses.
4 Fatigue failure: static and fatigue stress concentration factors, Endurance 6
limit- estimation of endurance limit, Design for finite and infinite life,
Soderberg and Goodman design criteria, Fatigue design under combined
Stresses.
Design of Shaft , keys and Coupling L1, L2, L3,L4
Design of Shaft: power transmitting, power distribution shafts, Module
(excluding crank shaft) under static and fatigue criteria
5 10
Keys: Types of Keys and their selection based on shafting condition
Couplings: Classification of coupling, Design of Flange couplings, Bush
pin type flexible couplings
Design of Springs L1, L2, L3,L4
6 Design of Springs: Helical compression, Tension Springs under Static and 7
Variable loads, Leaf springs

Books and References:

Sr No Title Authors Publisher Edition Year
1 Design of Machine Elements V.B. Banadari Tata McGraw Hill Pub. 5th Edition 2018
2 Design of Machine Elements Sharma, Purohil Prentice Hall India Publication 3rd Edition 2017
3 Machine Design Pandya & Shah Charotar Publishing 5th Edition 2018
4 Recommended Data Books PSG 5th Edition 2015

Online References:
Sr No Website Name url Modules Covered
1 www.nptel.ac.in http://www.nptel.ac.in/ 01-06

39
 T.E. SEM VI
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)

B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) T.E. SEM: V

Course Name: Applied Thermodynamics Course Code: MEPC602
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total
(100) (25) (25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR/OR TW
Hours
150
3 - 2 5 4 25 75 25 25
IA:In-Semester Assessment - Paper Duration – 1.5 Hours
ESE : End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: Thermodynamics

Course Objectives:

Course intend to deliver the fundamental knowledge of the various energy conversion devices.

Course Outcomes:

Cognitive levels as
SN Course Outcomes per bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Differentiate boilers, boiler mountings and accessories and Calculate L1, L2
boiler efficiency and assess boiler performance
2 To draw velocity triangles for steam turbines and analyze performance L1, L2, L3
3 Demonstrate working cycles of gas turbines L1, L2, L3, L4

4 To understand working principles of jet propulsion engines. L1, L2

5 To analyze the performance of different reciprocating compressors. L1, L2, L3, L4

6 Differentiate and understand working of different rotary type compressors. L1, L2, L3, L4

40
Detailed Syllabus

Cognitive
Module levels as
No. Topics Hr per
s. bloom’s
Taxonomy
Steam Generators
Fire tube and Water tube boiler, Low pressure and high pressure boilers, once
through boiler, examples, and important features of HP boilers, Mountings and 8 L1, L2
1 accessories, Equivalent evaporation of boilers, Boiler performance, Boiler
efficiency
Steam Turbine
Basic of steam turbine, Classification, compounding of turbine, Impulse turbine
– velocity diagram, Condition for max efficiency 10 L1, L2,
2 Reaction turbine - velocity diagram, degree of reaction, Parson's turbine, L3,L4
Condition for maximum efficiency

Gas Turbines
Applications of gas turbine, Actual Brayton cycle, open and closed cycle gas 6
L1, L2, L3,
turbine, methods to improve efficiency and specific output, open cycle with
intercooling, reheat, and regeneration, Effect of operating variable on thermal L4
3 efficiency and work ratio
Jet Propulsion Engines
Classification of jet propulsion engines, Thrust, Thrust power, Propulsive L1, L2, L3
efficiency and thermal efficiency, Afterburner, Introduction to Turbojet, 5
4 Turbofan, Ram jet, Turboprop and Rocket engine

Reciprocating Air Compressor

Computation of work done, isothermal efficiency, effect of clearance
8 L1, L2, L3,
volume, volumetric efficiency, Free air delivery, Theoretical and actual
L4
indicator diagram, Multistage compressors
Constructional details of multistage compressors,
5 Need of multistage, Computation of work done, Volumetric efficiency,
Condition for maximum efficiency, Inter cooling and after cooling
(numerical ), Theoretical and actual indicator diagram for multi stage
compressors
Rotary Air Compressors
Classification, Difference between compressors and blowers, L1, L2, L3,
Working and constructional details of roots blower, Screw type and vane 8 L4
type compressors
6
Centrifugal compressors - velocity diagram, work input and efficiency
Axial flow compressor - velocity triangles and calculation for work input and
efficiency

41
 Books and References:

SN Title Author Publisher edition Year

Khanna Fourth
1 Thermal engineering Ballaney Edition 1994
Publishers

Dhanpatrai & Second

Kothandraman,
2 Thermal engineering Edition 2014
Domkundwar Sons
Thermal engineering R K Rajput S Chand Fourth
3 2004
Edition
Turbine Compressors and Fans S M Yahya McGraw Hill
4

Online References:
Sr. Website Name URL Modules
No. Covered
1 https://nptel.ac.in https://nptel.ac.in/content/storage2/nptel_ M1
dat
a3/html/mhrd/ict/text/112107216/lec6.pdf
2 https://nptel.ac.in https://nptel.ac.in/content/storage2/courses/1 M2
12 104117/ui/Course_home-lec22.htm
3 https://nptel.ac.in https://nptel.ac.in/content/storage2/courses/dow ads/11M21303262/noc
nlo loads/112103262/noc19

Suggested List of Practicals /Experiments:

Practical Cognitive levels as

Type of Practical/Experiment Topic Hrs.
Number Per bloom’s Taxonomy
Experiment

01 Study of steam generators 02 L1, L2, L3

Study of boiler mountings and accessories
02 02 L1, L2
Study of steam turbines
03
Study of Gas turbines.
04 02 L1, L2, L3, L4
Performance
based Trial on compressor
05 02 L1, L2, L3, L4
Study of rotary compressor
06 02 L1, L2, L3, L4
Study of gas turbines
07 02 L1, L2
Study of Turbojet engines 02 L1, L2, L3, L4
08
Case study on compressor/boilers
09 02 L1, L2, L3, L4, L5, L6
Case studies/
visit Visit to power plant.
10 02 L1, L2, L3, L4, L5, L6

42
 T.E. SEM VI
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS-
H 2019) TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)

B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) T.E. SEM : VI

Course Name: Metrology and Quality Engineering Course Code :PCC ME-603
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Theory Practical/Oral Term Work
Hours Per Week Total
(100) (25) (25)
Contact
Theory Tutorial Practical Credits IA ESE PR/OR TW
Hours
3 - 2 5 4 25 75 25 25 150
IA: Mid Semester Assessment- Paper Duration – 1.5 Hours
ESE : End Semester Evaluation- Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work / Report: Formative (40%),
Timely completion of practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: Physics, Manufacturing Process-I ,Material science and Metallurgy

Course Objectives: Course should be able to provide the knowledge about linear and angular
measurements, operations of precision measurement, instrument/equipment for measurement, e
fundamentals of quality concepts and statistics in metrology.
Course Outcomes:

Cognitive levels
SN Course Outcomes as per bloom’s
Taxonomy

1 Demonstrate inspection methods and different gauges L1, L2

2 Illustrate working principle of measuring instruments and calibration L1, L2, L3,
methodology

3 Demonstrate characteristics of screw threads, gear profile, and tool L1, L2, L3, L4
profile
Illustrate basic concepts and statistical methods in quality control L1, L2
4

5 Illustrate the different sampling techniques in quality control. L1, L2, L3, L4

6
Illustrate different advances in Metrology for precision measurement L1, L2, L3, L4

43
 Detailed Syllabus:

Module Topics Hrs. Cognitive

No. levels as
per bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Introduction to Metrology 6 L1, L2, L3
1.1 Introduction to Metrology: Fundamental Definitions, Types of
Standards, Precision and Accuracy, Measurement Errors, linear
measurements by Vernier calliper, micrometer, slip gauges,
Angular Measurement: Universal bevel protractor, clinometers,
sine bar, angle gauges case studies on Industrial and Research
Applications and Scope
1.2 Introduction to Nano-Metrology
2 Design of Gauges, Comparators, Surface Texture measurement 12 L1, L2, L3,
2.1 Design of Gauges : Limits, Fits, Tolerances, Types of Gauges, L4
Taylor’s Principle of Limit Gauges, IS 919 for design of gauges
2.2 Comparators : Definition, Classification, Working principle of
Mechanical, Opto-mechanical, Pneumatic and lectrical/Electronic
comparators with advantages, limitations and uses
2.3 Surface Texture measurement: Surface roughness, Waviness,
Roughness Parameter Ra, Rz, RMS etc., working of Tomlinson
surface meter, Taly-surf surface roughness tester, Surface
roughness symbols
3 Screw Thread Measurement, Gear Measurement and Special 10 L1, L2, L3
Measuring Instruments :
3.1 Screw Thread Measurement : Screw threads Terminology,
screw thread errors, Effective diameter measurement of screw
thread by Floating Carriage micrometer
3.2 Gear Measurement : Gear Terminology, Gear errors,
Measurement by Parkinson Gear tester and Gear tooth Vernier
Calliper
3.3 Special Measuring Instruments : Measurement by Tool
Maker’s Microscope, Optical Profile Projector, Autocollimator
4 Quality Engineering, Quality standards, SQC & SQC tools 8 L1, L2
4.1 Quality Engineering Introduction to Quality, Classification of
Quality Tools, Quality of Design, Quality of Conformance,
Compromise between Quality and Cost, Introduction to Six Sigma
4.2 Quality standards - ISO 9000 : 2001, TS 16949 (Standard,
FMECA (Failure mode effect criticality analysis) FTA (Fault tree
analysis), Quality circle - Kaizen practice, Cause and effect
diagram, Pareto analysis, Total quality management (TQM)
4.3 SQC & SQC tools Statistics in Quality control, Variables and
Attributes data, Process Capability, Control charts for variables
and for attribute data(฀̅and R-Chart, p-chart np-chart, c-chart, U
chart),
5 Sampling Techniques: 4 L1, L2,
5.1 Sampling Techniques Advantages of Sampling Inspection, L3,L4
operating characteristic (OC) curve. Choosing OC curve for
appropriate sampling plan
6 Advances in Metrology :Coordinate Measuring Machine, Flatness 8 L1, L2, L3
measurement:
44
 6.1 Coordinate Measuring Machine (CMM): CMM Machine
Principle of Coordinate Measuring Machines (CMM),
Fundamental features of CMM – development of CMMs – role of
CMMs – types of CMM and Applications, – types of probes
Machine Vision Systems: vision system measurement –
Multisensory systems. different configurations of CMM, error
involved, calibration, probing system, automated inspection
system
6.2 Flatness Test measurement by Interference principle: Concept
of Flatness, Interferometer principle for measurement, Optical
Flats – study of Surface textures under monochromatic light
source, fingertip test technique

Books and References:

SR
N Title Authors Publisher
Engineering Metrology
1 K.J. Hume Kalyani Publications

Mechanical Measurements and RKJain Khanna Publishers

2 Metrology

3 A text book of Engineering IC Gupta DhanpatRai Publications

Metrology
4 Metrology and Measurement Anand,Bewoor and McGraw Hill
VinayKulkarni
5 Statistical Quality Control AL Grant, McGraw Hill, New
York
6 Engineering Metrology and Bentley, Pearson Education
Measurements
7 Statistical Quality Control R C Gupta Khanna Publishers

8 Juran on Planning for Quality, Juran J M, TheFree Press

9 Statistical Quality Control M Mahajan, Dhanpat Rai and Sons

Engineering Metrology and N V Raghavendra and
10

Measurement Krishnamurthy, Oxford University Press

45
 Suggested List of Practicals /Experiments:

Cognitive levels as
Practical
Type of Experiment Practical/Experiment Topic Hrs. per bloom’s
No.
Taxonomy
01 Study of requirement of environmental 02 L1, L2, L3
condition for Metrology Laboratory
02 Vernier Calliper, Micrometer and slip 02 L1, L2, L3
gauges for linear measurement
03 Basic Experiments Bevel Protractor, sine bar/center for 02 L1, L2, L3
angular measurement
04 Comparator – Mechanical / Pneumatic 04 L1, L2, L3
type
05 Surface measurement by Surface 02 L1, L2, L3
roughness tester
Gear measurement – Gear tooth Vernier
06 calliper / Parkinson gear tester L1, L2, L3
02

Optical profile projector for miniature

07 linear / angular measurements of screw / 02 L1, L2, L3,
gear or components

Flatness measurement by Autocollimator

08 / Interferometry method 02 L1, L2, L3, L4
Design Experiment
09 QC charts for 50 sample readings of OD 02 L1, L2, L3, L4
/ ID of specimen and printouts
Mini/Minor/Projects/Case
10 Studies Report on Coordinate Measuring Machine 02 L1, L2, L3

46
 T.E. SEM VI
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS-
H 2019) TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)

B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) T.E. SEM : VI

Course Name : Design of Pressure Vessels Course Code :PEC-ME6011
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Total
(100) (25) Work
(25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR/OR TW
Hours
3 - 2@ 5 4 25 75 25 25 150

IA: Mid Semester Assessment- Paper Duration – 1.5 Hours

ESE : End Semester Evaluation- Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work / Report: Formative (40%), Timely completion
of practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: Physics , Thermodynamics, Fluid mechanics

Course Objectives:

To study the fundamentals and codes required for designing process equipments.
2. To study the process of designing the process equipment using codes.
3. To study testing and inspection techniques related to process equipments

Course Outcomes:

SN Course Outcomes Cognitive levels as per bloom’s

Taxonomy
1 Apply methodology of process equipment design. L1, L2

2 Design and develop pressure vessels for the given L1, L2, L3, L4
applications.
3 Apply testing and inspection techniques on the process L1, L2, L3, L4
equipments
4 Apply methodology of process equipment design. L1, L2

5 Design and develop pressure vessels for the given L1, L2, L3, L4
applications.
6 Apply testing and inspection techniques on the process L1, L2, L3, L4
equipments

Detailed Syllabus:
Module Topics Hrs. Cognitive levels
No. as per bloom’s
Taxonomy
Introduction

47
 1 Basic considerations in process equipment design; general design L1, L2
procedure of process equipment design; Terminology used in pressure
vessel design: Design pressures, Design temperatures, Design stresses, Design 8
Loading such as wind load, temperature load, Dead load, Maximum
allowable stress values, Minimum shell thickness, Welded joint efficiency
and category, Corrosion allowance, Minimum design metal temperature
(MDMT),Maximum allowable working pressure, Test pressure ,Weight
estimation of vessel, Development of pressure vessel construction code :Study
of ASME section VIII Div. –I; Selection of material and its properties by using
ASME section II for ferrous materials, Importance of codes and standards and
their applications, Stress categories and stress
Design of pressure Vessels 9
L1, L2, L3, L4
2
Types of pressure vessels; Types of head or end closure; Complete design as
per ASME code of cylindrical and spherical shells: Pressure vessel subjected to
internal pressure; Pressure vessel subjected to External pressure: Design
of various end closures, Design of flanged joints ,Design of opening such as
nozzle ,manhole etc. ,Gasket selection ,Design of Tall tower; Determination of
wind load and seismic load; Determination of period of vibration;
Determination of deflection of tower and elastic instabilit
Vessel Supports
8
Introduction and types of vessel support; Design of saddle support; Design of L1, L2, L3, L4
3 leg supports; Design of skirt support; Design of support
components:Base plate,Skirt bearing plate, Anchor bolts.

Design of Storage Tanks

7 L1, L2, L3, L4
4 Introduction to API code;Types of storage tanks for storing volatile and non
volatile fluid etc; Types of roofs used in storage vessels;Complete API design
of storage tank;Calculation of shell thickness by one foot method and variable
design point method;Shell attachment design;Wind girder design;Design of
rectangular tank
Heat Exchangers
Introduction to TEMA code; Classification of TEMA heat 8 L1, L2, L3
5 exchangers;Nomenclature of heat exchanger components:Tube and tube
bundle,Tube sheet,Tube pattern ,Tube legth,Baffle etc;Calcualtion of effective
shell side and tube side design pressure;Study of various types of jacket such as
half pipe, limphet coil
Testing and inspection techniques L1, L2, L3
Brief introduction :Standard hydtostatic test;Standard pneumatic test;Post weld 5
6 heat treatment;Radiographic examination; Process flow diagram;Process and
instrumentation diagram

*Use ASME codes, API code and TEMA code is permissible in the end semester examination

Books And References

SN Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

1 Process equipment design Browenell L.E and Young Willey Esstern 5 th

2007
E.D Ltd. India Printing

48
 2 pressure vessel Design Hand Henry H Bednar CBS publishers 6 th
2007
book and distributors Reprint
3 Pressure Vessels: ASME Code J. Phillip Ellenberger ASME - -
Simplified
ASME Pressure Vessel and ASME ASME - -
Boiler code, Section VIII Div.
1, 2, and 3”

Online References:

Sr.No. Website URL Modules

Name Covered
1 https://nptel.ac.in https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=erW4HZ5I928&list=P M1-M4

49
 T.E. SEM VI
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)
B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) T.E. SEM: VI
Course Name: Professional Elective – II: Robotics Course Code: PEC-ME6013
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory ractical/Oral Term Total
(100) (25) Work (25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR TW
Hours
3 - 2@ 5 4 25 75 25 25 150

IA:In-Semester Assessment - Paper Duration – 1.5 Hours

ESE : End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
f marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely completion of practical
(40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: Knowledge of Principles studied in Engineering Mechanics, Theory of Machines – I,
Mechatronic Systems

Course Objectives:

Course intended to deliver the fundamental knowledge of robotics and automation with hands-on
training in development and programming of robotic applications which in turn becomes effective
for different applications.

Course Outcomes:

SN Course Outcomes Cognitive levels as

per bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Able to explain terminology of robots. L1, L2
2 Able to select drive systems and program the controller for suitable robotic applications. L1, L2, L3

3 Able to select and interface sensors for robots in industrial applications. L1, L2, L3
4 Able to design and kinematically analyze robotic manipulators L1, L2, L3, L4
5 Able to program robots with 8051 Microcontrollers L1, L2
6 Able to design, analyze robotic manipulator for suitable application using software L1, L2, L3, L4, L5, L6
platforms

Detailed Syllabus

Module Topics Hrs. Cognitive levels

No. as per bloom’s
Taxonomy

Fundamentals of Robotics
Introduction, Definition, Robot anatomy (parts) and significance, Types: Manipulator &
1 Mobile (Wheeled and Legged), Various generations of Robots, Robot Classification, 6 L1, L2
Robot components, Robot work envelop and work volume

50
 Robot Drive Systems and Controller

2.1 Actuators: Hydraulic, Pneumatic and Electric Drives, Linear and Rotary Actutors, DC 8
Servomotors and Stepper motors, Potentiometers, Optical Encoders, DC Tachometers
2 L1, L2, L3
2.2 Robot controllers: Open and Closed loop controller, microprocessor and microcontroller
based control systems, Robot path control: Point-to-point, Continuous path, Sensor based
controller for robots.
Sensor for Robotics
3.1 Requirements of a sensor; Principles and Applications of the following types of sensors:
Position sensors; Range sensors; Proximity sensing; Contact sensors: Force and torque
3 sensing. 9 L1, L2, L3, L4
3.2 Robot vision systems (Scanning and digitizing image data), Image processing and
analysis, Cameras (Acquisition of images), Applications of Robot vision system:
Inspection, Identification, Navigation & serving, LIDAR
Robot Kinematics and Programming

4.1 Coordinate frames, Rotation, Homogeneous coordinates, Forward Kinematics, Inverse

Kinematics and Differences, Forward Kinematics and Reverse Kinematics of
Manipulators with Two Degrees of Freedom (In 2 Dimensional), D-H algorithm Arm
4 Matrix and Problems 10 L1, L2, L3
4.2 Teach Pendant Programming, Lead through programming, Offline programming, Robot
programming Languages; VAL Programming; Motion Commands; Sensor Commands;
End effecter commands; and Simple programs, Lisp
4.3 Python for Robot Programming
8051 Microcontroller for Robot Programming
5.1 8051 Microcontroller for Robot Programming, Instruction sets, Programming, 8 L1, L2, L3, L4
5 Interfacing of DC Motor & Stepper Motor with 8051 Microcontroller
Robotics with MATLAB and Simulink
6.1 Introduction to MATLAB and Simulink, kinematic analysis trajectory planning of 4
6 robotic manipulators using MATLAB L1, L2, L3, L4
6.2 Robotic System Toolbox – Manipulator algorithm design, Mobile robot algorithm,
Coordinate Transformations, Course project

Books and References:

SN Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

1 Fundamentals of Robotics: Analysis and Robert J. Schilling Prentice Hall of 5th
2003
Control India Printing

2 obotics and control R.K. Mittal & I. J. Tata McGraw- 6 th

2007
Nagrath Hill Education Reprint

3 Introduction to Robotics: Mechanics and John J. Craig Pearson Education 3 rd

2007
Control International Edition
4 Robotics for Engineers Yoram Koren McGraw-Hill Book - 1985
Company

5MATLAB for Engineers Holly Moore Pearson Education 3 rd

2012
Edition

51
 6 Essentials of MATLAB Stephen J. Chapman Cengage Learnign 2 Edition
nd
2009
Programming

7 8051 Microcontroller Internal, Subrata Ghoshal Pearson Education 2017

Instructions, Programming and
Interfacing
Online References:

Sr.No. Website Name URL Modules

Covered
1 https://nptel.ac.in https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc20_me03/ M1-M4

2 https://www.mathworks.com https://www.mathworks.com/products/robotics.html M6

52
 T.E. SEM VI
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)
B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) T.E. SEM: VI
Course Name: Professional Elective – II: Power Plant Course Code: PEC-ME6012
Engineering
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total
(100) (25) (25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR TW
Hours
3 - 2@ 4 3 25 75 25 25 150

IA:In-Semester Assessment - Paper Duration – 1.5 Hours

ESE : End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
@-Professional Elective Courses Lab will be conducted in the form of Capstone Project
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: Thermodynamics, Heat Transfer

Course Objectives:

Course intended to deliver the fundamental knowledge of basic working principles of different power plants and
Study of power plant economics.

Course Outcomes:
Cognitive levels as
SN Course Outcomes per bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Comprehend various equipment/systems utilized in power plants L1, L2
2 Demonstrate site selection methodology, construction and operation of Thermal L1, L2, L3
Power Plants.
3 Discuss types of reactors, waste disposal issues in nuclear power plants. L1, L2, L3
4 Discuss operation of GT and Diesel Power Plants L1, L2, L3, L4
5 Understand various sources of power from renewable energy sources. L1, L2
6 Illustrate power plant economics L1, L2, L4, L5, L6

53
Detailed Syllabus
Cognitive
Module levels as
Topics Hrs.
No. per bloom’s
Taxonomy
Introduction
Energy resources and their availability, types of power plants, selection of the
1 plants, review of basic thermodynamic cycles used in power plants 4 L1, L2

Thermal plant layout –

Thermal plant layout – working – Auxiliaries - Rankine cycle – improvement
and limitations - Boiler types, circulation systems – Efficiency calculation -
8
2 supercritical boilers – Fluidised bed boilers - Fuel and ash handling – combined L1, L2, L3
cycle power generation.

Nuclear Power Plants:

Nuclear Power Plants: Principles of nuclear energy, basic nuclear L1, L2, L3,
3 reactions, nuclear reactorsPWR, BWR, CANDU, Sodium graphite, fast 8 L4
breeder, homogeneous; gas cooled, Advantages and limitations, nuclear
power station, waste disposal.
Gas turbine & Diesel power plants
Gas turbine power plants – Thermodynamic fundamentals, application, combined
cycle configurations, cogeneration, major components, factors influencing
4 performance of GT plants. 10 L1, L2, L3
Diesel power plants – layout – working, Different systems – Fuel system,
lubrication system, Air intake system, Exhaust system, cooling system. Starting
system.
Power from Renewable energy
Hydro Electric Power Plants – Classification, Typical Layout and associated L1, L2, L3,
5 components including Turbines. Principle, Construction and working of Wind, 8
L4
Tidal, Solar Photo Voltaic (SPV), Solar Thermal, Geo Thermal, Biogas and
Fuel Cell power systems.
Power Plant Economics
Power Plant Economics: Load curve, different terms and definitions,
7
cost of electrical energy, tariffs methods of electrical energy,
performance & operating characteristics of power plants- incremental rate L1, L2, L4,
6
theory, input-output curves, efficiency, heat rate, economic load sharing, L5,L6
Problems.

54
Books and References:

SN Title Autho Publisher Edition Year

rs
1 Power Plant Technology El Wakil, M.M Tata McGraw- 2nd Ed 1984.
Hill,

2 Power Plant Familiarization - Manual of - 1991

Central
Training
Resources
Unit of
NTPC India
3 Power Plant Engineering, , .Nag. P.K. Tata 4th Ed,. 2014
McGraw-Hill
4 A Text Book of Power R.K. Rajput Laxmi - 1985
Plant Engineering, Publications

5 Hydro-Electric and Pumped M G Jog New Age 3rd Edition 2012

Storage Plants International
Publishers
6 A Course in Power Plant Arora, Domkundwar DhanpatRai & 2nd Edition 2009
Engineering Co

7 Nuclear Power Plants Edited by Soon Heung InTech - 2017

Chang Publishers.

Online References:

Sr.No. Website Name URL Modules

Covered
1 https://nptel.ac.in https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/1121072 M1-M6
91/

55
 T.E. SEM VI
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H
2019) TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)
B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) T.E. SEM : VI
Course Name: Refrigeration & Air Conditioning Course Code :PEC-ME6014
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Theory Practical/Oral Term
Hours Per Week Total
(100) (25) Work
(25)

Contact
Theory Tutorial Practical Credits IA ESE PR/OR TW
Hours
150
3 2 6 5 25 75 25 25
IA: Mid Semester Assessment- Paper Duration – 1.5
Hours ESE : End Semester Evaluation- Paper Duration
3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work / Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: Heat Transfer, Thermodynamics, Applied Thermodynamics

Course Objectives:
Course should be able to provide the knowledge about components, working and operating principles of
Vapour Compression, vapour absorption system and selection of refrigerants. Study air conditioning aspect and
industry prospective equipment design.

Course Outcomes:

Cognitive
SN Course Outcomes levels
as per
bloom’s
Taxonomy

1 Interpret and design of Vapour Compression refrigeration system L1, L2

2 Selection of refrigerants on the basic of desirable properties and environmental protocol. L1, L2, L3,

3 Design the multistage vapour compression systems. L1, L2, L3,

L4
Illustrate and apply the Psychrometry for air conditioning applications L1, L2
4

understand and apply mathematical treatment to various problems related to psychometrics,

5 L1, L2, L3,
psychrometric processes, design of summer/ winter/ air conditioning
L4
6 Study of Industrial practices in Air conditioning L1, L2, L3,
L4

56
 Detailed Syllabus:

Module Topics Hrs. Cognitive

No. levels as
per
bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Vapour Compression refrigeration system: 12 L1, L2, L3
A Refrigerating Machine, Types of refrigeration system, Vapour Compression
refrigeration system and thermodynamic cycle, Standard Rating Cycle and efect
of Operating Conditions, effect of Evaporator Pressure, effect of Condenser
Pressure, effect of Suction Vapour Superheat, effect of Liquid Sub cooling,
Actual Vapour Compression Cycle (Numerical treatment). Vapour Absorption
Refrigeration Systems: Types, working principle, aqua ammonia, Lithium-
bromide and Electrolux Systems.
Multipressure systems: Multi-evaporator Systems, Multistage Systems, Choice
of Intermediate Pressure, Multi-evaporator Systems, Cascade Systems, Practices
for Multistage Systems.
2 Refrigerants: 3 L1, L2
A Survey of Refrigerants, Designation of Refrigerants, Selection of a
Refrigerant, Thermodynamic, Chemical, Physical, and safety Requirements,
Secondary Refrigerants, Ozone depletion, Global warming, green house efect,
Environment friendly refrigerant R134a, R410a, R600a, R290, R32. (Theoretical
only)
3 Refrigerant Compressors, Condensers, Evaporators and Expansion 10 L1, L2, L3,
Devices: L4
Types of Compressors, Thermodynamic Processes during Compression,
Principal Dimensions of a Reciprocating Compressor, Performance
Characteristics of a Reciprocating Compressor, Capacity Control of
Reciprocating Compressors, Rotary Compressors, Screw Compressors,
Centrifugal Compressors, Digital scroll compressors
Construction and working, Types of condensers, evaporators and expansion
devices, Capillary Tube and Its Sizing, pumps, heat exchangers etc. Work done
and heat transfer during steady fow processes.
4 Psychometrics of Air – Conditioning Processes: 6 L1, L2
Properties of moist Air, Working Substance in Air Conditioning, Psychometric
Properties, Psychometric Chart, Mixing Process, Basic Processes in
Conditioning of Air Psychometric Processes in Air – conditioning Equipment
comfort conditions, (Numerical Treatment).
5 Load Calculation and Applied Psychrometrics: 8 L1, L2,
Preliminary Considerations, Internal Heat Gains, System Heat Gains, Breakup of L3,L4
ventilation Load and Efective Sensible Heat Factor, Cooling-load Estimate,
Heating – load Estimate, Psychometric Calculations for Cooling, Design of air
conditioning equipment. Summer and winter air conditioning
6 Industrial practices in Air conditioning 6 L1, L2, L3
General layout of central air conditioning Plant, chilled water and condenser
water piping, commissioning and testing of air conditioning systems., working of
room air-conditioner and split air-conditioner and packaged air-conditioner, duct
design (Introduction to duct design by equal friction method.)

57
 Books and References:

SR
N Title Authors Publisher Year
“Refrigeration and Air-conditioning”
1 Refrigeration &Air Conditioning C.P.Arora Tata McGraw-Hill 2017
“
R.J.Dossat 2014
2 Principles of Refrigeration Pearson Education

3 “Industrial Refrigeration Handbook W.F.Stoecker McGraw-Hill 1998

ASHRAE 2017
4 ASHRAE Handbook ASHRAE

Suggested List of Practicals /Experiments:

Cognitive
levels as
Practical per bloom’s
Type of Experiment Practical/Experiment Topic Hrs.

No.
Taxonomy

01 Study of domestic refrigerator along with 02 L1, L2, L3

wiring diagram.
02 Study of procedure of leak detection, 02 L1, L2, L3
evacuation and charging of refrigerant
Basic Experiments
03 Trial on domestic refrigeration. 02 L1, L2, L3
04 Trial on water cooler or Refrigeration test 04 L1, L2, L3
Ring

05 Presentation and Report on different protocols in selection 02 L1, L2, L3

of to regulate the global warming
Visit
06 L1, L2, L3
Calculation of COP water cooler 02
Steady state simulation of Air Conditioning
07 02 L1, L2, L3,
system with developed code

08 Calculation of COPreciprocating
Trial on multistage of Air conditioning test rig
compressor 02 L1, L2, L3, L4
Design Experiment
09 Trial on Air conditioning Test Ring 02 L1, L2, L3, L4
Mini/Minor/Projects/Case

10 Studies Mini project 02 L1, L2, L3

58
 T.E. SEM VI
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)

B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) T.E. SEM: VI

Course Name: Essence of Indian Knowledge Tradition Course Code: MC- ME601
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total
(100) (25) (25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR TW
Hours
1 - - 1 Non - - - 25 25
credit

The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: English language and literature

Course Objectives:

To facilitate the students with the concepts of Indian traditional knowledge and to make them understand the Importance
of roots of knowledge system and to make the students understand the traditional knowledge and analyse it and apply it to
their day to day life
Course Outcomes:
Cognitive levels as
SN Course Outcomes per bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 L1, L2
Identify the concept of Traditional knowledge and its importance.

2 L1, L2, L3
Explain the need and importance of protecting traditional knowledge.

3 L1, L2, L3
IIllustrate the various enactments related to the protection of traditional knowledge.

4 L1, L2, L3, L4

Interpret the concepts of Intellectual property to protect the traditional knowledge.

5 L1, L2
Explain the importance of Traditional knowledge in Agriculture and Medicine.

6 L1, L2, L4
Identify the concept of Traditional knowledge and its importance.

59
Detailed Syllabus
Cognitive
Module levels as
Topics Hrs.
No. per bloom’s
Taxonomy
Introduction
Introduction to traditional knowledge: Define traditional knowledge, nature and
characteristics, scope and importance, kinds of traditional knowledge,
1 Indigenous Knowledge (IK), characteristics, traditional knowledge vis-a-vis 4 L1, L2
indigenous knowledge, traditional knowledge Vs western knowledge traditional
knowledge
Protection of traditional knowledge

2 Protection of traditional knowledge:The need for protecting traditional L1, L2, L3

knowledge Significance of TK Protection, value of TK in global economy,
8
Role of Government to harness TK.
Legal framework and TK
Legal framework and TK: The Scheduled Tribes and Other Traditional Forest
Dwellers (Recognition of Forest Rights) Act, 2006, Plant Varieties L1, L2, L3,
3 Protection and Farmer's Rights Act, 2001 (PPVFR Act); The Biological 8 L4
Diversity Act 2002 and Rules 2004, the protection of traditional
knowledge bill, 2016.
Traditional knowledge and intellectual
property:
Traditional knowledge and intellectual property: Systems of traditional
4 knowledge protection, Legal concepts for the protection of traditional 10 L1, L2, L3
knowledge, Patents and traditional knowledge, Strategies to increase protection
of traditional knowledge
Traditional Knowledge in Different Sectors:
Traditional Knowledge in Different Sectors: Traditional knowledge and L1, L2, L3,
5 8
engineering, Traditional medicine system, TK in agriculture, Traditional L4
societies depend on it for their food and healthcare needs
Importance of conservation and sustainable
development of environment
6 Importance of conservation and sustainable development of environment, 7 L1, L2, L4
Management of biodiversity, Food security of the country and protection
of TK

60
Books and References:
SN Title Autho Publisher Edition Year
rs
1 Traditional Knowledge Amit Jha Atlantic 2009
System in India publishers

2 "Knowledge Traditions Kapil Kapoor1, Michel - 1991

and Practices of India" Danino2.

Online References:

Sr.No. Website Name URL Modules

Covered
1 https://nptel.ac.in http://nptel.ac.in/courses/121106003/ M1-M6

2 www.youtube.com https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=LZP M1-M6

1StpYEPM

61
 T.E. SEM VI
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)
B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) T.E. SEM: VI

Course Name: Professional Skills – VI (Finite Element Analysis) Course Code: HSD-MEPS601
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)

Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation

Hours Per Week Presentation Report Total

nducted in the beginning of Semester during first 3 Weeks)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits AC AC
Hours
75
15 - 30 45 2 50 25

Remarks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely completion of practical
(40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: Engineering Mathematics, Mechanical Design, Strength of materials

Course Objectives:
Course intend to deliver the Modeling, Analysis in ANSYS

Course Outcomes:

SN Course Outcomes Cognitive levels

as per bloom’s
Taxonomy

1 Apply finite element formulations to solve one dimensional Problems. L1, L2, L3, L4

2 Apply finite element formulations to solve two dimensional scalar Problems L1, L2, L3, L4
Apply finite element method to solve two dimensional Vector problems.
3 L1, L2, L3, L4

4 Apply finite element method to solve complex problems L1, L2, L3, L4

Detailed Syllabus:

Cognitive levels as
Module
Topics Hrs per bloom’s
No.
Taxonomy
One Dimensional Second Order Equations – Discretization – Element types-
Linear and Higher order Elements – Derivation of Shape functions and
1 Stiffness matrices and force vectors- Assembly of Matrices – Solution of 6 L1,L2,L3,L4
problems from solid mechanics and heat transfer. Longitudinal vibration
frequencies and mode shapes.

62
 Second Order 2D Equations involving Scalar Variable Functions –
2 Variational formulation –Finite Element formulation – Triangular elements – 3 L1,L2,L3,L4
Shape functions and element matrices and vectors.

Equations of elasticity – Plane stress, plane strain and axisymmetric problems

3 – Body forces and temperature effects – Stress calculations – Plate and shell 4 L1,L2,L3,L4
elements.

Natural co-ordinate systems – Isoparametric elements – Shape functions for

4 iso parametric elements – One and two dimensions – Serendipity elements 2 L1,L2,L3,L4
Complex elements analysis eg: Cotter joint, Knuckle joint

Books and References:

SN Title Authors Publisher Year

1 An Introduction to the Finite Element Reddy. J.N Tata McGraw-Hill 2019
Method
2 Text Book of Finite Element Analysis Seshu, P, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. 2018
Ltd.,

Online Reference

Website name URL Modules covered

1 Finite Element Analysis-web course https://nptel.ac.in/content/105105041.pdf M1-M4

List of Practicals / Experiments

Experiment topic Type of Experiments Hrs.

1 Solving 1D problems Basic Experiments 2 L1, L2

2 Structural analysis of 1D elements Basic Experiments 2 L1, L2, L3

3 Temperature analysis of 1D elements Basic Experiments 2 L1, L2, L3

4 Analysis of Truss Basic Experiments 2 L1, L2, L3

5 Vibration analysis of 2D elements Design Experiments 2 L1, L2, L3

6 Analysis of axis symmetric problem Design Experiments 2 L1, L2, L3

7 Analysis of complex geometry Design Experiments 2 L1, L2, L3

63
8 Structural analysis of cotter joints Design Experiments 2 L1, L2, L3

9 Case Study Case Study 2 L1, L2, L3,L4

10 Mini Project Mini Project 2 L1, L2, L3,L4

64
 T.E. Semester –VI
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)
B. E. Course T.E. Open Elective (SEM : VI)
Course Name: Futuristic Web Development Course Code: OEC- 6011

Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)

Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total
(100) (25) (25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR/OR TW
Hours
- - 100
3 - - 3 3 25 75
IA: In-Semester Assessment- Paper Duration – 1.5 Hours
ESE : End Semester Examination- Paper Duration - 3 Hours
Prerequisite: Marketing Fundamentals, Digital Assets, Digital System Setup and automation

Sr.No. Topic
1 Overview of JavaScript
Introduction to JavaScript: Advantages of using Java Script on client side over VBScript, Variables in
Java Script, Statements,Operators,Comments,Constructs,Functions,Expressions,JavaScript console,
Scope, Events, Strings, String Methods, Numbers, Number Methods.
Control Structures: Functions, Objects, Object Definitions, Object Properties, Object Methods, Object
Prototypes, Object Oriented Programming: Method,
Constructor, Inheritance, Encapsulation, Abstraction.
2
JavaScript Frameworks
JSON: Introduction to the JavaScript Object Notation (JSON), JSON vs XML, Need of JSON, JSON
Syntax Rules, JSON Data, JSON Objects, JSON Arrays, JSON Uses, JSON Files, AJAX, Rich Internet
Application using AJAX and JSON.
Node.js: Introduction to Node.js, Node modules, Selectors Syntax, Developing node.js web application,
Event-driven I/O server-side JavaScript.
3 Angular.Js and React.Js
Angular.js: Introduction, Angular 2 Architecture, Language Choices, Introduction to Components,
Templates, Interpolation, and Directives, Data Bindings and Pipes, Building Nested Components
Services and Dependency Injection, Retrieving Data Using HTTP, Navigation and Routing Basics,
Angular Modules , Single Page Web Application using AngularJS.
ReactJS: Introduction, Templating using JSX, Components, State and Props, Lifecycle of Components,
Rendering List, Portals, Error Handling, Routers, Redux, Redux Saga, Immutable.js, Service side
rendering, Unit testing, Webpack.
4 Introduction to Progressive Web Apps
Introduction to Progressive Web Apps: Concept of Progressive Web App and its need.Progressive Web
Apps core building blocks,PWA vs Native Mobile Apps.
Service Workers: How applications work offline using Service Workers.
Web App Manifest: Installation of your Progressive Web App to device’s home screen by properly
configuring a Web App Manifest.
5 Introduction to MongoDB

65
 What Is MongoDB? Installation and Configuration , CRUD operations, MongoDB API Creating a
Database, Collection and Documents.

Data Modelling & Schema : MongoDB Database References ,Model Tree Structures , MongoDB
Analysing Queries, MongoDB Atomic Operations , MongoDB Text Search, MongoDB Regular
Expression, MongoDB Capped Collections.

Deployment: MongoDB Deployment and Cluster setup MongoDB GridFS Trident Spout.
6 Web Socket Programming
WebSockets Introduction- Overview , Duplex Communication , Functionalities, Implementation.
WebSockets Roles - Events and Actions, Opening Connections, Handling Errors , ,Send & Receive
Msgs, Closing a Connection. JavaScript & WebSockets API - Server Working, API , JavaScript
Application. WebSockets Implementation - Communicating with Server, WebSockets – Security

66
 T.E. Semester –VI
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)
B. E. Course T.E. Open Elective (SEM : VI)
Course Name: Digital Marketing Course Code: OEC- 6011
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total
(100) (25) (25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR/OR TW
Hours
- - 100
3 - - 3 3 25 75
IA: In-Semester Assessment- Paper Duration – 1.5 Hours
ESE : End Semester Examination- Paper Duration - 3 Hours
Prerequisite: Marketing Fundamentals, Digital Assets, Digital System Setup and automation

Course Objective: The course will transform you into a complete digital marketer with expertise in the top eight digital
marketing domains — search engine optimization, social media, pay-per-click, conversion optimization, digital analytics, content,
mobile, and email marketing. Fast-track your career in digital marketing today with practical training you can apply on the job.

Course Outcomes: Upon completion of the course students will be able to:

Sr. Course Outcomes Cognitive levels of

No. attainment as per Bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Understand Digital Business Models L1,L2

2 Understand A.I. and machine learning terminologies, mind-set and its application L1,L2
in marketing
3 Build sophisticated machine learning models – learn how to gather and clean L1,L2
data, select an algorithm, train, evaluate and deploy a model
4 Predict churn, sales or score leads with tools L1,L2,L5

5 Segment customers; build clustering models to drive personalization. L1,L2,L5,L6

6 Build computer vision models for social visual listening, use natural language L2,L5
processing to predict consumption preferences.

67
Detailed Syllabus:

Module Topics Hrs. Cognitive levels of

No. attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
1 Introduction - Digital Marketing 7 L1,L2
Digital Marketing Skills empowered by AI :SEO, Search Engine Marketing,
Social Media Marketing, Web Analytics, Email Marketing, Content
Marketing, Influencer Marketing, Conversion Rate Optimization, Tools
Based Marketing, Lifecycle Marketing Automation.
2 Full Funnel Marketing 8 L1,L2
Acquisition: Content marketing, landing page testing, campaign
optimization, conversion rate optimization, lead scoring, competition and
trend analysis, predict sales, optimize product pricing, programmatic media
buying, segmentation and clustering for targeting, personalization.
Activation: Personalization, psychographic segmentation, behavioral
segmentation
Retention : Predict churn, customer care chatbot, sentiment analysis, visual
social listening, personalization
Revenue: Predict and maximize customer lifetime value, recommender
systems, market basket analysis
Referral : Predict whether user recommend your product
3 Marketing framework and tools 8 L1,L2
Planning:Hubspot, Brightedge, Node, Crayon, Equals3, Marketmuse,
Pathmatics, Calibermind, Alegion, Netra
Production : Acrolinx, Narrative Science,Clarifai, GumGum, phrasee, curate
Attentioninsight
Personalization : Uberflip, Klevu, Seventh Sense, Blueshift,
Promotion : Yext, Albert, Onespot, Cortex, Siftrock, inPowered,
Performance :Monkeylearn, PaveAI,
Predictive Analytics 7 L1,L2,L5
4 Fundamentals of predictive analytics,Prediction model for lead scoring and
sales forecasting, churn prediction model, Predictive modelling for customer
behaviour, automated segmentation
Psychographics, NLP and Computer Vision 7 L1,L2,L5,L6
Customer psychographics, leveraging personality traits to predict
5 consumption preferences using NLP, Detect emotions, assign labels,
understand text from images, detect news events, logos using Computer
Vision
Futuristic Marketing 8 L2,L5
6
IoTs Augmented Reality, Virtual Reality and XR for Marketing, Blockchain
and smart contracts for marketing, NeuroMarketing, Wearable Tech,
Personal Chatbots
Total Hours 45

68
Books and References:

Sr. Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

No
1 Artificial intelligence marketing and predicting Struhl, S. Kogan Page Third 2017
consumer choice: an overview of tools and Publishers
techniques

2 AI for Marketing and Product Innovation: Appel, A., Sthan Wiley. Third 2018
Powerful New Tools for Predicting Trends, unathan, S., Prad
Connecting with Customers, and Closing eep, A. K.
Sales.

3 Artificial intelligence for marketing: practical Sterne, J. John Wiley & Sons Fourth 2017..
applications

4 Using Artificial Intelligence in Marketing: King, K. Kogan Page First 2019

How to harness AI and maintain the Publishers
competitive edge.

Online References:

Sr. Website Name URL Modules

No. Covered
1 https://www.iimcal. https://iimcal.talentsprint.com/ai-powered- M1,M2,M3,
ac.in/ marketing/index.html?utm_source=googlesearch&utm_medium=cpc& M4,M5,M6
utm_campaign=iimc-aipm-googlesearch-india&utm_content=ai-in-
marketing-by-
iimc&gclid=CjwKCAjwyo36BRAXEiwA24CwGVQrXnOTpcARRsF
tvt8b9VAPqwV7KGPFmPyx36i1Zafl_7Br1OJEEhoChC4QAvD_Bw
E/
2 https://www.courser https://www.coursera.org/learn/uva-darden-market-analytics M4,M5,M6
a.org/
3 https://academy.hub https://academy.hubspot.com/courses/artificial-intelligence-and- M1,M2,M3,
spot.com/ machine-learning-in- M4,M5,M6
marketing? hstc=89107140.de4401799f3edce1fd42a1704a37ab4a.15
98174195879.1598174195879.1598174195879.1& hssc=89107140.1
.1598336323938& hsfp=3825083997&hsCtaTracking=e4d097a0-
ed0c-4f82-8e93-e9016ea31749%7C00439f3d-17bf-4431-af12-
50a507004fcd

69
 T.E. Semester –VI
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)

B.E. Course T.E. Open Elective SEM : VI

Course Name : Software Process Automation Course Code : OEC- 6012
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total
(100) (25) (25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR/OR TW
Hours
3 - - 3 3 25 75 - - 100

IA: In-Semester Assessment - Paper Duration – 1.5 Hour

ESE: End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely completion of practical
(40%) and Attendance / Learning Attitude (20%)
Prerequisite: Object Oriented Programming, Frontend Backend connectivity

Course Objective:

The objective of the course is to introduce to the students about the integration people involved in the software process with the
development and tools required for automation of the project development.

Course Outcomes: Upon completion of the course students will be able to:
SN Course Outcomes Cognitive levels of attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
1 Understand the importance of process automation and models L1, L2
of software process
2 Analyze the security and configuration management L1, L2, L3,L4
3 Understand and apply the build concepts using a build tool L1, L2, L3,L4
4 Understand the testing concepts and apply them to the project L1, L2, L3,L4
5 Identify the activities in agile project management and use a L1, L2, L3,L4
tool for the same
6 Understand and identify the various principles of quality L1, L2, L3,L4
assurance

70
Detailed Syllabus:

Modu Topics Hrs. Cognitive levels of

le No. attainment as per
Bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Introduction to process Automation 6 L1, L2
Importance of process automation, types of models, prescriptive and descriptive
models, Devops model, process modelling objectives and goals

2 Automation of config management 8 L1, L2, L3,L4

Overview of configuration management, Github and git tool

3 Build automation 4 L1, L2, L3,L4

Overview of build management, Jenkins tool for build management
4 Test automation 8 L1, L2, L3,L4
Overview of testing concepts, test cases , selenium tool
5 Project management 8 L1, L2, L3,L4
Project management concepts, agile team, Atlasian jira project management
tool
6 Quality management 11 L1, L2, L3,L4
Quality concepts and metrics, CMMI, ISO, spice, six sigma, Total Quality
management
Total Hours 45

Books and References:

Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

1 The DevOps handbook Gene Kim, Jez Humble, Ptrik IT revolution first
Debois & John Willis Press Edition
2016
2 Selenium WebDriver 3 Satya Avasarala Packt Second 2018
Practical Guide: End-to- Publishing Ltd, Edition
end Automation Testing
for Web and Mobile
Browsers with Selenium
WebDriver

Online Resources:

S. Website Name /URL Modules Covered

No.
1 www,researchgate,c https://www.researchgate.net/publication/258865356_So M6
om ftware_Process_Definition_and_Management

71
 T.E Semester – VI
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)

B.E. Course T.E. Open Elective: SEM- VI

Course Name: Entrepreneurship Development and Course Code: OEC- 6013

Management
Contact Hours Per Week: 03 Credits: 03

Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative / Summative)

Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation

Hours Per Week Theory (100) Practical / Term Work Total

Oral (25) (25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR PR
Hours 100
03 - - 03 03 25 75 - -

IA: In semester Assessment –Paper Duration – 1.5 Hour

ESE: End Semester Examination – Paper Duration – 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation taken with Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)

Prerequisite: Soft Skill Development, Professional Skill

Course Objective:

To acquire necessary knowledge and skills required for organizing and carrying out entrepreneurial activities, to
develop the ability of analyzing and understanding business situations in which entrepreneurs act and to master the
knowledge necessary to plan entrepreneurial activities. The objective of the course is, further on, that the students
develop the ability of analyzing various aspects of entrepreneurship – especially of taking over the risk, and the
specificities as well as the pattern of entrepreneurship development and, finally, to contribute to their entrepreneurial
and managerial potentials

Course Outcomes Upon completion of the course students will be able to:

SN Course Outcomes RBT Level

Describe the opportunities in Entrepreneurship in the context of Globalization and
1 Liberalization L1, L2
2 Discover skills to succeed as an entrepreneur L1, L2, L3
3 Comprehend enterprises establishment process L1, L2
4 Acquaint with the role of various agencies promoting Entrepreneurship development L1, L2
5 Select the optimum financial and human resource management plan for an enterprise L1, L2, L3, L4
L1, L2, L3, L4,
6 Integrate the skills to develop a business plan to start a small enterprise
L5, L6

72
Detailed Syllabus:

Module Sub-Module / Contents Periods RBT Levels

1 Entrepreneurship 9 L1, L2, L3

Introduction – Meaning & Definition of Entrepreneurship, Entrepreneur &
Enterprise – Differences between Entrepreneurship, Entrepreneur & Enterprise
– Functions of Entrepreneur – Role of Entrepreneur for Economic
Development - Factors influencing Entrepreneurship - Pros and Cons of being
an Entrepreneur – Differences between Manager and Entrepreneur – Qualities
of an Entrepreneur – Types of Entrepreneurs. Entrepreneurship Development-
Need – Problems – National and State
Level Institutions

2 Small Scale Industries 8 L1, L2

Small Scale Industries - Tiny Industries - Ancillary Industries - Cottage
Industries – Definition – Meaning - Product Range - Capital Investment -
Ownership Patterns - Importance and Role played by SSI in the development of
the Indian Economy - Problems faced by SSI’s and the
steps taken to solve the problems - Policies Governing SSI’s

3 Creativity 7 L1,L2,L3
Creativity and entrepreneurship, Steps in Creativity, Innovation and inventions:
Using left brain skills to harvest right brain ideas and Legal Protection of
innovation, Skills of an entrepreneur, Decision making and Problem Solving
(steps indecision making)

73
 4 Costing 7 L1, L2, L3,
Concept of Cost, Classification of Cost, Use of Cost Data, Marginal Costing: L4, L5
Cost-Volume Profit Relationship, Mathematical Relationship between Cost-
Volume Profit, Margin of Safety, BEP Analysis : Graphical Analysis, Use of
Marginal costing in decision making- pricing decision, make or buy etc.

5 Preparing the Business Plan 7 L1, L2, L3,

Business Plan, Importance of BP, Preparation of BP, Typical BP format - L4
Financial aspects of the BP - Marketing aspects of the BP - Human Resource
aspects of the BP - Technical aspects of the BP – Social aspects
of the BP - Common pitfalls to be avoided in preparation of a BP
6 Starting a Small Industry 7 L1, L2, L3,
Concept of Business opportunity, scanning the environment for opportunities, L4, L5, L6
evaluation of alternatives and selection based on personal competencies. - An
overview of the steps involved in starting a business venture – Location,
Clearances and Permits required Formalities, Licensing and Registration
Procedures - Assessment of the market for the proposed project - Importance of
financial, technical and social feasibility
of the project.

TOTAL 45
Books and References:

SN Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

1 Entrepreneurship and Small P. M. Pearson Education, _ -
Business Management Charantimath New Delhi
Entrepreneurship Development CPSC, Manila Tata McGraw-Hill
2 - -
3 Entrepreneurship P. M. Pearson Education, - -
Development Small Business Charantimath New Delhi
Enterprises
Entrepreneurship - Successfully Bruce R.Barringer Pearson Education,
4 Launching New Ventures R.Daunce Ireland New Delhi - -
5 Entrepreneurship Hisrich R D, Peters Tata McGraw-Hill - -
MP
6 Entrepreneurship Rajeev Roy Oxford University Press - -
S.Chand & Co. Ltd.,Ram
7 Entrepreneurial Development Khanka. S.S - -
Nagar, New Delhi

10
 T.E. Semester –VI
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)
B.E. Course T.E. Open Elective (SEM : VI)
Course Name : Cyber Security and Laws Course Code : OEC- 6014
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total
/Present
ation
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR TW
Hours
100
3 - - 3 3 25 75 -- --

IA: In-Semester Assessment - Paper Duration – 1.5 Hours

ESE: End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely completion
of practical (40%) and Attendance / Learning Attitude (20%)
Prerequisite: Cryptography and Network Security

Course Objective: The course intends to deliver the fundamental knowledge to understand concepts of cyber law,
intellectual property, cybercrimes, trademarks, domain theft, tools used in cyber security and analyze security policies,
protocols applied in Indian IT Act 2008, security standards compliances.

Course Outcomes: Upon completion of the course students will be able to:

Cognitive levels
of attainment as
SN Course Outcomes
per Bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Understand the concept of cybercrime and its effect on outside world L1
Interpret and apply IT law in various legal issues , Analyse security L1, L2, L3, L4
2 challenges and issues
Understand and analyse various attack using tools like wire shark ,
3 L1
key logger etc.
4 Distinguish different aspects of cyber law L1, L2, L3, L4
5 Study India IT Act and analyse different case studies L1, L2, L3, L4
Apply Information Security Standards compliance during software L1, L2, L3, L4
6
design and development

11
 Detailed Syllabus:
Cognitive
levels of
Module attainment
Topics Hrs
No as per
Bloom’s
Taxonomy
Introduction to Cybercrime

Introduction to Cybercrime: Cybercrime definition and origins of the

1 04 L1
world,Cybercrime and information security, Classifications of cybercrime,
Cybercrime and the Indian ITA 2000, A global Perspective on cybercrimes

Symmetric and Asymmetric Cryptography

Introduction to symmetric cryptography, Substitution cipher, transposition cipher,
stream and block cipher, and arithmetic modes for block ciphers, Introduction to
L1, L2, L3,
2 asymmetric cryptography Primes, factorization, Fermat’s little theorem, Euler’s 08
theorem, and extended Euclidean algorithm, RSA, attacks on RSA, Diffie L4
Hellman key exchange , Message integrity, message authentication, MAC, hash
function, H MAC
Cyber offenses & Cybercrime
Cyber offenses & Cybercrime: How criminal plan the attacks, Social Engg, Cyber
stalking, Cyber café and Cybercrimes, Bot nets, Attack vector, Cloud computing,
Proliferation of Mobile and Wireless Devices, Trends in Mobility, Credit Card
Frauds in Mobile and Wireless Computing Era, Security Challenges Posed by
3 09 L1
Mobile Devices, Registry Settings for Mobile Devices, Authentication Service
Security, Attacks on Mobile/Cell Phones, Mobile Devices: Security Implications
for Organizations, Organizational Measures for Handling Mobile, Devices-Related
Security Issues, Organizational Security Policies and Measures in Mobile
Computing Era, Laptops
Tools and Methods Used in Cyber line
Phishing, Password Cracking, Key loggers and Spywares, Virus and Worms, L1, L2, L3,
4 06
Steganography, DoS and DDoS Attacks, SQL Injection, Buffer Over Flow, L4
Attacks on Wireless Networks, Phishing, Identity Theft (ID Theft)
The Concept of Cyberspace
E-Commerce, The Contract Aspects in Cyber Law ,The Security Aspect of Cyber
Law ,The Intellectual Property Aspect in Cyber Law , The Evidence Aspect in L1, L2, L3,
5 08
Cyber Law , The Criminal Aspect in Cyber Law, Global Trends in Cyber Law , L4
Legal Framework for Electronic Data Interchange Law Relating to Electronic
Banking , The Need for an Indian Cyber Law
Indian IT Act.
L1, L2, L3,
Cyber Crime and Criminal Justice: Penalties, Adjudication and Appeals Under 04
L4
6 the IT Act, 2000, IT Act. 2008 and its Amendments
Total Hours 39

12
 Books and References:

Sr.
Title Authors Publisher Edition Year
No

Nina Godbole,
Cyber Security Sunit
1 Belapure Wiley India ,New Delhi 2nd 2011
2 The Indian Cyber Law Suresh T. Bharat Law House,New 2nd 2015
Vishwanathan Delhi
Snow White
Cyber Law & Cyber Advocate Prashant Publications,
3 Crimes Mali Mumbai 2nd 2015
Information Systems Nina Godbole
4 Security Wiley India, New Delhi 2nd 2014
Cyber Security & Global Kennetch J. Knapp Information Science
5 Information Assurance Publishing. 1st 2009

13
 T. E. Sem –VI
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)
B.E. Course T.E. Open Elective SEM:VI
Course Name: Reliability Engineering Course Code: OEC- 6015
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination scheme
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week- Theory (100) Practical/Oral Term Total
(25) Work
(25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR TW
Hours 100
03 - - 3 3 20 80 - - - -
IA : Internal Assessment - Paper Duration – 1Hour
ESE : - End Semester Examination Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely completion of practical
(40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: Signals and Systems, Control systems
Course Objective: To impart various aspects of probability theory, system reliability, and maintainability, availability and FMEA
procedure.

Course Outcomes: Students will be able to:

SN Course Outcomes Cognitive Levels as per Bloom’s

Taxonomy
1 Understand and apply the concept of Probability to engineering problems L1,L2,L3
2 Apply various reliability concepts to calculate different reliability parameters L1,L2,L3,L4
3 3Estimate the system reliability of simple and complex systems L1,L2,L3
4 . Carry out a Failure Mode Effect and Criticality Analysis L1,L2,L3,L4

Detailed Syllabus:

Mod Topics Hrs Cognitive Levels as per

ule Bloom’s Taxonomy
No.
Probability theory
Probability: Standard definitions and concepts; Conditional Probability,
Baye’s Theorem. Probability Distributions: Central tendency and
Dispersion; Binomial, Normal, Poisson, Weibull, Exponential, relations L1,L2,L3
1 between them and their significance. Measures of Dispersion: Mean, 8
Median, Mode, Range, Mean Deviation, Standard Deviation, Variance,
Skewness and Kurtosis.

Reliability Concepts
Reliability Concepts: Reliability definitions, Importance of Reliability,
2 Quality Assurance and Reliability, Bath Tub Curve. 08 L1,L2,L3,L4

14
 Failure Data Analysis: Hazard rate, failure density, Failure Rate, Mean
Time ToFailure (MTTF), MTBF, Reliability Functions.
Reliability Hazard Models: Constant Failure Rate, Linearly increasing,
TimeDependent Failure Rate, Weibull Model. Distribution functions
and reliability analysis.
System Reliability:
System Reliability: System Configurations: Series, parallel, mixed
3 configuration, k out 06 L1,L2,L3
of n structure, Complex systems
Reliability Improvement:
Reliability Improvement: Redundancy Techniques: Element
4 redundancy, Unit redundancy, Standby redundancies. Markov analysis. L1,L2
System Reliability Analysis – Enumeration method, Cut-set method,
Success, Path method, Decomposition method.
Maintainability and Availability
Maintainability and Availability: System downtime, Design for
Maintainability:
5 Maintenance requirements, Design methods: Fault Isolation and self- 5 L1,L2,L3,L4
diagnostics, Parts standardization and Interchangeability,
Modularization and Accessibility, Repair Vs Replacement.
Availability – qualitative aspects.
Failure Mode, Effects and Criticality Analysis
Failure mode effects analysis: severity/criticality analysis, FMECA
6 examples. Fault tree construction, basic symbols, development of 5 L1,L2,L3,L4
functional reliability block diagram, Fau1t tree analysis and Event tree
Analysis
Books and References:

S. Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

No
Reliability Engineering”, “Affiliated East-
1 L.S. Srinath, Wast Press (P) 3rdEdition 1985
Ltd
“Reliability and Tata McGraw
2 Charles E. Ebeling 4th Edition 2015
Maintainability Engineering Hill.
Engineering Reliability John Wiley &
3 B. S. Dhillion C. Singh, 5th edition 1980
Sons
Practical Reliability Engg.”, John Wiley &
4 P.D.T. Conor 3rd Edition 1985.
Sons
Reliability in Engineering K.C. Kapur, L.R. Lamber John Wiley &
5. 3rdEdition 1989
Design son Sons.
Probability and Statistics Tata McGraw-
6. Murray R. Spiegel Hill Publishing 5th edition 1980
Co. Ltd.

15
 T.E. SEM VI
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)

B.E. Course T.E. Open Elective SEM: VI

Course Name: Product Life Cycle Management Course Code: OEC- 6016

Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)

Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory(100) Practical/Oral Term Work Total
(20) (20)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR/ OR TW
Hours
3 - - 3 3 25 75 - - 100

IA: In-Semester Assessment- Paper Duration-1 .5 Hours

ESE : End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: Product Design and Development, Quality and Reliability Engineering

Course Objectives:
Course intend to provide an exposure to new product development program and guidelines for designing and
developing a product and apply the knowledge of Product Data Management & PLM strategies.

Course Outcomes:

SN Course Outcomes Cognitive levels as

per bloom’s
Taxonomy
Illustrate knowledge about phases of PLM, PLM strategies and methodology for L1, L2
1 PLM feasibility study and PDM implementation

2 Illustrate various approaches and techniques for designing and developing L1

products.
Apply product engineering guidelines / thumb rules in designing products
3 for moulding, machining, sheet metal working etc L1, L2, L3, L4

Acquire knowledge in applying virtual product development tools for components,

4 machining and manufacturing plant L1, L2, L3, L4

5 Apply Integration of Environmental Aspects in Product Design L1, L2, L3, L4

L1, L2
6. Illustrate knowledge about Life Cycle Assessment and Life Cycle Cost Analysis

16
Detailed Syllabus:

Module No. Topics Hrs. Cognitive levels

as per
bloom’s Taxonomy

Introduction to Product Lifecycle Management (PLM) and

PLM Strategies
1 Product Lifecycle Management (PLM), Need for PLM, Product
Lifecycle Phases, Opportunities of Globalization, Pre-PLM L1, L2
Environment, PLM Paradigm, Importance & Benefits of PLM,
Widespread Impact of PLM, Focus and Application, A PLM
Project, Starting the PLM Initiative, PLM Applications
10
Industrial strategies, Strategy elements, its
identification, selection and implementation, Developing
PLM Vision and PLM Strategy , Change management for
PLM

Product Design
Product Design: Product Design and Development Process,
2 Engineering Design, Organization and Decomposition in Product
Design, Typologies of Design Process Models, Reference Model, L1
Product Design in the Context of the Product Development
Process, Relation with the Development Process Planning Phase,
Relation with the Post design Planning Phase, Methodological 9
Evolution in Product Design, Concurrent Engineering,
Characteristic Features of Concurrent Engineering, Concurrent
Engineering and Life Cycle Approach, New Product Development
(NPD) and Strategies, Product Configuration and Variant
Management, The Design for X System, Objective Properties and
Design for X Tools, Choice of Design for X Tools and Their Use
in the Design Process
Product Data Management (PDM)
Product Data Management (PDM):Product and Product Data,
3 PDM systems and importance, Components of PDM, Reason for 5 L1, L2, L3, L4
implementing a PDM system, financial justification of PDM,
barriers to PDM implementation
Virtual Product Development Tools
Virtual Product Development Tools: For components, machines, L1, L2, L3, L4
4 and manufacturing plants, 3D CAD systems and realistic rendering 5
techniques, Digital mock-up, Model building, Model analysis,
Modeling and simulations
in Product Design, Examples/Case studies
Integration of Environmental Aspects in Product Design

17
 Integration of Environmental Aspects in Product Design:
5 Sustainable Development, Design for Environment, Need for Life L1, L2, L3, L4
Cycle Environmental Strategies, Useful Life Extension Strategies, 5
End-of-Life Strategies, Introduction of Environmental Strategies
into the Design Process, Life Cycle
Environmental Strategies and Considerations for Product Design
Life Cycle Assessment and Life Cycle Cost Analysis
Life Cycle Assessment and Life Cycle Cost Analysis: Properties,
6 and Framework of Life Cycle Assessment, Phases of LCA in ISO L1, L2
Standards, Fields of Application and Limitations of Life Cycle 5
Assessment, Cost Analysis and the Life Cycle Approach, General
Framework for LCCA, Evolution of Models for Product Life
Cycle Cost Analysis. Introduction to Industry4.0, Design
principles and Challenges, Applications of Industry 4.0

Books and References:

SN Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

1 Product Lifecycle John Stark Springer-
Management: Paradigm for Verlag 1st Edition 2004
21st Century
Product Realisation

18
 T.E. Semester –VI (MECH)
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS - H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f . A.Y. 2020-21)

B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) SEM: VI

Course Name: Project Based Learning IV Course Code: HSD-MEPBL 601
Teaching scheme (Holistic Student Development - HSD) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
(Conducted in the beginning of Semester during first 3
Weeks)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Teaching scheme (Holistic and Multidisciplinary Presentation Report Total
Education - HME)
(Conducted in the beginning of the semester during first 3
weeks)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Hours Credits AC AC

25
- - 30 30 1 25
-
AC: Activity Evaluation
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%),
Timely completion of practical (40%) and Attendance/Learning Attitude (20%)
Prerequisite: Mechanics, strength of materials, Theory of Machines, Heat and mass transfer, Thermodynamics,
FEA, Manufacturing process etc.

Course Objectives:

The course intends to develop the ability to integrate knowledge and skills from various areas through
more complex and multidisciplinary projects. The course also aims to build 21st century success
skills such as critical thinking, problem solving, communication, collaboration, and
creativity/innovation.

Course Outcomes:

Upon completion of the course students will be able to:

Sr. Course outcomes Cognitive levels of

No. attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
1 Think divergently to solve real time problem through project management and
L1, L2, L3, L4, L5, L6
with knowledge of different domains to implement a unique solution.

A) Guidelines:
1. Project Topic: To proceed with the project work it is very important to select a right
topic. Project topics can be undertaken based on the learnings from:
1) Professional Skill V (Industry Skills/Research Skills))
2) Employability Skill Development III
3) Multidisciplinary projects in any domain
19 of mechanical engineering program.
Department has six domains namely
i) Thermal
ii) Design
iii) Manufacturing
iv) Robotics & Automation
2. Student must consult internal guide in selection of topic.
3. Project work must be carried out by a group of at least two students and maximum
four. Students can continue their previous projects and can add new dimension to
it.
4. Students should carry out project work every week according to time table and report
to the internal guide regarding the progress of the project.

5. Internal guide has to keep track on the progress of the project and also has to
maintain attendance report. This progress report can be used for awarding the
term work marks.
6. At the end of the term students should demonstrate the working of the project with the
help of a working model.

B) Proposed Presentation Format:

At the end of semester, a project presentation can preferably contain following details.
1. Abstract
2. Introduction
3. Literature Survey
a) Survey Existing system
b) Limitation of the Existing system or research gap
c) Problem Statement and Objective) Scope
4. Proposed System a) Analysis/Framework/ Algorithm b) Details of Hardware &
Software c) Design details d) Methodology (your approach to solve the problem)
5. Results/Output (photograph of working model)
6. Conclusion
7. Reference

C) Term Work:
Distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:
a) Weekly Attendance as per time table
b) Contribution in the Project work
c) Project Report
d) Term End Presentation

D) Oral & demonstration:

Oral & Practical examination of Project should be conducted by Internal and External examiners.

20
 T.E. Semester –VI (MECH)
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f . A.Y. 2020-21)

B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) SEM: VI

Course Name: Research Based Learning-II Course Code: HSD-MECHRBL601
Teaching scheme (Holistic Student Development - Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
HSD) (Conducted in the beginning of Semester
during first 3 Weeks)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Presentation Report Total
(100)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE AC AC
Hours
50
25
- - 30 30 1 - - 25

AC: Activity Evaluation

The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance/Learning Attitude (20%)
Prerequisite: Subject knowledge, Domain knowledge.

Course Objectives: This course is focused to engage the learner in research using critical thinking,
problem solving, coding and technical writing related to upcoming latest technologies.

Course Outcomes: Upon completion of the course students will be able to:

Sr. Course Outcome Cognitive level

No. attainment as per
revised Bloom
Taxonomy
1 Upgrade the knowledge of latest technologies and developments in their L1, L2
domain.
2 Develop prototype based on idea which providing solutions to industry, L1, L2, L3,L4,l5,L6
research organization, academic organization, community or society as a
whole.
3 Design and develop the code /model for given problem definition in a L1, L2, L3,L4,l5,L6
competitive environment and contribute for grants.
4 Write a research paper and understand technical writing. L1, L2, L3,L4,l5

21
Detailed Syllabus:

Module Topics Cognitive level

No. attainment as
per revised
Bloom
Taxonomy
1 Participation in online community/Forums/ writing Blogs L1, L2
I. Registration on online community/forum/follow blogs /Twitter etc.
Creating own Blogs and LinkedIn profile.
Misevaluation is based on report submission on activities learned through
registration on various platforms. Submission of LinkedIn profile address,
Blog URL by Students is recommended.
Presentation and Evaluation
2 Prototype development/ Mathematical model development based on L1, L2,
Idea L3,L4,l5,L6
I. Prototype development: Introduction to Research Methodology
techniques. Introduction and importance of prototype development.
Transforming Idea into prototype with implementation/working model.
II. Presentations by students, Experience sharing by entrepreneurs or
Hackathon Winners.
Presentation and Evaluation
3 Building Competitive Attitude L1, L2,
I. Participation in Project competitions/Coding competitions/Working L3,L4,l5,L6
for research grant/Consultancy:
a) Participating at institute/National level/University level/ Conference
/participate in competitions.
b) Participation in funded project/consultancy projects
c) Experience sharing by good coders/winners
II. Evaluation based on Presentation/Certificates/Grant
received/Consultancy received.
Presentation and Evaluation
4 Research Paper Publication L1, L2,
I. Introduction to Research paper writing: Write a paper/case study L3,L4,L5,L6
considering review of literature based on idea and developed prototype.
II. Publishing: Identification of appropriate journal or conference at
University level/State level/National level for submission and Preparation
of a review paper.
Evaluation of Research paper based on quality and acceptance of
research paper.

Books and References:

Sr. No. Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

1 Guide to Competitive Programming: Antti Springer Kindle 2018
Learning and Improving Algorithms Laaksonen
Through Contests
2 Writing Research Papers: A James D. Lester Longman 10th 2001
Complete Guide
3 Creativity in Product Innovation Jacob Cambridge Kindle 2002
Goldenberg University
Press
22
Online References:

Sr. No. Website Name URL Modules

Covered
1 https://www.researchgate.net https://www.researchgate.net/publication/2243729 M2
98_Idea_Generation_Techniques_among_Creative
_Professionals
2 https://discuss.codechef.com https://discuss.codechef.com/t/programming- M3
contest-detailed-syllabus-along-with-example-
problems/17791
3 https://www.statpac.com https://www.statpac.com/online-software- M4
manual/Basic-Research-Concepts.htm
4 https://www.slideshare.net https://www.slideshare.net/AsirJohnSamuel/1intro M4
duction-to-research-
methodology?next_slideshow=1

23
 +

Semester - VII & VIII

 VISION
"To become a department of eminence in the field of Mechanical Engineering"

MISSION
"To deliver an excellent undergraduate engineering program that prepares
students for successful careers with social sensitivity, and also actively promote
the culture of research amongst students and faculty."
 Programme Outcomes (Graduate Attributes)
1. Engineering Knowledge: Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering
fundamentals and an engineering specialization to the solution of complex
engineering problems.
2. Problem Analysis: Identify, formulate, research literature and analyze complex
engineering problems reaching substantiated conclusions using first principles of
mathematics, natural sciences and engineering sciences.
3. Design/Development of solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering
problems and design system components or processes that meet specified needs
with appropriate consideration for public health and safety, cultural, societal and
environmental considerations.
4. Conduct investigations of complex problems using research based knowledge and
research methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of
data and synthesis of information to provide valid conclusions.
5. Modern Tool Usage: Create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources and
modern engineering and IT tools including prediction and modeling to complex
engineering activities with an understanding of the limitations.
6. The Engineer and Society: Apply reasoning informed by contextual knowledge to
assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent
responsibilities relevant to professional engineering practice.
7. Environment and Sustainability: Understand the impact of professional engineering
solutions in societal and environmental context and demonstrate knowledge of and
need for sustainable development.
8. Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities
and norms of engineering practice.
9. Individual and Team work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or
leader in diverse teams and in multi-disciplinary settings.
10. Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with
the engineering community and with society at large, such as being able to
comprehend and write effective reports and design documentation, make effective
presentations and give and receive clear instructions.
11. Lifelong learning: Recognize the need for and have the preparation and ability to
engage in independent and life-long learning in the broadest context of
technological change.
12. Project Management and Finance: Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of
engineering and management principles and apply these to one’s own work, as a
member and leader in a team, to manage projects in multidisciplinary environments.
 Program Educational Objectives
Students of BE Programme in Mechanical Engineering will be able to:

PEO 1: Prepare with strong foundation in mathematical, scientific and engineering

fundamentals that will enable them to have successful career in Mechanical and
Interdisciplinary Industries.

PEO 2: Strengthen their knowledge and skills through self-learning abilities throughout
their professional career or during higher education.

PEO 3: Impart critical thinking skills and to develop innovative ideas for Research &
Development

Program Specific Outcomes

PSO 1: Identify, Formulate and Analyze complex Engineering problems in Thermal
Engineering, Design Engineering and Manufacturing Engineering domains

PSO 2: An ability to find out, articulate the local industrial problems and solve with the
use of Mechanical Engineering tools for realistic outcomes.

PSO 3: An ability of collaborative learning to find out cost-effective, optimal solution

sustainable growth.
 B.E. Semester –VII (Mechanical Engineering)
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development(CBCGS- H 2019)
Under TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)
Course Description Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination scheme
Sr. Course Code Course Title Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
No. Hours Per Week Credits Theory (100) Practical/Oral Term Total
(25) Work (25)
Theory Tutori Practic Contact IA(25/15) ESE PR/OR TW
al al Hours (75)
1 PCC-ME701 Machine
Design II 3 - 2 5 4 25 75 25 25 150
2 PEC- Professional
ME701X Elective III 3 - 2@ 5 4 25 75 25 25 150
3 PEC- Professional
3 - 2@ 5 4 25 75 25 25 150
ME702X Elective IV
4 OEC- Open Elective
3 - - 3 3 25 75 - - 100
ME701X II
5 HSMC- Finance
ME701 Management 3 - - 3 3 25 75 - - 100

6 PROJ-ME701 Project I
- - 6 6 3 - - 25 25 50

Total 15 - 12 27 21 Total marks 700

Course Description Contact Hrs. during Semester Break/ End of Semester(Between 21st and 25th Week)
Summer - - - 120 * - - - - -
1 SI-ME701 -
Intership
2 AP-ME701 Activity Points - - - 48# - - - - - -
Course Description Teaching scheme (Holistic Student Development - Assessment/Evaluation Scheme
HSD) Presentation Report Term Work
(Conducted in the beginning of Semester during AC AC
first 3 Weeks)
1 HSD- Professional
MEPS701 Skill VII (CNC 15 - 30 45 2 50 25 75
Programming)
2 HSD- Research
MERBL701 Based - - 30 30 1 25 25 50
Learning-III
Total 15 - 60 75 3 Total marks 125
Total 24 Grand Total marks: 825
 PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE III PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE IV OPEN ELECTIVE II
Course Code Course name Domain Course Code Course name Domain Course Code Course name
PEC-ME7011 Fracture mecahnics 1 PEC-ME7021 Composite & Nano 1 OEC-ME7011 Management Information System
Material

PEC-ME7012 Hydraulic Machines 2 PEC-ME7022 Computational Fluid 2 OEC-ME7012 Human Resource Management
Dynamics

PEC-ME7013 Industrial Engineering & 3 PEC-ME7023 Additive Manufacturing 3 OEC-ME7013 Design Thinking and Problem
Management Solving

PEC-ME7014 Automobile Engineering 4 PEC-ME7024 Automation and Smart 4 OEC-ME7014 Disaster management and
manufacturing mitigation measures

5 OEC-ME7015 Research Methodology

6 OEC-ME7016 Operation Research

1. IA- In-Semester Assessment, ESE- End Semester Examination, PR- Practical Examination, TW – Term Work Examination, OR- Oral Examination, AC- Activity evaluation
2. @-Professional Elective Courses Lab will be conducted in the form Capstone Project
3. #As per AICTE, Students has to earn 100 Points by participating in 400 Hrs. of activities during 4 years of Engineering. After Completing 48 hrs. of Activities, Students can
earn 12 Points. This Points will not be reflected in Grade Card. Separate transcript will be issued to students after completion of Final Year.
4. * Total hrs. mentioned should be completed till end of Semester 8. Credits will be awarded at the end of 8 th Semester and will be reflected in the Grade Card of 8 th Semester.
Student will get 1 year span to acquire the credits. Student will submit a report at the end of 8th Semester to earn Termwork marks in internship.
 B.E. Semester –VIII (Mechanical Engineering)
Proposed Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development(CBCGS- H 2019)
Under TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)
Course Description Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Sr. Practical/Ora Term Work
Course Hours Per Week Theory (100)
No Course Title l (25/50) (25/100)
Code Credits Total
. Contact IA(25/15) ESE(75/35)
Theory Tutorial Practical PR/OR TW
Hours
PCC- CAD-CAM &
1 3 2 5 4 25 75 25 25 150
ME801 Automation
PEC-
2 Professional Elective V 3 - 2@ 5 4 25 75 25 25 150
ME801X
OEC-
3 Open Elective III 3 - - 3 3 25 75 - - 100
ME801X
OEC-
4 Open Elective IV 3 - - 3 3 25 75 - - 100
ME802X
PROJ-
5 Project II - - 12 12 6 - - 100 50 150
ME801
Total 16
12 - 26 20 - - Total marks 650
Course Description Contact Hrs. during Semester Break/ End of Semester(Between 21 st and 25th Week)
1 SI-ME801 Summer Intership - - - 120 * 3 - - - 50 50
1 AP-ME801 Activity Points - - - 52# - - - - - -
Teaching scheme (Holistic Student Development - Assessment/Evaluation Scheme
HSD) Presentation Report
Course Description Term
(Conducted in the beginning of Semester during
AC AC Work
first 3 Weeks)
HSD-
Professional Skill
1 MEPS801 15 - 30 45 2 50 25 75
VIII(CFD on Software)
HSD-
Research Based
2 MERBL801 - - 30 30 1 25 25 50
Learning-IV
Total 15 - 60 75 3 Total marks 125
Total 26 Grand Total marks: 825
 PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE V OPEN ELECTIVE III OPEN ELECTIVE IV
Course Code Course name Domain Course Course name Course Code Course name
Code
PEC-ME8011 Design of Mechanical 1 OEC- Project Management OEC-ME8021 Managerial Economics
Systems ME8011

PEC-ME8012 Design of heat Exchanger 2 OEC- Energy Audit and Management OEC-ME8022 Digital Business Management
ME8012

PEC-ME8013 Operations management 3 OEC- Innovation Management OEC-ME8023 Social Media Analytics
ME8013

PEC-ME8014 Renewable Energy 4 OEC- Environment management OEC-ME8024 Basic Taxation for Engineers
Systems ME8014

PEC-ME8015 5 OEC- Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) & OEC-ME8025 Product design and Development
ME8015 Patenting

OEC- Supply Chain Management OEC-ME8026 Development Engieering

ME8016

1. IA- In-Semester Assessment, ESE- End Semester Examination, PR- Practical Examination, TW – Term Work Examination, OR- Oral Examination, AC- Activity evaluation
2. @-Professional Elective Courses Lab will be conducted in the form Capstone Project
3. #As per AICTE, Students has to earn 100 Points by participating in 400 Hrs. of activities during 4 years of Engineering. After Completing 52 hrs. of Activities, Students can
earn 13 Points. This Points will not be reflected in Grade Card. Separate transcript will be issued to students after completion of Final Year.
4. *Total hrs. mentioned should be completed till end of Semester 8. Credits will be awarded at the end of 8th Semester and will be reflected in the Grade Card of 8 th Semester.
Student will submit a report to earn Termwork marks in internship.
 B.E. Semester –VII (Mechanical Engineering)
Proposed Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development(CBCGS- H 2019)
Under TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)
B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) B.E. SEM: VII
Course Name: Machine Design II Course Code: PCC- ME701

Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)

Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total
(100) (20) (20)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR/ OR TW
Hours
150
3 - 2 5 4 25 75 25 25

IA: In-Semester Assessment- Paper Duration-1.5 Hours

Hours ESE : End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely completion of
practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: Engineering : Machine Design 1, Strength of materials, Manufacturing process, Metallurgy

Course Objectives: To understand how characteristics of belt drives and procedures for selection of flat and v
belt, roller bearings from manufactures catalogue. To apply basic modes of lubrication ,viscosity its measurement
for bearing design. To present an overview types of gear designing approaches, working and designing of cam
and follower, develop a basic understanding of learning and understand Applications of clutch for uniform
pressure and wear conditions

Course Outcomes:

SN Course Outcomes Cognitive Levels of

attainment as per
Blooms Taxonomy
1 To Select appropriate gears for power transmission on the basis of given L1,L2,L4
load and speed
2 To know method of selection of bearing for cyclic load, speeds and for given L2,L4,L5
reliability
3 L2,L4,L5
To Select bearings for a given applications from the manufacturers catalogue

4 L1,L4,L6

To Design cam and follower mechanisms.

5 To Select and/or design belts and chains for given applications L5,L6,L3

6 L4,L5,L6
To Design clutches and brakes
 Detailed Syllabus:
Module No. Topics Cognitive
Levels of
attainment as
per Blooms
Taxonomy
Design of Gears

Design of Gears:
Gears: Design of spur, helical, bevel and worm gears with strength, wear and thermal L1,L2,L4
1 considerations
Gear Box: Two stage Gear box with fixed ratio consisting of spur, helical and bevel gear
pairs: gear box housing layout and housing design
Design of rolling contact bearings
Rolling Contact Bearings: Types of bearing and designation, selection of
rolling contact bearings based on constant / variable load & speed conditions (includes deep
groove ball bearing, cylindrical roller, spherical roller, taper roller, self-aligning bearing and
2 thrust bearing) L2,L4,L5
Design of sliding contact bearings
Sliding Contact Bearings: Design of hydro dynamically lubricated bearings
3 (self-contained), Introduction to hydro static bearings, Types and selection of Mechanical
seals L2,L3,L5
Design of Cams and Followers L1,L4,L6
Design of Cams and Followers: Design of Cam and Roller follower
4 mechanisms with spring and shaft
Design of Belts, Roller chains

5 Design and selection of Belts: Flat and V-belts with pulley construction Design and L5,L6,L3
selection of standard roller chains

Design of Clutches
Design of Clutches: Introduction, types, Basic theory of plate and cone type clutches,
6 Design of single plate, multi-plate and cone clutches, with spring, lever design and
thermal, wear considerations. L4,L5,L6

Books and References:

SN Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

Design of Machine Elements V.B. Bhandari Tata McGraw Hill 3rd Edition -
1 Publication
Machine Design -An Integrated Robert L. Norton Pearson Education 2nd Edition 1998
2 Approach
3 Mechanical Engineering Design J.E.Shigley McGraw Hill 9th Edition 2008

4 Data Books PSG 4th Edition 2019

Kalaikathir
5 4th Edition 2018
Engineering Design Dieter G E McGraw Hill Inc

Online Reference

Website name URL Modules

covered
 1 Machine Design II-web course https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/106/ M1,M
112106137/ 2 ,M3

https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/105/
112105124/
M5
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/105/
112105125/ M3

Suggested Experiment List

Sr. Experiment topic Type of Hrs. Cognitive levels

Experime of attainment
No nts per Bloom’s
Taxonomy

1 Design of spur gear box Design Experiments 2 L1,L

2,L4

2 CAD model and assembly of Design Experiments 2 L1,L

spur gear box 2,L4

3 Design of cam and followers Design Experiments 2 L1,L

4,L6

4 CAD model and assembly of Design Experiments 2 L1,L

cam and followers 4,L6

5 Design of clutches Design Experiments 2 L4,L

5,L6

6 Design Experiments 2 L2,L

Design of bearings 3,L5

7 Design of V-belts Design Experiments 2 L5,L

6,L3

8 CAD model and assembly of V- Design Experiments 2

belts L5,L
6,L3

9 Course project- Mini Project 2 L3,L

Design and prepare working 4,L6
drawings of any system having
minimum 5 to 6 components by
applying the knowledge gained
during the course

1 Course project- Mini Project 2 L4,L

0 Design and prepare working 5,L6
drawings of any system having
minimum 5 to 6 components by
applying the knowledge gained
during the course
 B.E. Semester –VII (Mechanical Engineering)
Proposed Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development(CBCGS- H 2019)
Under TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)
B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) B.E. SEM: VIII
Course Name: Hydrualic Machines Course Code: PEC-ME7012
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total
(100) (20) (20)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR/ OR TW
Hours
150
3 - 2# 5 4 25 75 25 25

IA:In-Semester Assessment- Paper Duration-1 Hours

ESE : End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)

Prerequisite: Fluid Mechnics, Appiled Thermodynamics

Course Objectives:

1 To provide the knowledge of basic principles, governing equations and applications of turbomachines.
2 To understand construction and working principle with detail of velocity diagram of impulse turbine.
3 To explain construction and working principle with detail of velocity diagram of reaction turbine.
4 To provide adequate knowledge about the performance and governing of turbines.
5 To explain construction and working principle with detail of velocity diagram of hydraulic pumps.
Course Outcomes:

SN Course Outcomes Cognitive levels

as per bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Understand the concept of jet & its Impact. L1, L2
2 Analyze the performance and understand the working principles of L1, L2, L3, L4
impulse turbine
3 Analyze the performance and understand the working principles of L1, L2, L3, L4
Reaction turbine
4 Understand the working principles and ability to select turbo machine L1, L2, L3, L4
for given application.
5 Understand the working principle of centrifugal pump L1, L2, L3, L4

6 Understand the working principle of Reciprocating pump L1, L2, L3

Detailed Syllabus:

Module Topics Hrs. Cognitive

No. levels as
per bloom’s
Taxonomy
Impact of Jet
Impact of Jet Impulse – momentum principle, jet impingement - on a
1 stationary flat plate, inclined plate and a hinged plate, at the center of a 6 L1, L2, L3
stationary vane, on a moving flat plate, inclined plate, a moving vane
and a series of vanes, Jet striking tangentially at the tip of a stationary
vane and moving vane(s)

Impulse Turbine
Impulse Turbine: Classification – impulse and reaction turbines, water 9
2 wheels, components, construction and operation of a Pelton wheel,
work done, effective head, available head and efficiency of a Pelton
L1, L2, L3,
wheel, design aspects, speed ratio, flow ratio, jet ratio, number of jets, L4
number of buckets and working proportions, Numerical
Reaction Turbine
Reaction Turbine: Component parts, construction and operation of a 9 L1, L2, L3,
Francis turbine, Propeller, Kaplan turbine, differences between the L4
3 Francis and Kaplan turbines, work done by the turbine runner, working
proportions and design parameters, slow, medium and fast runners,
degree of reaction, inward/outward flow reaction turbines, construction
and operation of a draft tube - its function and different forms,
Numericals.
Model Similitude
Model Similitude: Performance Characteristics and governing of 7 L1, L2, L3,
4 impulse turbines , Performance Characteristics and Governing of L4
reaction turbine, Unit quantities, specific speed and model relationships
for turbines, scale effect, cavitation – its causes, harmful effects and
prevention, Thomas cavitation factor, permissible installation height,
Numericals.
Centrifugal Pump
Hydraulic Pumps: Pumps: definition and classifications - Centrifugal 7 L1, L2, L3,
5 pump: classifications, working principles, velocity triangles, specific L4
speed, efficiency and performance curves
Reciprocating Pumps
Reciprocating pump: classification, working principle, indicator 7 L1, L2, L3,
6 diagram, work saved by air vessels and performance curves – L4
cavitation in pumps - rotary pumps: working principles of gear and
vane pumps
Books and References:

SN Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

1 Thermal Engineering R K. Rajput Laxmi 3 rd Edition 2010
Publication
2 Thermal Engineering Kothandraman, Dhanpatrai & 5th Edition 2015
Domkundwar, Sons
Khajuria, Arora
3 Fluid Mechanics and Standard Book 4th Edition 2012
Hydraulic Machinery Modi and Seth
House

Online References:

S. Website Name URL Modules

No. Covered
1 www.nptel.ac.in https://nptel.ac.in M1-M6
 B.E. Semester –VII (Mechanical Engineering)
Proposed Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development(CBCGS- H 2019)
Under TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)
B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) B.E. SEM: VII
Course Name: Fracture Mechanics Course Code: PEC – ME7011

Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)

Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory (100) Practical/Oral Term Work Total
(20) (20)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR/ OR TW
Hours
150
3 - 2@ 5 4 25 75 25 25

IA: In-Semester Assessment- Paper Duration-1

Hours ESE : End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely completion of practical
(40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: Strength of materials, Machine Design, Failures
Course Objectives: Course intend to acquaint with fundamentals of linear elastic fracture mechanics, nonlinear (Elastic-
Plastic) fracture mechanics and fatigue crack growth

Course Outcomes:

SN Course Outcomes Cognitive levels as per bloom’s

Taxonomy

1 Develop basic fundamental understanding of the effects of crack like defects on L1, L2, L3, L4
the performance of aerospace, civil, and mechanical Engineering structures.
2 Learn to employ modern numerical methods to determine critical crack sizes and L1, L2, L3, L4
fatigue crack propagation rates in engineering structures.
3 Understand plasticity effect & plane strain fracture toughness: L1, L2, L3, L4
4 Understand Elastic and plastic fracture mechanics L1, L2, L3, L4
5 learn about mechanics of crack tip fields and appropriate fracture characterizing L1, L2, L3, L4
parameters like stress intensity factor and J integral or nonlinear energy release
rate and how to compute them using various methods
6 Learn about Fatigue crack propagation and applications of fracture mechanics L1, L2, L3, L4
 Detailed Syllabus:

Module Topics Hrs. Cognitive

No. levels as
per bloom’s
Taxonomy
Fracture mechanics principles
1 5 L1, L2, L3,

Introduction and historical review, Sources of micro and macro cracks. Stress
concentration due to elliptical hole, Strength ideal materials, and Griffith’s energy
balance approach.

Fracture mechanics design

2 Fracture mechanics approach to design, NDT and Various NDT methods used in 7 L1, L2, L3
fracture mechanics, Numerical problems. The Airy stress function. Effect of finite
crack size. Elliptical cracks, Numerical problems.

Plasticity effects:
3 9 L1, L2, L3

Irwin plastic zone correction. Dugdale’s approach. The shape of the plastic zone for
plane stress and plane strain cases. The plate thickness effect, numerical problems
.Determination of Stress intensity factors and plane strain fracture toughness:
Introduction, estimation of stress intensity factors. Experimental method- Plane strain
fracture toughness test, The Standard test, size requirements ,etc.
Elastic plastic fracture mechanics:
4 9 L1, L2, L3, L4
The energy release rate,
Criteria for crack growth. The crack resistance(R curve). Compliance. Tearing
modulus. Stability.
Elastic plastic fracture mechanics:
Fracture beyond general yield. The Crack-tip opening displacement. The Use of CTOD
criteria. Experimental determination of CTOD. Parameters affecting the critical CTOD.
J integral

J integral:
Use of J integral. Limitation of J integral. Experimental determination of J integral and
the parameters affecting J integral.
Dynamics and crack arrest:
5 Crack speed and kinetic energy. Dynamic stress intensity and elastic energy release rate. 9 L1, L2, L3
Crack branching. Principles of crack arrest. Crack arrest in practice. Dynamic fracture
toughness.

Fatigue crack propagation and applications of fracture mechanics

6 Crack growth and the stress intensity factor. Factors affecting crack propagation. L1, L2, L3, L4
Variable amplitude service loading, Means to provide fail-safety, Paris law, Required 8
information for fracture mechanics approach,
Online References:

S. Website Name URL Modules

No. Covered
1 www.nptel.ac.in https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/106/112106065/ M1- M6

Books and References:

SN Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

Elements of fracture Kumar, Prashant, and Tata McGraw - 2009
1 mechanics Kumar Prashant Hill
Publication
Fracture Mechanics: Maiti, S. K Cambridge - 2015
2 Fundamentals and University
Applications Press
3 Fracture mechanics criteria Gdoutos, Emmanuel Springer Vol 10 2012
and applications Science &
Business Media
 B.E. Semester –VIII
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2020)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w. e. f. A.Y. 2021-22)

B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) B.E. SEM: VIII

Course Name: Industrial Engineering and Management Course Code: PEC-ME7013
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total
Hours Per Week
(100) (20) (20)
Theory Tutoria Contact
Practical Credits IA ESE PR/ OR TW
l Hours
3 1 2@ 5 4 25 75 25 25 150
IA : In-Semester Assessment- Paper Duration-1 Hours
ESE : End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely completion of practical
(40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: Production planning and control

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarize with concept of integration of various resources and the significance of perfecting them in manufacturing and
allied Industries
2. To acquaint with various productivity enhancement techniques

Course Outcomes:

Cognitive levels
Course Outcomes
as per bloom’s Taxonomy

1 Learner will be able to Illustrate the need for optimization of resources and L1, L2
its significance,
2 Demonstrate the concept of value analysis and its relevance. L1, L2, L3, L4
Manage and implement different concepts involved in
method study and understanding of work content in different
3 L1, L2, L3, L4
situations.

Describe different aspects of work system design and

4 facilities design pertinent to manufacturing industries. L1, L2, L3, L4

5 Describe Facility location factors and evaluation of alternate locations; L1, L2, L3, L4

Illustrate concepts of Job Evaluation and Merit Rating

6 L1, L2, L3
Detailed Syllabus:

Mod Detailed contents Hrs Cognitiv

ules . e levels

Introduction to Industrial Engineering : History of industrial Engineering, Primary

Activities of industrial engineering , Techniques and Applications of industrial engineering L1, L2,
01 08 L3
,Applications in Manufacturing and Service Sector , Functions of an industrial engineer ,
Productivity : Indices of productivity , Factors affecting productivity , Human Factors,
Technological Factors ,Productivity improvement ,Efficiency and Effectiveness
,Techniques for Productivity Improvement ,Difficulties in measuring productivity
Plant layout :Factors influencing plant layout ,Principles of plant layout , Types of
plant layout ,Product Layout (Also Line Processing or Flow Line Layout) , Process Layout 08
(Also Functional or Job Shop Layout) , Fixed Position or Static Layout ,Group Technology L1, L2,
Layout (Also Cellular Manufacturing Layout) L3, L4
,Combination or Hybrid Layout, Line balancing ,Layout design procedures , Systematic
Layout Planning ,Computerized Relative Allocation of Facilities Technique (CRAFT)
RELATIONSHIP DIAGRAMS , Computerized Relationship Layout Planning
(CORELAP)
Value analysis : Value, Types of Value ,Reasons for Poor Value in Product/Service ,
Value Analysis ,When to Apply Value Analysis , Value Engineering Job Plan/Phases of
Value Engineering , Difference Between Value Analysis and Value Engineering
Work Study :
03 Introduction , Meaning and Components of Work Study , Method study , Procedure for 08 L1, L2,
Conducting Method Study (SREDIM) , Types of Charts and diagrams ,Operation Process L3,
Chart , Flow Process Chart , Two-Handed Process Chart ,Multiple Activity Chart , Flow L4
Diagram , String Diagram, Cyclograph ,Chrono cyclographs ,Work measurement , Basic
Procedure of Work Measurement ,Terms Used in Work Measurement , Techniques of Work
Measurement , Allowances ,Relaxation Allowance , Interference Allowance, Process
Allowance , Contingency Allowance
Ergonomics : Introduction, Objectives of ergonomics
, Areas of study under ergonomics ,Man-machine system ,Classification of Man-Machine L1, L2,
04 Systems, Functions Performed by Man and Machine ,Important aspects of man- 08 L3,
machine systems , Design of Visual Display ,Design of Workplace , Design of Controls L4
,Environmental or Working Conditions , Anthropometry ,Principles in Application of
Anthropometric Data, Ergonomics and fatigue , Factors Causing Fatigue in a Person
,Preventing Fatigue in Workplace ,Principles of motion economy , Use of the Human Body
,Arrangement of Workplace , Design of Tools and Equipment

Industrial Safety :
L1, L2,
05 Introduction ,Industrial Accidents , Effects of Industrial Accidents , Causes of 10 L3,
industrial accidents ,Mechanical Factors ,Environmental Factors ,Unsafe Acts by L4
Individuals , Unsafe Personal Factors
, Safety devices in machines ,Safe work place layout and improvement of working
conditions , Electrical hazards , Precautions to be Taken to Protect Against Electric
Hazards and Shocks , Personal protective devices , Head Protective Devices , Eye and Face
Protective Devices , Hand and Arm Protective Devices ,Foot and Leg Protective Devices ,
Body Protective Devices Fire—sources, prevention and protection , Sources of Fire ,
Prevention and Protection from Fire, Classification of fires, Types of fire extinguishers ,
Safety programme , Activities Carried out Under Safety Programme , Labour welfare
schemes
 Job Evaluation and Merit Rating L1, L2, L3,
L4
06 Introduction, Meaning of Job Evaluation ,Job evaluation methods , Non-quantitative 10
Methods of Job Evaluation , Quantitative Methods of Job Evaluation
, Merit rating, Selection of Factors in Setting up Merit Rating Method , Methods of Merit
Rating ,Factors Affecting Industrial Relations.
Wages and Incentives Introduction ,Meaning of Wages , Wage Classification , System of
Wage Payment, Incentives ,Types of Incentives ,Incentives for Supervisory Staff ,
Incentives for Managerial Staff, Time-based Individual Incentive Plans , Halsey’s Plan ,
Rowan’s Plan, Emerson’s Efficiency Plan, , Bedaux’s Plan or Point System, Output-Based
Individual Incentive Plans Taylor’s Differential Piece Rate Plan , Merrick’s Multiple Piece
Rate Plan , Gantt’s Task Plan ,Profit sharing
Industrial Relations Introduction ,Industrial Disputes ,Results of Industrial Disputes
,Methods of settling industrial disputes

Books and References:

Authors
SN Title Publisher

ILO, Geneva,
1 Introduction to Work study, Oxford & IBH Pub Co. Pvt. Ltd.

Ergonomics at Work, Oxford & IBH Pub Co. Pvt. Ltd.

2 Murrell

Plant Layout and Material John Wiley & Sons

3 James M. Apple,
Handling,

Facility Layout and

Richard L. Francis& John
4 Location – An Analytical Prentice Hall
A. White,
Approach,

Production Planning and Samuel Elion

5 Prentice Hall
Control,

Production and Operations Joseph G. Monks John Wiley & Sons

6
Management,

Quality planning and

7 J M Juran, FM Gryana, TMH
analysis,
 Industrial Engineering and
8 V Ravi PHI
Management

9. Total Quality Management, D. H. Bester Field et al. prentice hall

Online References:

S. URL
Website Name Modules Covered
No.
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112107238/26
1 www.nptel.ac.in https://www.digimat.in/nptel/courses/video/112107143/L M1-M6
07.html
 B.E. Semester –VII (Mechanical Engineering)
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development(CBCGS- H 2019)
Under TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)
B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) B.E. SEM: VIII

Course Name: Automobile Engineering Course Code: PEC-ME7014

Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)

Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation

Hours Per Week : 3 Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total

(100) (20) (20)

Theory Tutorial Practical Contac Credits IA ESE PR/ OR TW 150

t
Hours

3 - 2@ 5 4 25 75 25 25

IA:In-Semester Assessment- Paper Duration-1 Hours

ESE : End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely completion
of practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: Basic Design Concepts and theories of failure.
Course Objectives:

Course intend to impart the understanding of important mechanical systems of an automobile with insight into the electrical
systems of an automobile and to familiarize with the latest technological developments in automotive technology

Course Outcomes:

SN Course Outcomes Cognitive levels as per bloom’s

Taxonomy

1 Illustrate the types and working of clutch and transmission system. L1, L2, L3, L4

2 Demonstrate the working of different types of final drives, steering gears and L1, L2, L3, L4
braking systems

3 Illustrate the constructional features of wheels, tyres and suspension systems L1, L2, L3, L4

4 Demonstrate the understanding of types of storage, charging and starting L1, L2, L3, L4
systems

5 Identify the type of body and chassis of an automobile L1, L2, L3, L4

6 Comprehend the different technological advances in automobile L1, L2, L3, L4

Detailed Syllabus:

Modul Topics Hrs. Cognitive

e No. levels as
per bloom’s
Taxonomy

1 Transmission Systems 8 L1, L2,

L3, L4
Transmission system – need and Construction of Clutch, Gear Box - Manual and
Automatic - Over Drives – Transfer Box, Fluid flywheel, Torque convertors.
Hydraulic control systems of automatic transmission. Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT). Propeller shaft - Hotchkiss drives, Torque tube drive, radius
rods, Universal joints. Final drive - Differential - conventional and Non-slip types,
differential locks. Rear axle construction - full floating, three quarter floating and
semi-floating arrangements.

2 Steering, Brakes and Suspension Systems 10 L1, L2, L3

Front axle - rigid and split axle, construction and materials. Front wheel geometry -
camber, castor, kingpin inclination, toe-in and toe-out. Steering Geometry -
Ackermann and Davis steering - steering linkages, steering gear box, power steering.
Turning radius, instantaneous centre, wheel wobble and shimmy. Over steer and
under steer. Hydraulic and Pneumatic Braking Systems - braking torque, materials,
disc & drum brakes, brake actuating systems. Exhaust brakes, power and power
assisted brakes. Factors affecting brake performance, Antilock Braking System
(ABS) and traction control. Suspension - types, factors influencing ride comfort,
shock absorbers. Wheels and Tyres – construction and materials. Static and rolling
properties of pneumatic tyres, tubeless tyres, aspect ratio, tyre wear and maintenance.

3 Vehicle Structure, Comfort and Safety 6 L1, L2, L3

Automobiles - Vehicle Construction - layouts, chassis, frame, body material and

construction. Vehicle Aerodynamics - Flow phenomenon related to vehicles, drag,
side force, lift force, rolling resistance, total road loads, performance optimization of
car bodies. Introduction to vehicle dynamics. Ergonomics and anthropometry - Driver
seat for comfort and safety, safety belts, Air bags, Use of energy absorbing system,
Impact protection. Recent trends in automotive safety systems - Safety regulations
and testing. Fundamentals of vehicle air-conditioning, cooling and heating system -
automatic climate control. Noise, Vibrations and Harshness, Vehicle maintenance

4 Automotive Electrical System 8 L1, L2, L3,

L4
Storage System:
Lead-Acid Battery; construction, working, ratings, types of charging methods,
Alkaline, ZEBRA, Sodium Sulphur and Swing batteries
Charging System:
Dynamo: Principle of operation, Construction and Working. Regulators,
combined current and voltage regulator.
Alternator: Principle of operation, Construction, Working. Rectification from AC
to DC
Starting system:
Requirements, Various torque terms used, Starter motor drives; Bendix, Rubber
compression, Compression Spring, Overrunning Clutch. Starter motor solenoids
and switches

5 Automotive Electronics 4 L1, L2, L3

 Automotive Sensors & Actuators, Engine Management Control System (EMS).
Vehicle Management System- vehicle tracking system, Collision avoidance, Radar
warning system, Global Positioning Systems.

6 Need for Alternative System 9 L1, L2, L3,

L4
Need for hybrid and electric vehicles –main components and working
principles of a hybrid and electric vehicles, Different configurations of
hybrid and electric vehicles. Comparative study of diesel, petrol, hybrid and
electric Vehicles. Advantages and Limitations of hybrid and electric
Vehicles. Case study on specification of electric and hybrid vehicles.

Online References:
S. Website Name URL Modules Covered
No.

1 www.nptel.ac.i https://nptel.ac.in M1- M6

n

Books and References:

SN Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

1 Electric and Hybrid Vehicles Iqbal Husain Design 3rd Edition 2003
Fundamentals
CRC Press

2 Modern Electric, Hybrid Mehrdad Ehsani CRC Press 5th Edition 2005
Electric and Fuel Cell
Vehicles

3 Automobile Engineering, Kirpal Singh Standard 5th Edition 2018

Vol I & II publishes
Distributor
s

4 Automobile Mechanics N. K. Giri Khanna 8thEdition 2016

Publishers

5 Bosch Automotive Hand SAE SAE 6thEdition 2019

Book Publications
 B.E. Semester –VII (Mechanical Engineering)
Proposed Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development(CBCGS- H 2019)
Under TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)
B.E. Course B.E. Department Elective SEM: VII
Course Name: Composite Materials & Nano Materials Course Code:PEC-ME7021
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory(100) Practical/Oral Term Work Total
(20) (20)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR/ OR TW
Hours
3 - 2@ 5 4 25 75 25 25 150

IA: In-Semester Assessment- Paper Duration-1 .5 Hours ESE :

End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: Material Science, Basics of Mechanical Engineering subjects

Course Objectives:

Course intend to provide an exposure to explain the behavior of constituents in the composite materials.
Enlighten the students in different types of reinforcement also Develop the student's skills in understanding the
different manufacturing methods available for composite material.

Course Outcomes:

SN Course Cognitive levels as per

Outcomes bloom’s
Taxonomy
Identify the properties of fiber and matrix materials used in L1, L2
1 composites.
2 Select an appropriate manufacturing process for composite L2, L3

parts.

Analyze fiber composites based on the constituent properties.

3 L2, L3, L4

Create and design engineering structures with fiber reinforced -

4 L4
composites.
Detailed Syllabus:

Module No. Topics Hrs. Cognitive levels

as per
bloom’s Taxonomy
Introduction to Composites

1 Types of composite materials, general 10

characteristics of composite materials, applications
L1
of composites, material selection process
Constituents of Composite Materials
Reinforcement and fillers: glass fibers, carbon fibers, organic
2 5
fibers, boron fibers, natural fibers, ceramic fibers Matrix:
thermoset matrix and thermoplastic matrix, metal matrix L1, L2
materials, ceramic matrix materials
Manufacturing of Composites, Mechanics of Fiber
Reinforced Composite Materials
3 Bag-molding, compression molding, pultrusion, 9
filament winding, liquid composite molding, metal L1, L2, L3, L4
matrix composite manufacturing, ceramic matrix
composite manufacturing, selection of
manufacturing method, Fiber matrix interaction,
micromechanics of composite materials, Laminate
Analysis, Failure theories for composite materials
Characterization of Fiber Reinforced Composite Materials
Static mechanical properties, fatigue properties,
4 5
impact properties, methods of characterization of
L1, L2, L3, L4
fiber-matrix interphase, quality inspection
methods, different ASTM standards
Fracture and Fatigue of Fiber Reinforced Composite
Materials
5 Failure of composites, fracture process in 5
composites, modes of fracture, composite damage L1, L2, L3, L4
mechanics, S-N diagram for composite materials

Polymeric Nanocomposite Materials

Introduction to nanomaterials, nanoplatelet
6 L4, L5
/nanoparticles/nanofibers reinforced composites,
5
CNT reinforced composites, challenges in
processing of nanocomposites.
Books and References:

Text Books
1. P.K. Mallick, Fiber-Reinforced Composites: Materials, Manufacturing, and Design, CRC Press, Third
Edition, 2007
2. K. K. Chawla, Composite Materials: Science and Engineering, Springer, Third Edition, 2012

Recommended Reading
1. Bryan Harris, Engineering Composite Materials, The Institute of Materials, Landon
2. Hussain, Farzana, et al., Review article: polymer-matrix nanocomposites, processing, manufacturing,
and application: an overview. Journal of composite materials 40.17, 2006: 1511-1575
3. M. Ashby, Material Selection in Mechanical Design, Elsevier, Fourth Edition, 2010
 B.E. Semester –VII (Mechanical Engineering)
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development(CBCGS- H 2019)
Under TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)
B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) B.E. SEM: VII
Course Name: Computational Fluid Dynamics Course Code: PEC-ME7014
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total
Week (100) (20) (20)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR/ OR TW
Hours
150
3 - 2@ 5 4 25 75 25 25

IA:In-Semester Assessment- Paper Duration-1 .5Hours

ESE : End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%),
Timely completion of practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: Heat Transfer, Fluid Mechanics

Course Objectives:

Course intent to analyze methodologies used in CFD and Develop computer codes for simulation of heat
transfer and fluid flow problems.

Course Outcomes:

SN Course Outcomes Cognitive levels as

per bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Demonstrate methodology to work with CFD L1, L2

2 Illustrate principles of grid generation and discritisation methods

L1, L2
3 Identify and apply specific boundary conditions relevant to specific application
L1, L2, L3
4 Decide solution parameters relevant to specific application
L1, L2, L3
5 Analyze the results and draw the appropriate inferences L1, L2
6 Demonstrate basic principles of FVM L1, L2
Detailed Syllabus:

Module Topics Hrs. Cognitive

No. levels as per
bloom’s
Taxonomy
Introduction: What is CFD, Scope and Application of CFD, Methods of
Predictions like Experimental and theoretical, Working of Commercial CFD L1, L2
1 Software, Solution methodology-Preprocessing, Solver, Post processing.
4
Mathematical description of Physical Phenomenon
Governing Differential Equations, Meaning of Differential equation, The
2 Continuity Equation, A Momentum equation, The Energy Equation, The L1, L2
General Differential Equation, Boundary Conditions, Initial and Boundary 8
Conditions, Initial and Boundary Value problems
Grid Generation and Discretization Methods:
Structured and unstructured Grids: O-type, H-type, C-type of Structured Grid
Generation, Mesh Adaptation.
The Nature of Numerical Methods: The Discritization Concept, The Structure 10 L1, L2, L3
3 of the Discritization Equation.
Basic discretization techniques applied to model equations and systems of
equations: finite difference, finite volume and finite element methods.
Methods of Deriving the Discretization Equations, Taylor-Series
Formulation, Variational Formulation, Method of Weighted Residuals,
Control Volume Formulation
Heat Conduction, Convection and Diffusion
Steady One-dimensional Conduction, Unsteady One-dimensional Conduction,
4 Two and Three-dimensional Situations, Over relaxation and Under relaxation,
Steady One-dimensional and 9Two Dimensional Convection-Diffusion, 8 L1, L2, L3
Unsteady One-dimensional Convection.
Incompressible Fluid Flow
Governing Equations, Stream Function-Vorticity Method, Determination of
5 4 L1, L2
Pressure for Viscous Flow, The SIMPLE, SIMPLER Algorithm, Introduction
to Turbulence Modeling, Basic Theories of Turbulence, The Time-Averaged
Equations for Turbulent Flow
6 Finite Volume Methods
FVM solutions to steady one, two and three dimensional diffusion problems
and unsteady one and two dimensional diffusion problems, FVM solutions to L1, L2
7
convection-diffusion problems - one and two dimensional, steady and
unsteady; Advection schemes; Pressure velocity coupling
Books and References:

Sr.No. Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

An introduction to
computational fluid Versteeg.H.K Malalasekera.W.,
1 dynamics-The Prentice Hall - --
finite volume -
method
Computational Anderson, D.A., Tannehill, Hemishphere
Fluid Mechanics I.I., and Pletcher, R.H., Publishing
2 and Heat Transfer. Corporation -- --
Introduction to
3 Computational Niyogi P. ,Laha M.K., Pearson Education -- --
Fluid Dynamics Chakrabarty S.K

Online References:

Sr.No. Website Name URL Modules

Covered
1 https://nptel.ac.in https://nptel.ac.in/courses/113106032/ M1-M6
 B.E. Semester –VII (Mechanical Engineering)
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development(CBCGS- H 2019)
Under TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)

B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) S.E. SEM: VII

Course Name: ADDITIVE
MANUFACTURING Course Code: PEC-ME7023

Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)

Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Theory Practical/Oral TermWork
Hours Per Week Total
(100) (25) (25)
Contact
Theory Tutorial Practical Credits IA ESE PR/OR TW
Hours

3 - 2@ 5 4 25 75 25 25 150
@-Professional Elective Courses Lab will be conducted in the form Capstone Project
IA:In-Semester Assessment - Paper Duration – 1.5 Hours
ESE : End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: Basic Engineering science, Design and manufacturing process

Course Objectives:

Course intends to provide the student with a background in the engineering science that applies to additive
manufacturing (also known as 3D printing), from part design through additive processes, to properties and
component performance. :
Sr Course Outcomes Cognitive levels as
No per bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Explain the working process and technology development of
L1, L2, L3
Additive Manufacturing.
2 Explore Material Science and Design Aspects in Additive Manufacturing
L1, L2, L3
3 Compare and distinguish various additive manufacturing processes.
L1, L2, L3
4 Compare and recommend suitable additive manufacturing process for a given L1, L2, L3
material and application.
5 Evaluating the techniques involved in AM L1, L2, L3,L4
6 Understand Rapid Prototype Tooling and various industrial applications L1, L2, L3,L4
Detailed Syllabus:
Module Topics Hrs Cognitive
No. levels as per
bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Introduction: 08
Need, Fundamentals of Additive and digital Manufacturing, Advantages and L1, L2, L3
Applications,
Additive Manufacturing (AM) process chain: 3D model, converts in to STL
file, transfer to system, checking, machine setup and building, Post process;
Classification of AM process, Software for AM. Introduction to Reverse
Engineering
2 Material Science Aspects in Additive Manufacturing 08
L1, L2,
Different materials used in AM, Use of multiple materials, multifunctional and
L3,L4
graded materials in AM, Role of cooling rate.
Design for additive manufacturing:
Design for Manufacturing and Assembly, AM Unique Capabilities, Core
DFAM Concepts and Objectives, CAD Tools for AM.
3 Liquid based processes 07
L1, L2, L3
Photo polymerization, principle and working of stereo lithography
apparatus, scanning techniques, curing processes, typical materials and
applications.

4 Solid based systems: 07 L1, L2, L3

Fused deposition modeling: Process, Machine setup, Process parameters,
materials, strength and weakness, Applications. Case studies.
Laminated object manufacturing: Process, Process parameters, Machine setup
and materials used, Strength and weakness, Applications. Case studies. Kira’s
Paper laminated technology
5 Powder based processes 07 L1, L2, L3
Powder fusion mechanism, powder handling and recycling, Principle and
working of Selective Laser Sintering, Laser Engineering Net Shaping
process, Electron Beam Melting, process parameters, typical materials and
applications
6 Rapid prototyping applications: 08 L1, L2,
Rapid Tooling: Conventional and Rapid tooling, Need for RT, classification of L3,L4
RT.
Application-Material relationship, Patterns for investment and sand casting,
Application in design, Aerospace, Engineering analysis and planning, Jewelry
design, Shoe and Coin industry.
Medical and Bio-engineering applications, Forensic science, Anthropology,
Defence and Automobile.
 Books and References:

SR
N Title Authors Publisher Edition Year
Additive Manufacturing 2nd
Technologies Ian Gibson, David Springer Edition 2010
1
Rosen, Brent Stucker

Additive Manufacturing CRC Press 2015

Amit
2 Bandyopadhyay,
Susmita Bose
Rapid Prototyping – C. K. Chua, K. F. World 3rd Edition 2010
3
Principles and Applications Leong, C. S. Lim Scientific
Rapid prototyping and Paul F. Jacobs 1996
manufacturing ASME press
4
5 Rapid tooling: 2000
Technologies and industrial CRC Press
Applications

Online Refrences:

Sr.
No. Website Name URL Modules Covered
https://www.coursera.org/courses?query=3d%20printing
1 https://www.courser M3, M4, M5
a.org
https://3dprint.com/222561/mit-online-3d-printing-course/
2 https://3dprint.com M3, M4, M5
https://nptel.ac.in/noc/courses/noc20/SEM2/noc20-mg70/
3 https://nptel.ac.in M1,M2

Capstone Project:

The capstone will integrate the learning acquired from the the above courses in the 3D Printing Specialization through a hands-on project.
This project will enable you to turn an idea into an object using the knowledge and skills acquired through the other courses. Specifically,
students will be guided through a step-by-step process in which students imagine, design, make, and share a 3D printed object. Thus,
through this capstone, students will be able to put course concepts into action and utilize the skills that students have acquired throughout
the Specialization. In addition, students will be able to obtain an actual 3D print of the object.

1. Significance of 3D printing that how changing the world of manufacturing and product development.

2. Challenges and problems Solving with 3D Printing

3. Design and Development: Creation of ideas and explore those ideas further though DFAM (Design for Additive Manufacturing).

4. Process and Production: Identification and selection of appropriate materials, Process and equipments for production
 B.E. Semester –VII (Mechanical Engineering)
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development(CBCGS- H 2019)
Under TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)
B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) B.E. SEM: VII
Course Name: Automation and Smart Manufacturing Course Code: PEC -ME 7024
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total
(100) (25) (25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR TW
Hours
3 - 2@ 5 4 25 75 25 25 150

IA:In-Semester Assessment - Paper Duration – 1.5 Hours

ESE : End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: Knowledge of Automation, Mechatronic Systems

Course Objectives:
Course intended to deliver the knowledge of advances of automation in manufacturing.
Course Outcomes:

SN Course Outcomes Cognitive levels as

per bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Able to explain automated manufacturing systems. L1, L2
2 Able to select smart sensor for suitable applications. L1, L2, L3

3 Able to select expert system for part classification and coding. L1, L2, L3, L4
4 Able to apply internet of things to suitable manufacturing application L1, L2, L3
5 Able to explain Big Data Analytics (BDA) terminology L1, L2, L3, L4
6 Able to define cloud models for cloud manufacturing L1, L2, L3, L4
Detailed Syllabus:

Module Topics Hrs. Cognitive

No. levels as
per bloom’s
Taxonomy
Automation in Manufacturing
1 Introduction, Automated Manufacturing Systems, Elements of Automated 6 L1, L2
Systems, Advanced Automation Function, Types & Levels of Automation
Smart Sensors
2.1 Smart sensors: Introduction, Primary Sensors, Excitation, Amplification,
Filters, Converters, Compensation, Information Coding/Processing, Data 8
2 Communication, Standards for Smart Sensor Interface, the Automation. L1, L2, L3
2.2 Sensors Applications: Introduction, On-board Automobile Sensors
(Automotive Sensors), Home Appliance Sensors, Aerospace Sensors, Sensors
for Manufacturing, Sensors for environmental Monitoring.
Expert Systems in Manufacturing: Computer Aided Process Planning &
Group Technology
3.1 Computer Aided Process Planning: Types, benefits, LISP, PROLOG L1, L2, L3,
3 9 L4
3.2 Group Technology (GT): Part families, Parts classification and coding,
Production flow analysis, Machine cell design, Benefits of group technology,
PLM for GT
Internet of Things (IoT)
4.1 Introduction to Internet of Things – Definition, Characteristics, Physical
4 Design, Logical Design, Functional Blocks 10 L1, L2, L3
4.2 Industrial Internet of Things, Mechanical Specific Applications, Challenges
in IoT implementation
Big Data Analytics
5.1 Introduction to Big Data – Definition, Characteristics of Big Data, Need
5 of Big Data, Challenges of Big Data, Big data environment & its difference L1, L2, L3,
from data environment 8
L4
5.2 Big Data Analytics – Introduction, Characteristics & need, Classification
of Big Data Analytics, Big data analytics terminology, importance and
challenges of Big data analytics, BDA for manufacturing
Cloud Manufacturing
6.1 Introduction to cloud computing: Definition, private, public & hybrid 4 L1, L2, L3,
6 cloud, cloud models, Benefits and challenges of cloud computing L4
6.2 Cloud architecture: Benefits and challenges, Cloud application
architecture, Cloud infrastructure and technology, Cloud manufacturing
Books and References:

SN Title Autho Publisher Edition Year

rs
1 Automation Production Mikell P. Groove Prentice -- 2008
Systems and Computer Hall of
Integrated India
Manufacturing
2 Understanding Smart Randy Frank Tata 2nd Edition 2000
Sensors McGraw-
Hill
Education
3 Sensors and Actuators Patranabis Prentice Hall 2nd Edition 2013
of India
4 CAD-CAM-CIM P. Radhakrishnan, New Age 2nd Edition 2008
S. Subramanyan, International
V. Raju (P) Ltd.
5 The Internet of Things: Pethuru Raj and CRC Press -- 2017
Enabling Technologies, Anupama C. Raman
platforms and Use Cases
6 Big Data, Big Michael Minelli, Wiley -- 2013
Analytics: Michele Chambers, Publication
Emerging Business Ambiga Dhiraj
Intelligence and
Analytic Trends for
Today's Businesses
7 Mastering Cloud Rajkumar Buyya Mc Graw Hill -- 2013
Computing Education

Online References:

Sr.No. Website Name URL Modules

Covered
1 https://nptel.ac.in https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106/105/1061051 M4
66/
2 https://nptel.ac.in https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106/104/1061041 M5
89/
 B.E. Semester–VII
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)
B.E. Course B.E. Open Elective SEM : VII
Course Name : Management Information System Course Code: OEC- 7011
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/O Term Work Total
(100) ral (25)
(25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credit IA ESE PR/ TW
Hours s OR
100
-
3 - - 3 3 25 75 -
IA: In-Semester Assessment - Paper Duration – 1 Hour
ESE: End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3
Hours
Prerequisite: Database Design and Management

Course Objective: The course intends to deliver the role of Management in Information Systems to understand the impact of
these systems within an Organization to improve business performance and decision making. It analyzes typical functional
information systems, principal tools and technologies for accessing information from databases & interpreting Ethical issues
& Privacy for the same.
Course Outcomes :Upon completion of the course students will be able to:

Cognitive levels of
Sr. Course Outcomes attainment as per
No. Bloom’s
Taxonomy

1 Explain how information systems Transform Business L1, L2

2 Understand about Data and Knowledge Management L1, L2, L3
3 Analyze the Ethical issues and Privacy in Information Systems L1, L2, L3, L4
4 Understand the principal tools and technologies for accessing information from L1, L2, L3
databases to improve business performance and decision making

5 Analyze the types of systems used for enterprise-wide knowledge management and L1, L2, L3, L4
how they provide value for businesses

6 Analyze the impact of information systems have on an organization L1, L2, L3, L4
 Detailed Syllabus:
Module Topics Hrs Cognitive levels of
No. attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
Introduction To Information Systems (IS)
1 Computer Based Information Systems, Impact of IT on organizations, L1, L2
Importance of IS to Society. Organizational Strategy, Competitive Advantages 4
and IS
Data and Knowledge Management
2 Database Approach, Big Data, Data warehouse and Data Marts, Knowledge L1, L2, L3
Management Business intelligence (BI): Managers and Decision Making, BI for 7
Data analysis and Presenting Results
Ethical issues and Privacy
Information Security. Threat to IS, and Security Controls 7 L1, L2, L3, L4
3
Social Computing (SC)
4 Web 2.0 and 3.0, SC in business-shopping, Marketing, Operational and 7 L1, L2, L3
Analytic CRM, E-business and E-commerce – B2B B2C. Mobile
commerce.
Wired and Wireless Technology
Computer Networks Wired and Wireless Technology, Pervasive L1, L2, L3, L4
5 computing, Cloud computing model. 6
Information System within Organization
6 Transaction Processing Systems, Functional Area Information System, ERP and L1, L2, L3, L4
ERP support of Business Process. Acquiring Information Systems and 8
Applications: Various System development life cycle models
Total Hours 39
Books and References:

Sr. Title Author Publisher Edition Yea

No. s r
1. Management Information Systems Kelly Rainer, Brad Prince Wiley Sixth Edition 2011
2. Management Information Systems K.C. Laudon and J.P. Prentice Hall Tenth 2007
Laudon Edition
Online References:

Sr. Website Name URL Modules

No. Covered
1. https://www.tutorialspoint.co https://www.tutorialspoint.com/management_information_system/ M1
m/index.htm
2. https://www.tutorialspoint.co https://www.tutorialspoint.com/management_information_system/informat M2
m/index.htm i on_need_objective.htm
3. https://www.tutorialspoint.co https://www.tutorialspoint.com/management_information_system/mis_secu M3
m/index.htm rity_and_ethical_issues.htm
4. https://www.tutorialspoint.co https://www.tutorialspoint.com/management_information_system/system_ M4
m/index.htm d evelopment_life_cycle.htm
5. https://pressbooks.com/ https://bus206.pressbooks.com/chapter/chapter-13-future-trends- M5
in- information-systems/
6. https://www.tutorialspoint. https://www.tutorialspoint.com/management_information_system/business M6
co m/index.htm _continuity_planning.htm
 B.E. Semester –VII
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS-H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)
B.E. Course B.E. Open Elective (SEM :
VII)
Course Name: Human Resource Management Course Code: OEC- 7012

Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme Formative/Summative)

Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation

Hours Per Theory Practical/Or Term Total
Week (100) al (25) Work
(25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credit IA ESE PR TW
Hours 100
3 - - 3 3 25 75 - - - -

IA: In-Semester Assessment - Paper Duration – 1.5

Hours ESE: End Semester Examination - Paper
Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance / Learning Attitude (20%)
Pre-requisite: The course does not have any pre-requisites.

Course Objective:

The course intends to deliver basic concept, techniques and practices of the human resource Management. The
course also gives opportunity of learning Human resource management (HRM) processes, related with the
functions, and challenges in the emerging perspective of today‘s organizations, also helps student to acquaint the
importance of inter-personal & inter-group behavioral skills in an organizational setting required for future stable
engineers, leaders and managers.

Course Outcomes: Upon Completion of Course student will be able to:

SN Course Outcomes Cognitive

levels
of attainment
1 Understand the concepts, aspects, techniques and practices of the human resource management. L1,L2
2 Understand the Human resource management (HRM) processes, functions, changes and challenges L1,L2
in today‘s emerging organizational perspective.
3 Gain knowledge about the latest developments and trends in HRM. L1,L2,L3
4 Understand the Training and development process in HRM L1,L2,L3
5 Applying Leadership and Decision Making qualities L1,L2,L3,L4

6 Apply the knowledge of behavioral skills learnt and integrate it with in inter personal and Inter group L1,L2,L3,L4
environment emerging as future stable engineers and managers.
Detailed Syllabus:

Module Topics Hrs. Cognitive

No. levels of
attainment
1 Human Resource Management development 05 L1,L2

Human Resource Management- Concept, Scope and Importance, Interdisciplinary

Approach Relationship with other Sciences, Competencies of HR Manager, HRM
functions.

Human resource development (HRD): changing role of HRM – Human

resource Planning, Technological change, Restructuring and rightsizing,
Empowerment, TQM, Managing ethical issues.

2 Organizational Behaviour (OB) 06 L1,L2

Introduction to OB Origin, Nature and Scope of Organizational Behaviour,

Relevance to Organizational Effectiveness and Contemporary issues.

Personality: Meaning and Determinants of Personality, Personality development,

Personality Types, Assessment of Personality Traits for Increasing Self
Awareness.
Perception: Attitude and Value, Effect of perception on Individual Decision-
making, Attitude and Behaviour.

Motivation: Theories of Motivation and their Applications for Behavioural

Change (Maslow, Herzberg, McGregor).

Group Behaviour and Group Dynamics: Work groups formal and informal groups
and stages of group development, Team Effectiveness: High performing teams,
Team Roles, cross functional and self-directed team.

Case study.

3 Organizational Structure & Design 06 L1,L2,L3

Structure, size, technology, Environment of organization; Organizational Roles &

conflicts: Concept of roles; role dynamics; role conflicts and stress.

Leadership: Concepts and skills of leadership, Leadership and managerial roles,

Leadership styles and contemporary issues in leadership.

Power and Politics: Sources and uses of power; Politics at workplace, Tactics and
strategies.
 4 Human resource Planning 06 L1,L2,L3

Recruitment and Selection process, Job-enrichment, Empowerment - Job-

Satisfaction, employee morale.
Performance Appraisal Systems: Traditional & modern methods, Performance
Counseling, Career Planning.
Training & Development: Identification of Training Needs, Training Methods.
5 Emerging Trends in HR 07 L1,L2,L3,L4
Organizational development; Business Process Re-engineering (BPR), BPR as a
tool for organizational development, managing processes & transformation in HR.
Organizational Change, Culture, Environment.
Cross Cultural Leadership and Decision Making: Cross Cultural
Communication and diversity at work, Causes of diversity, managing diversity
with special reference to handicapped, women and ageing people, intra company
cultural difference in employee motivation.
6 HR&MS 9 L1,L2,L3,L4
HR & MIS: Need, purpose, objective and role of information system in HR,
Applications in HRD in various industries (e.g. manufacturing R&D, Public
Transport, Hospitals, Hotels and service industries.

Strategic HRM: Role of Strategic HRM in the modern business world, Concept
of Strategy, Strategic Management Process, Approaches to Strategic Decision
Making; Strategic Intent – Corporate Mission, Vision, Objectives and Goals.
Labor Laws & Industrial Relations: Evolution of IR, IR issues in organizations,
Overview of Labor Laws in India; Industrial Disputes Act, Trade Unions Act,
Shops and Establishments Act.
Total 39
Books & References:

Sr. Title Authors Publisher Edition Yea

No r
1 Organizational Behavior Stephen Robbins, Excel 16th Ed 2013
publishing
2 Human Resource Management V S P Rao, Excel 3rd Ed 2010
publishing
3 Human resource management Aswathapa, Text & 6th Ed, 2011
cases
4 Dynamics of Industrial Relations in India C. B. Mamoria Himalaya 15th Ed 2015
and S V Gankar, Publishing,

5 Essentials of Human Resource P. Subba Rao, Himalaya 5th Ed 2013

management and Industrial relations Publishing,
 6 Management & Laurie Mullins Himalaya Latest Ed 2016
Organizational Behavior Publishing
,

Online References:

S. Website Name URL Modules

No Covered

1 NPTEL https://nptel.ac.in/courses/110105069/ M1,M2,M3

2 COURSE ERA https://www.coursera.org/specializations/human- resource- M4,M5

management

3 SWAYAM https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc19_mg51/preview M1,M2,M5,M6

 B.E. Semester –VII
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)
B.E. Course B.E. Open Elective (SEM : VII)
Course Name: Design Thinking and Problem-Solving Skills Course Code: OEC- 7013
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Total
(100) (25) Work (25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR/OR TW
Hours
- - 100
3 - - 3 3 25 75
IA: In-Semester Assessment- Paper Duration – 1.5 Hours
ESE : End Semester Examination- Paper Duration - 3 Hours
Prerequisite: Not Required

Course Objective: To inculcate interdisciplinary engineering skills in students for taking real time engineering problem
available in our society/industry and to come-up with the grass root innovation, can be helpful to all level of human
beings.

Course Outcomes: Upon completion of the course students will be able to:

Sr. No. Course Outcomes Cognitive levels of

attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
1 Understand the importance of Design Thinking and Apply design thinking for L1,L2
product development
2 Evaluate the quality of your information and your emotions; keep thinking L1,L2,L3,L4
Straight and use design thinking tools

3 Identify skills and personality traits of successful problem solving. L1,L2,L3,L4

4 Apply standard problem-solving heuristics to aid in problem solving. L1,L2,L3,L4,L5,L6

5 Apply design thinking to improve on existing products in IT L1,L2,L3,L4,L5,L6
6 Formulate and successfully communicate the solutions to problems. L1,L2,L3,L4,L5,L6
Detailed Syllabus:

Module Topics Hrs. Cognitive levels of

No. attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
1 Design Thinking Introduction, Team Formation, Documentation 7 L1,L2
and Canvas
roduction, Need of Design Thinking, Traditional Problem Solving versus
Design Thinking, phases of Design Thinking, Tools for Design
Thinking, Relevance of Design and Design Thinking in Engineering,
Team Formation, Documentation and Canvas Team Building Domain
Selection (Society/Industry project), Log Books-need, types of log
book, preparation of log book, Importance of Documentation, Strategy
Design
2 Design Thinking Exercise 8 L1,L2,L3,L4
Formation of Team and aspects for the selection, Domain selection,
Observation exercise, Design activities through Canvas, Brainstorming
for the problem, Users Interview conduction, generation of records via
logbooks
3 Problem Solving Skills Introduction 8 L1,L2,L3,,L4
Developing logical thinking. Introduction to Problem Solving in
Computer Science domain, Errors in reasoning; verbal reasoning;
analogy problems lateral thinking, Problem Solving Techniques
Deductive and hypothetical reasoning; computational problem solving;
generating, implementing, and evaluating solutions; interpersonal
problem solving, Group Activities based assignments related to problem
solving skills will be given for better
understanding and development of problem solving skills
Tools for Design Thinking 7 L1,L2,L3,L4,L5,L6
4 Theory and practice in Design thinking – Exploring work of Designers
across globe – MVP or Prototyping ,Real-Time design interaction capture
and analysis – Enabling efficient collaboration in digital space – Empathy
for design – Collaboration in distributed Design
Design Thinking in IT 7 L1,L2,L3,L4,L5,L6
Design Thinking to Business Process modeling – Agile in Virtual
collaboration environment – Scenario based Prototyping
5
Design Thinking For strategic innovations 8 L1,L2,L3,L4,L5,L6
6 DT For strategic innovations – Growth – Story telling - Predictability –
Strategic Foresight - Change – Sense Making - Maintenance Relevance
– Value redefinition - Extreme Competition – experience
design - Standardization – Humanization - Creative Culture – Rapid
prototyping, Strategy and Organization – Business Model design.
Total Hours 45
Books and References:

Sr. Title Authors Publisher Editio Year

No n
1 Strategies for Creative Problem Solving H. S. Fogler and Pearson, Secon 2008
S. E. LeBlanc d

2 Problem Solving & Comprehension A. Whimbey and Lawrence Sixth 1999

J. Lochhead Erlbaum,
Mahwah,
3 The Design of Business: Why Design Roger Martin Harvard First 2009
Thinking is the Next Competitive Business Press
Advantage
4 Design Thinking: Understand – Improve – Hasso Plattner, Springer, 2011 First 2011
Apply Christoph (Unit III)

5 Design Thinking for Strategic Innovation: Idris Mootee John Wiley & First 2013
What They Can't Teach You at Business Sons 2013
or Design School. (Unit IV).
6 Effective Problem Solving M. Levine Prentice Hall Secon 1994
d

Online References:

Sr. Website Name URL Modules Covered

No.
1 https://www.coursera. https://www.coursera.org/learn/uva-darden-design- M1,M2,M3,
org thinkinginnovation
2 http://www.cs.odu.ed http://www.cs.odu.edu/~cs381/cs381content/proble M4,M5,M6
u m_solving/proble
m_solving.html
3 https://www.cs.vt.edu https://www.cs.vt.edu/undergraduate/courses/CS21 M1,M2,M3,M4,M5,M6
04
4 https://ryanstutorials.n https://ryanstutorials.net/problem-solving-skills/ M3,M4
et
5 https://dschool.stanfor https://dschool.stanford.edu/.../designresources/.../ M1,M2,M3,M5
d.edu ModeGuideBOOTCAMP2010L.pdf
6 https://dschool.stanfor https://dschool.stanford.edu/use-our-methods/ M4,M5,M6
d.edu
7 https://www.interactio https://www.interaction- M1,M2,M5,M6
n-design.org design.org/literature/article/5-stages-in-the-design-
thinking-process
8 http://www.creativity http://www.creativityatwork.com/design-thinking- M1,M2,M5,M6
atwork.com strategy-for-innovation/
49
9 https://www.nngroup. https://www.nngroup.com/articles/design-thinking/ M1,M2,M3,M4,M6
com
10 www.designthinkingf www.designthinkingformobility.org/wp- M4,M5,M6
ormobility.org content/.../10/NapkinPitch_Worksheet.pdf
 B.E. SEMESTER -VII
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)

B.E. Course B.E. Open Elective

(SEM: VII)
Course Name: Disaster Management and Mitigation Measures Course Code: OEC- 7014
Contact Hours Per Week: 03 Credit: 03
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme Formative/Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Total
(100) (25) Work
(25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR Tutorial
Hours 100
- -
3 - - 3 3 25 75
- -
IA: Mid Semester Examination- Paper Duration – 1Hours ESE :
Semester End Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for evaluation of Theory: Formative Evaluation (40%) and is conducted in 5 th and 11th week
through online questions using Google Docs/test in the lab.
Prerequisite:

Course Objectives:

Main objective of the subject is to understand causes of different types of disasters, mitigation /rehabilitation measures and
existing government policies and agencies.

Course Outcomes:

SN Course Outcomes Cognitive levels as per bloom’s

taxonomy
1 Get to know natural as well as manmade disaster and their extent and possible L1, L2,L3
effects on the economy.
2 Plan of national importance structures based upon the previous history. L1, L2,L3

3 Get acquainted with government policies, acts and various L1, L2,L3
organizational structure associated
4 Get to know the simple do‘s and don‘ts in such extreme events and L1, L2,L3
act accordingly.
Detailed Syllabus:

Module Topics Hrs. Cognitive

No. levels as per
bloom’s
taxonomy
1 Introduction
Definition of Disaster, hazard, global and Indian scenario, general perspective,
importance of study in human life, Direct and indirect effects of disasters, long term 03 L1, L2,L3
effects of disasters. Introduction to global warming and climate change
2 Natural Disaster and Manmade disasters
Natural Disaster: Meaning and nature of natural disaster, Flood, Flash flood, drought,
cloud burst, Earthquake, Landslides, Avalanches, Volcanic eruptions,
Mudflow, Cyclone, Storm, Storm Surge, climate change, global warming, sea level rise, 07 L1, L2,L3
ozone depletion, Manmade Disasters: Chemical, Industrial, Nuclear and Fire Hazards.
Role of growing population and subsequent industrialization, urbanization and changing
lifestyle of human beings in frequent occurrences of manmade disasters
3 Disaster Management, Policy and Administration

Disaster management: meaning, concept, importance, objective of disaster

management policy, disaster risks in India, Paradigm shift in disaster management
Policy and administration: 06 L1, L2,L3
Importance and principles of disaster management policies, command and co-ordination
of in disaster management, rescue operations-how to start with and how to proceed in
due course of time, study of flowchart showing the entire process.
4 Institutional Framework for Disaster Management in India

Importance of public awareness, Preparation and execution of emergency management

program. Scope and responsibilities of National Institute of Disaster Management (NIDM)
and National disaster management authority (NDMA) in India. Methods and measures to
avoid disasters, Management of casualties, set up of 07 L1, L2,L3
emergency facilities, importance of effective communication amongst different agencies
in such situations. Use of Internet and softwares for effective disaster management.
Applications of GIS, Remote sensing and GPS in this regard.
5 Financing Relief Measures

Ways to raise finance for relief expenditure, role of government agencies and NGO‘s in
this process, Legal aspects related to finance raising as well as overall management of
disasters. Various NGO‘s and the works they have carried out in the past on the occurrence 10 L1, L2,L3
of various disasters, Ways to approach these teams. International relief aid agencies and
their role in extreme events
6 Preventive and Mitigation Measures
Pre-disaster, during disaster and post-disaster measures in some events in general.
Structural mapping: Risk mapping, assessment and analysis, sea walls and embankments,
Bio shield, shelters, early warning and communication. Non Structural Mitigation:
Community based disaster preparedness, risk transfer and risk financing, capacity 06 L1, L2,L3
development and training, awareness and education, contingency plans. Do‘s and don‘ts
in case of disasters and effective implementation of relief aids.

Total 39
Books & References:

SN Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

1 Disaster Management
Harsh K.Gupta Universities Press 2003
Publications
-
2 Disaster Management: An
Appraisal of Institutional O.S.Dagur Centre for land warfare - 2011
Mechanisms in India studies

3 Introduction to International Butterworth

Disaster Management -
Damon Copolla 2006
Heinemann Elsevier
Publications

4 Disaster Management Handbook CRC Press Taylor and

Jack Pinkowski - 2008
Francis group
5 Disaster management & Rajdeep
rehabilitation Mittal Publications - 2007
Dasgupta
6 Natural Hazards and Disaster Rawat Publications
Management, Vulnerability and R B Singh - 2006
Mitigation
7 Concepts and Techniques of GIS Prentice Hall (India)
C.P. Lo Albert, Publications. - 2006
K.W. Yonng
 B.E. Semester –VII
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)

B. E. Course B.E. Open Elective SEM: VII

Course Name: Research Methodology Course Code: OEC- 7015
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/ Term Work Total
(100) Oral (25) (50)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR/O TW
Hours R
3 - - 3 3 25 75 - - 100

IA: In-Semester Assessment - Paper Duration –1.5 Hours

ESE: End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely completion
of practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: Basics of Statistics

Course Objective: The objective of this course is to make students understand research problem formulation and analyze
research related information.

Course Outcomes: Upon completion of the course students will be able to:

Cognitive levels
S. No. Course Outcomes of attainment as
per Bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Understand research problem formulation.
L1, L2, L3
2 Analyze research related information
L1, L2, L3, L4
3 Follow research ethics L1, L2, L3
4 Understand that today’s world is controlled by Computer, Information Technology,
but tomorrow world will be ruled by ideas, concept, and creativity. L1, L2, L3
5 Understanding that when IPR would take such important place in growth of L1, L2, L3
individuals & nation, it is needless to emphasis the need of information about
Intellectual Property Right to be promoted among students in general & engineering
in particular.
6 Understand that IPR protection provides an incentive to inventors for further research L1, L2, L3
work and investment in R & D, which leads to creation of new and better products,
and in turn brings about, economic growth and social benefits.
Detailed Syllabus:
Cognitive levels as
Module Topics Hrs. per bloom’s
No. Taxonomy
Foundations of Research: Meaning, Objectives, Motivation, Utility.
Concept of theory, empiricism, deductive and inductive theory. L1, L2, L3
1 Characteristics of scientific method – Understanding the language of 4
research – Concept, Construct, Definition, Variable. Research Process
2 Problem Identification & Formulation – Research Question –
Investigation Question – Measurement Issues – Hypothesis – Qualities 4 L1, L2, L3, L4
of a good Hypothesis –Null Hypothesis & Alternative Hypothesis.
Hypothesis Testing – Logic & Importance
Research Design: Concept and Importance in Research – Features of a L1, L2, L3
3 good research design – Exploratory Research Design – concept, types 4
and uses, Descriptive Research Designs – concept, types and uses.
Experimental Design: Concept of Independent & Dependent variables
Qualitative and Quantitative Research: Qualitative research –
Quantitative research – Concept of measurement, causality, 4 L1, L2, L3
4 generalization, replication. Merging the two approaches.
Interpretation of Data and Paper Writing – Layout of a Research Paper, L1, L2, L3
5 Journals in Computer Science, Impact factor of Journals, When and 4
where to publish ? Ethical issues related to publishing, Plagiarism and
Self-Plagiarism.
Use of tools / techniques for Research: methods to search required
4 L1, L2, L3
6 information effectively, Reference Management Software like
Zotero/Mendeley, Software for paper formatting like LaTeX/MS Office,
Software for detection of Plagiarism

Books and References:

S. No. Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

1 Research methodology: an Stuart Melville and Wayne Juta Academic 1st edition 1996
introduction for Goddard
science & engineering
students
2 Research Methodology: An Wayne Goddard and Stuart Juta and 2nd edition 2004
Introduction Melville Company
Ltd
3 Research Methodology: A Ranjit Kumar SAGE 3rd edition 2014
Step by Step Guide for Publications Ltd
beginners

Online References:

S. No. Website Name URL Modules Covered

1 www.nptel.ac.in https://nptel.ac.in/courses/121/106/121106007/ M1, M2, M3, M4,
M5, M6
2 www.courseera.org https://www.coursera.org/browse/physical- M1, M2, M3, M4,
science-and-engineering/research-methods M5, M6
3 www.udemy.com https://www.udemy.com/course/research- M1, M2, M3, M4,
methods/ M5, M6
46
 BE SEMESTER VII
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)
B.E. Course B.E. Open Elective SEM: VII
Course Name: Operation Research Course Code: OEC- 7016
eaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Theory (100) Practical/Oral Term Work Total
Week (20) (20)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR/ TW
Hours OR
3 - 3 25 75 100
- 3 - -

IA:In-Semester Assessment- Paper Duration-1 Hours

ESE : End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: Engineering Mathematics

Course Objectives: Course intend to deliver the optimization techniques so that student should be able to optimize
any engineering product or process.

Course Outcome:
SN Course Outcomes Cognitive
levels as per
bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Understand the theoretical workings of the simplex method, the relationship between a L1, L2, L3, L4
linear program and its dual, including strong duality and complementary slackness.
2 Perform sensitivity analysis to determine the direction and magnitude of change of a L1, L2, L3, L4
model’s optimal solution as the data change
3 Solve specialized linear programming problems like the transportation and assignment L1, L2, L3, L4
problems, solve network models like the shortest path, minimum spanning tree, and
maximum flow problems

4 Understand the applications of integer programming and a queuing model and compute L1, L2, L3, L4
important performance measures

5 T o apply conflict between two players L1, L2, L3, L4

6 L1, L2, L3, L4

To apply EOQ model in inventory

47
Detailed Syllabus:

Module No. Topics Hrs. Cognitive

levels as per
bloom’s
Taxonomy
Introduction to Operations Research
Introduction, , Structure of the Mathematical Model, Limitations of Operations
Research
Linear Programming:
Introduction, Linear Programming Problem, Requirements of LPP, L1, L2, L3, L4
1 Mathematical Formulation of LPP, Graphical method, Simplex Method 14
Penalty Cost Method or Big M- method, Two Phase Method, Revised
simplex method, Duality, Primal – Dual construction, Symmetric and
Asymmetric Dual, Weak Duality Theorem, Complimentary Slackness
Theorem, Main Duality Theorem, Dual Simplex Method, Sensitivity
Analysis
Transportation Problem:
Formulation, solution, unbalanced Transportation problem. Finding basic
feasible solutions – Northwest corner rule, least cost method and Vogel’s
approximation method. Optimality test: the stepping stone method and
MODI method

Assignment Problem
Introduction, Mathematical Formulation of the Problem, Hungarian Method
Algorithm, Processing of n Jobs Through Two Machines and m Machines,
Graphical Method of Two Jobs m Machines Problem Routing Problem,
Travelling Salesman Problem
Integer Programming Problem
Introduction, Types of Integer Programming Problems, Gomory’s cutting plane
Algorithm, Branch and Bound Technique. Introduction to Decomposition
algorithms.
Queuing models:

2 queuing systems and structures, single server and multi-server models, Poisson 05
input, exponential service, constant rate service, finite and infinite population L1, L2, L3, L4

Simulation:

L1, L2, L3, L4

Introduction, Methodology of Simulation, Basic Concepts, Simulation
3
Procedure, Application of Simulation Monte-Carlo Method: Introduction,
Monte-Carlo Simulation, Applications of Simulation, Advantages of
05
Simulation, Limitations of Simulation

Dynamic programming.

48
 Characteristics of dynamic programming. Dynamic programming
approach for Priority Management employment smoothening, capital L1, L2, L3, L4
4 budgeting, Stage Coach/Shortest Path, cargo loading and Reliability 6
problems.
Game
Theory.
5 Competitive games, rectangular game, saddle point, minimax L1, L2, L3, L4
(maximin) method of optimal strategies, value of the game. Solution 10
of games with saddle points, dominance principle. Rectangular games
without saddle point – mixed strategy for 2 X 2 games.
Inventory
Models
6 L1, L2, L3, L4
Classical EOQ Models, EOQ Model with Price Breaks, EOQ with 08
Shortage, Probabilistic EOQ Model,

Books and References:

SN Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

1
Operations Research - An Taha, H.A. Prentice Hall, 7th Edition, 2002-
Introduction

2 2009
Operations Research: Ravindran, A, Phillips John Willey and 2nd
Principles and Sons Edition
Practice", -
3 - -
Introduction to Operations Hiller, F. S. and McGraw Hill
Research Liebermann

4 - -
Operations Research S. D. Sharma KedarNath Ram
Nath- Meerut

49
 BE SEMESTER VII
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)
BE Mechanical Engineering B.E. SEM : VII
Course Name: Finance Management
Course Code : HSMC-CS701
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Theory Practical/Oral Term
Hours Per Week Total
(100) (25) Work (25)
Contact
Theory Tutorial Practical Credits IA ESE PR/OR TW
Hours
100
3 - - 3 3 25 75 -

IA: In-Semester Assessment - Paper Duration – 1 Hour

ESE: End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance / Learning Attitude (20%)
Prerequisite: Basic Mathematics

Course Objectives: The course intends to give an overview of Indian financial system,
instruments and market along with basic concepts of value of money, returns and risks,
corporate finance, working capital and its management. It also exhibit knowledge about
sources of finance, capital structure, dividend policy.

Course Outcomes: Upon completion of the course students will be able to:

Sr. Course Cognitive levels

No. Outcomes of attainment as
per Bloom’s
Taxonomy
Levels
Understand Indian Financial System with respect to financial Instruments,
1 L1,L2
financial markets and institutions
2 Understand the concepts of Returns and risks along with time value of money L1, L2,L3
3 Understand Corporate Finance and perform financial ratio analysis L1, L2,L3
4 Importance of Capital Budgeting L1,L2,L3,L4
5 Identify Sources of Finance and capital structure L1,L2,L3,L4
6 Analyze the Dividend Policy concepts for financial decisions L1,L2,L3,L4

50
Detailed Syllabus:
Mod Topics Hrs. Cognitive
ule levels of
No. attainment
as per
Bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Overview of Indian Financial System 08 L1,L2
Characteristics, Components and Functions of Financial System.
Financial Instruments: Meaning, Characteristics and Classification of Basic
Financial Instruments — Equity Shares, Preference Shares, Bonds-Debentures,
Certificates of
Deposit, and Treasury Bills.
Financial Markets: Meaning, Characteristics and Classification of Financial
Markets
— Capital Market, Money Market and Foreign Currency Market
Financial Institutions: Meaning, Characteristics and Classification of Financial
Institutions — Commercial Banks, Investment-Merchant Banks and Stock
Exchanges
2 Concepts of Returns and Risks 08 L1, L2,L3
Measurement of Historical Returns and Expected
Returns of a Single Security and a Two-security Portfolio; Measurement of
Historical Risk and Expected Risk of a Single Security and a Two-security
Portfolio.
Time Value of Money: Future Value of a Lump Sum, Ordinary Annuity, and
Annuity Due; Present Value of a Lump Sum, Ordinary Annuity, and Annuity
Due; Continuous Compounding and Continuous Discounting
3 Overview of Corporate Finance 08 L1, L2,L3
Objectives of Corporate Finance; Functions of
Corporate Finance—Investment Decision, Financing Decision, and Dividend
Decision.
Financial Ratio Analysis: Overview of Financial Statements—Balance Sheet,
Profit and Loss Account, and Cash Flow Statement; Purpose of Financial Ratio
Analysis; Liquidity Ratios; Efficiency or Activity Ratios; Profitability Ratios;
Capital Structure Ratios; Stock Market Ratios; Limitations of Ratio Analysis.
4 Capital Budgeting 10 L1,L2,L3,
Meaning and Importance of Capital Budgeting; Inputs for Capital L4
Budgeting Decisions; Investment Appraisal Criterion—Accounting Rate of
Return, Payback Period, Discounted Payback Period, Net Present Value(NPV),
Profitability Index, Internal Rate of Return (IRR), and Modified Internal Rate of
Return (MIRR)
Working Capital Management: Concepts of Meaning Working Capital;
Importance of Working Capital Management; Factors Affecting an Entity‘s
Working Capital Needs;
Estimation of Working Capital Requirements; Management of Inventories;
Management of Receivables; and Management of Cash and Marketable
Securities
5 Sources of Finance 07 L1,L2,L3,
Long Term Sources—Equity, Debt, and Hybrids; Mezzanine Finance; Sources L4
of Short Term Finance—Trade Credit, Bank Finance, Commercial Paper;

51
 Project Finance.
Capital Structure: Factors Affecting an Entity‘s Capital Structure; Overview
of Capital Structure Theories and Approaches— Net Income Approach, Net
Operating Income Approach; Traditional Approach, and Modigliani-Miller
Approach. Relation between Capital Structure and Corporate Value; Concept of
Optimal Capital Structure
6 Dividend Policy 04 L1, L2,
Meaning and Importance of Dividend Policy; Factors Affecting an L3,L4
Entity‘s Dividend Decision; Overview of Dividend Policy Theories and
Approaches—Gordon‘s Approach, Walter‘s Approach, and Modigliani-Miller
Approach
Total Hours 45

Books and References:

S. Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

No.
1 Fundamentals of Financial Eugene F. Brigham and Cengage
Thirteenth
Management Joel F. Houston Publications, New 2015
Edition
Delhi
2 Analysis for Financial Robert C. Higgins McGraw Tenth
2013
Management Hill Education Edition
3 Indian Financial System M. Y. Khan McGraw Hill
Ninth
Education, New 2015
Edition
Delhi
4 Financial Management I. M. Pandey S. Chand (G/L) &
Eleventh
Company 2015
Edition
Limited, New Delhi

Online References:

S. Modules
Website Name URL
No. Covered
https://www.splessons.com/lesson/indian-financial-system-
1 www.splessons.com M1,M3
overview/
https://finance.zacks.com/concepts-return-investment-risk-
2 finance.zacks.com M2
3049.html
3 www.edupristine.com https://www.edupristine.com/blog/capital-budgeting M4
efinancemanagement.co
4 https://efinancemanagement.com/sources-of-finance M5
m
https://www.businessmanagementideas.com/financial-
www.businessmanageme
5 management/dividends/meaning-and-types-of-dividend- M6
ntideas.com
policy-financial-management/3968

52
 B.E. Semester –VII
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w. e. f. A.Y. 2019-20)
B.E. (Mechatronics Engineering) B.E. SEM: VII

Course Name: Professional Skill VII (CNC Course Code: HSDME PS 701
Programming)

Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/

Summative)

Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment /

Evaluation

Hours Per Week (Conducted in the beginning of Presentation Report Total

Semester during first 3 Weeks)

Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits AC AC

Hours

15 - 30 45 2 50 25 75

The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%),
Timely completion of practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)

Prerequisite: Engineering: Manufacturing Process- I and Manufacturing - II

Course Objectives:
This course intends to deals with the fundamentals of CAD – CAM and Manufacturing Process – I
and II.

Course Outcomes:
SN Course Cognitive
Outcomes levels

as per
bloom’s

Taxonomy

1 Explain applications and advantages of CNC machines and technology. L1, L2, L3, L4

2 Demonstrate and explain various CNC control Calculate technological data L1, L2, L3, L4
for CNC machining.
3 Prepare and understand line program for various profiles Identify and set L1, L2, L3, L4
parameters for various simulators.

4 “G: code programs to perform secondary operations including tapping,

countersinking, counter boring, and threading.
5 Prepare programs , demonstrate , simulate and operate CNC lathe machines L1, L2, L3, L4
for various machining operations
53
 6 Prepare programs , demonstrate , simulate and operate CNC milling
machines for various machining operations

Detailed Syllabus:

Cognitive levels as per

Module No. Topics Hrs
bloom’s Taxonomy

Introduction to CNC: Need of CNC machines,

NC, CNC and DNC systems, Structure of NC
systems, Applications of CNC machines in
1 2 L1,L2,L3,L4
manufacturing, Advantages of CNC machines.

Basic of CNC Machine: G code and M code.

Programming of Turning ( Lathe CNC)

machine: Manual Part Programming of CNC
2 Turning Machine for forged / Cast components. 3 L1,L2,L3,L4

CNC Canned Cycle Programming: CNC

3 5 L1,L2,L3,L4
Turning programming for raw material.

Programming of CNC Milling Machine:

4 Manual Part Programming of CNC Milling 5 L1,L2,L3,L4
Machine for forged / Cast components.

Books and References:

SN Year

1 “CNC Machines”, Pabla B.S., Adithan M.. New 2014 20

Age 14
Internat
ional,
New
Delhi
2 “CAD/CAM: computer Groover, M. P., Prentice Hall 2014 20
aided design and Zimmer, W.E 14
manufacturing”,
3 “Computer Aided Rao, P. N., Tiwari, N. CBS Publ. N- 1995 19
Manufacturing.” K., Kundra, T. Delhi 95
4 CAD/CAM and Automation Farzadak Haideri Nirali 2016 20
Publication 16
5 “ Automation, production Mikell P Groover Prentice Hall 2007 20
Systems and Computer Inc. 07
54
 Integrated Manufacturing,”

6 “Rapid prototyping Cooper, K.G., CRC press 2012 20

Technology : Selection and 12
application”
7 An Introduction to the Finite J. N. Reddy Tata McGraw- 2001 20
Element Method Hill 01
8 Mathematical Elements for David F. Rogers and J. Tata McGraw- 2004 20
Computer Graphics Alan Adams Hill Edition 04

List of Practicals / Experiments

Sr. Experiment topic Type of Experiments Hrs. Cognitive levels of
No attainment per
Bloom’s Taxonomy

1 Basic Turning Program including 2 L1, L2

Step bar

2 Basic Turning Program including 2 L1, L2, L3

Taper and circulation bar ( forged
component)

3 Complex Turning Program 2 L1, L2, L3

including Step, circulation and
threading operation ( forged
component)

4 Basic Turning Program including 2 L1, L2, L3

Taper and circulation bar ( using
Cannel Cycle)

5 Complex Turning Program 2 L1, L2, L3

including Step, circulation and
threading operation ( using Canned Design Experiment
Cycle)

6 Basic Milling Programming 2 L1, L2, L3

7 Complex milling program 2 L1, L2, L3

8 2 L1, L2, L3

Mini Project

55
 B.E. Semester –VII (Mechanical Engineering)
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development(CBCGS- H 2019)
Under TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)

BE (ALL BRANCHES) SEM: VII

Course Name: Research Based Learning III Course Code: HSD-MERBL701

Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)

Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Assessment/Evaluation Scheme
Hours Per Week Presentation Report Term
Work
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits AC AC TW
Hours

- - 2 2 1 25 25 50

Audit course evaluated by Teacher Guardian

Mid Semester Assessment for Term work will be on continuous basis
Prerequisite: Subject knowledge, Domain knowledge
Course Objectives: This course is focused to engage the learner in testing & validation, developing business
models & exploring possibilities in areas of research and consultancy.

Course Outcomes: Upon completion of the course students will be able to:
S.N. Course Outcome Cognitive level attainment as per
revised Bloom Taxonomy
1 Upgrade the knowledge of latest technologies developments, tools and L1, L2, L3
project development aspects.
2 Assess their skills in competitive business environment. L1, L2, L3,L4
3 Test their skills in the areas of consultancy. L1, L2, L3,L4
4 Put across their work by publishing papers L1, L2, L3,L4,l5
Detailed Syllabus:
Module Topics Cognitive level
No. attainment as
per revised
Bloom
Taxonomy
1 Search of relevant industry/labs/start ups for project area L1, L2, L3
Identification of Industry for the cause, opportunity, documentation. Testing
of mathematical modeled as per standards available.Submission of
report/Presentation and evaluation

2 Business plan of Prototype/ Business canvas development L1, L2, L3,L4

Preparing Business plan covering the following parameters:
I. Key Partners
II. Key Activities
III. Value Propositions
IV. Customer Relationships Customer Segments
V. Key Resources
VI. Channels
VII. Cost Structure
VIII. Revenue Streams
IX. Presentation of Pitch and evaluation
3 Participation in competition/Working for research grant L1, L2, L3,L4
group/consultancy group/etc.
56
 I. Participation in project competitions

a) Participating at institute /national level /university level /participate in

competitions.

b) Participation in funded project/consultancy projects

II. Research grant: Identifying research grant proposal like University level,
industry level etc, Proposal writing and preparing budget.

III Evaluation : Evaluation based on level of participation , proposal

made,etc

Competition and evaluation

4 Publish paper at institute /national level conference and Journals L1, L2, L3,L4,L5
I. Identification of conference and track on the basis research
proposal/theme (Institute/National/International)
II. Participating at conference and Publishing paper.
Evaluation of research review paper.

References:

Sr. Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

No.
1. Guide to Competitive Antti Springer Kindle 2018
Programming: Learning Laaksonen
and Improving
Algorithms Through
Contests
2. Business Model Alexander John Wiley & Sons. 1st 2013
Generation: A Osterwalder,
Handbook for Yves Pigneur
Visionaries, Game
Changers, and
Challengers
3. How to Write a Peter Haisler Samfundslitteratur Kindle 2009
Good Research
Paper
Online References:
Sr. No. Website Name URL Modules
Covered
1. https://canvanizer.com https://canvanizer.com/new/business-model-canvas M2
2. https://www.researchgate. https://www.researchgate.net/publication/224372998_Idea_Generation M3
net _Techniques_among_Creative_Professionals
3. https://www.startupindia. https://www.startupindia.gov.in/content/sih/en/reources.html M3
gov.in
4. 2https://www.slideshare.ne https://www.slideshare.net/AsirJohnSamuel/1introduction-to-research- M4
.t methodology?next_slideshow=1

57
8th SEMESTER SYLLABUS

58
 BE SEMESTER VIII
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)

B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) B.E. SEM : VIII

Course Name : CAD-CAM & Automation Course Code :PCC- ME801
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total
(100) (25) (25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR/OR TW
Hours
3 - 2 5 4 25 75 25 25 150
IA: Mid Semester Assessment- Paper Duration – 1.5 Hours
ESE : End Semester Evaluation- Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work / Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: Comuter Aided Design, Manufacturing process – I.

Course Objectives:
This course intends to deals with the fundamentals of CAD – CAM and FEM including To learn graphics
software (ii) To perform various CAD modelling, 2D – 3D transportation, basics of NC , CNC and turning and milling
programming, to get the knowledge of finite element analysis, recent trends in industry.

Course Outcomes:

SN Course Outcomes Cognitive levels

as per bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Integrate the role of graphic communication in the engineering design process. L1, L2, L3, L4

2 Generate various curves and surfaces using Computer graphics. L1 ,L2, ,L3, L,4

3 To demonstrate a basic understanding of machining fundamentals including speed L1, L2, L3, L6
and feed calculations, tooling systems, and work-holding systems for CNC milling
and turning equipment
4 Demonstrate the importance of Computer Integrated Manufacturing. L1, L2

5 Able to understand Flexible Manufacturing System. L1, L2, L3, L4,

L5

6 Able to understand the smart factory maximize outcomes in industry 4.0 and RP. L1, L2

59
Detailed Syllabus:

Module Topics Hrs. Cognitive levels as per

No. bloom’s Taxonomy
Computer graphics:
Introduction to computer graphics: CAD/CAM hardware
1 and software, Scope of CAD/CAM in product life cycle. L1, L2,L3
Transformations: meaning of transformation, 2D & 3D, 8
Homogenous representation, concatenated transformations,
viewing transformation.
Geometric modeling :
Parametric representation of curves and surfaces: Synthetic
Curves , Bezier curves, Hermite Curves, B-spline curves.
Surface representation.
2 10 L1,L2,L3,L4
Solid Modeling: Constructive solid geometry (CSG), Boundary
Representation (BRep), Wire Frame Modeling, Solid Modeling,
Surface Modeling, Parametric Modeling, Feature based
modeling, Constraint Based Modeling.

Computer Aided Manufacturing:

Introduction to CNC: Need of CNC machines, NC, CNC and DNC
systems, Structure of NC systems, Applications of CNC machines in
3 manufacturing, Advantages of CNC machines. 9 L1,L2,L3,L6
CNC programming of motions: CNC programming such as types of
motions, cutter compensations, work offsets, coordinate
transformations, canned cycles, subprograms, macros etc. Programming
examples and exercises for lathes and milling machines
Computer integrated Manufacturing:
Introduction to CIMS, nature, types of manufacturing system, evaluation,
CIMS hardware and software, benefits, scope and needs, CIMS wheel,
elements of CIMS and their role, computer technology and
manufacturing, database requirement.
4 5 L1,L2
Flexible Manufacturing System:
Evolution of Manufacturing Systems, Definition, objective and Need,
Components, Merits, Demerits and Applications Flexibility in Pull and
5 Push type. Layouts and their Salient features, Single line, dual line, loop, 8 L1,L2
ladder, robot centre type etc.

Recent trends in industry : L1, L2, L3

Rapid Prototyping: Introduction to RP, RP Methods, Stereo 5
6 lithography, Fused-deposition modeling, Selective laser
sintering, Laminated-object manufacturing, Ballistic particle
Manufacturing, Solid-base curing.
Industry 4.0: Introduction to Industry 4.0 , difference between
industry 4.0 and Industry 3.0. requisition of Industry 4.0.

60
 Books and References:

SN Title Authors Publisher Edition Yea

r
1 “CNC Machines”, Pabla B.S., Adithan New Age 2nd 2014
M.. International
, New Delhi
2 “CAD/CAM: computer Groover, M. P., Prentice Hall 3rd 2014
aided design and Zimmer, W.E
manufacturing”,
3 “Computer Aided Rao, P. N., Tiwari, CBS Publ. N- 3rd 1995
Manufacturing.” N. K., Kundra, T. Delhi
4 CAD/CAM and Farzadak Nirali Publication 2nd 2016
Automation Haideri
5 “ Automation, Mikell P Groover Prentice Hall Inc. 3rd 2007
production Systems and
Computer Integrated
Manufacturing,”
6 “Rapid prototyping Cooper, K.G., CRC press - 2012
Technology : Selection
and application”
7 An Introduction to the J. N. Reddy Tata McGraw-Hill 2nd 2001
Finite Element Method
8 Mathematical Elements David F. Rogers Tata McGraw-Hill 2nd 2004
for Computer Graphics and J. Alan Adams Edition

Suggested List of Experimnet

Cognitive
Pract
Type of Experiment Practical/Experiment Topic Hrs. levels as
ica
Taxonomy

01 Experiment on solid modelling using Solid 02 L1, L2, L3

work or Catia
02 Experiment on 2D transformation through 02 L1, L2, L3
Matlab or Scilab
03 Design Experiments Experiment on 3D transformation through 02 L1, L2, L3
Matlab or Scilab
04 Experiment on CNC Programming - Lathe 04 L1, L2, L3

05 Experiment on CNC Programming on 02 L1, L2, L3

Simple Milling operations - I
06 Experiment on CNC Programming on L1, L2, L3
Simple Milling operations - II 02
Experiment of 1D and 2D on Ansysis
07 02 L1, L2, L3, L4
Software.
08 Experiment on 3D printing machine – 02 L1, L2, L3,
Simple geometry
09 Experiment on 3D printing machine – 02 L1, L2, L3,
complex geometry
Mini/Minor/Projects/Case Case study : Typical FMS problems from
10 research paper. 61
61 02 L1, L2, L3 ,
 BE SEMESTER VIII
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)
B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) B.E. SEM: VIII
Course Name: Design of Mechanical Systems Course Code: PEC- ME8011

Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)

Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total

Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA (100)

ESE (20)
PR/ OR (20)
TW

Hours

3 - 2@ 5 4 25 75 25 25 150

IA: In-Semester Assessment- Paper Duration-1

Hours ESE : End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: Basic Design Concepts and theories of failure.

Course Objectives:Course intend to acquaint with system design of various systems such as snatch block, belt
conveyors, engine system, pumps and machine tool gearbox

Course Outcomes:

SN Course Outcomes Cognitive levels as

per bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Apply the concept of system design. L1, L2, L3, L4
2 Design material handling systems such as hoisting mechanism of EOT crane, L1, L2, L3, L4
3 Design belt conveyor systems L1, L2, L3, L4
4 Design engine components such as cylinder, piston, connecting rod L1, L2, L3, L4
5 Design pumps for the given applications L1, L2, L3, L4
6 crankshaft
Prepare layout of machine tool gear box and select number of teeth on each gear L1, L2, L3, L4
Detailed Syllabus:

Module Topics Hrs. Cognitive

No. levels as per

bloom’s
Introduction Taxonomy
Methodology & Morphology of design, Optimum design, system concepts in
1 4 L1, L2, L3,
design. L4

Design of hoisting mechanism

Design of Snatch Block Assembly including Rope Selection, Sheave, Hook,

Bearing for hook, cross piece, Axle for sheave and shackle plate, Design of
2 rope drum, selection motor with transmission system. 9 L1, L2, L3

Design of belt conveyors

62
Power requirement, selection of belt, design of tension take up unit, idler
3 6 L1, L2, L3
pulley
 Engine Design (Petrol and Diesel)

4 Design of cylinder, Piston with pin and rings, connecting rod & crank shaft 8 L1, L2, L3,
L4
with bearings

Design of Pumps
5.1 Design of main components of gear pump.

1 Motor selection

2 Gear design

5 3 Shaft design and bearing selection

4 Casing and bolt design

5 Suction and delivery pipe

Design of Gear Box

5 Design of gear boxes for machine tool applications(Maximum three stages 10 L1, L2, L3
5.2 Design of main components of Centrifugal Pump:
and twelve speeds), Requirements of gear box, determination of variable speed L4 L3,
L1, L2,
6 1 Motor
range, selectionrepresentation of speeds, structure diagram, ray diagram,
graphical
selection of optimum ray diagram, estimation of numbers of teeth on gears,
2 Suction and Delivery pipe 8
deviation diagram, layout of gear box
3 Design of Impeller, Impeller shaft

4 Design of Volute Casing

Online References:

S. Website Name URL Modules

No.
1 www.nptel.ac.in https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/105/112105125/ Covered
M1- M6
Books and References:

SN Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

Design of Machine Elements V.B. Bhandari Tata McGraw 3rd Edition 2015

1 Hill
Mechanical Engineering Shigley J E and Mischke McGraw Hill 5th Edition 2017
Publication
32 Mechanical
Design design analysis M
C RF Spotts Prentice Hall 5th Edition 2018

4 Data Books PSG Kalaikathie

Inc 2nd Edition 2016

Achchagam

63
 B.E. Semester –VIII
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)
BE (Mechanical Engineering) SEM: VIII
Course Name: Design of heat Exchanger Course Code:PEC- ME8012
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Total
(100) (25) Work (25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR/OR TW
Hours
3 - 2@ 5 4 25 75 25 25 150

MSE: Mid Semester Examination - Paper Duration – 1.5 Hours

SEE : End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: Thermodynamics, Heat Transfer
Course Objective: course should be able to deliver fundamental knowledge about design of shell and Tube, Condenser,
Double Pipe and Compact Heat Exchangers

Course Outcomes: Students will be able to:

SN Course Outcomes RBT Levels

1 Identify various types of heat exchanger Understand(U)

2 Learn Basic design of heat exchanger Apply(A)

3 Design of shell & Tube Heat Exchanger Apply(A)

4 Design of Double Pipe Heat Exchange Apply(A)

5 Design of Compact Heat Exchanger Apply (A)

6 Design of Condenser and Evaporator Apply(A)

64
Detailed Syllabus:

Modu Topics Hrs. RBT

le No. Levels
1 Introduction L1,L2
Constructional Details and Heat Transfer: Types - Shell and Tube Heat
Exchangers - Regenerators and Recuperates - Industrial Applications,
Temperature Distribution and its Implications - LMTD – Effectiveness,
Selection of Heat Exchanger 5
2 Basic Design Methods of Heat Exchanger L2,L3
Introduction, Arrangement of flow path in Heat Exchanger, Basic
Equations in Design, Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient, The LMTD
Method, ε-NTU Method, Heat Exchanger Design Calculation, Heat
Exchanger Design Methodology. 8
3 Shell And Tube Heat Exchangers L1,L2,L3
Introduction, Basic Components, Basic Design Procedure of a Heat
Exchanger, Shell-Side Heat Transfer and Pressure Drop. 8
4 Double Pipe Heat Exchangers L2,L3
Introduction, Thermal & Hydraulic Design of Inner Tube, Thermal &
Hydraulic Design of Annulus Tube, Parallel Series Arrangement of 8
Hairpins, Design and Operational Features
5 Compact Heat Exchangers L2,L3
Introduction; definition of Geometric Terms: plate fin surface geometries
and surface performance data; correlation of heat transfer and friction data;
Goodness factor comparisons; specification of rating and sizing problems;
calculation procedure for a rating problem. 8
6 Condenser & Evaporator Design L2,L3
Condensers and Evaporators Design: Design of Surface and Evaporative
Condensers - Design of Shell and Tube - Plate Type Evaporators 8

Books and References:

SN Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

1 Fundamentals of Heat Shah R K, Sekulic D P John Wiley 9th Edition 2003
Exchanger Design
2 Heat exchangers : KakacSadik, Liu CRC Press 2th Edition 2002
selection, rating and Hongtan
thermal design
3 Heat Exchangers, T. Taborek, G.F. Hewitt McGraw Hill - 1980
Theory and Practice and N.Afgan Book
4 - 1980
Industrial Heat Walker McGraw Hill
Exchangers
5 Arthur P. Fraas John Wiley & - 1988
Heat Exchanger Design Sons

65
 B.E. Semester –VIII
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)
B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) B.E. SEM: VIII
Course Name: Production and operations
Course Code: PEC-ME8013
management
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Theory Practical/Ora Term Work
Hours Per Week Total
(100) l (20) (20)
Theo Tutor Practi Contact Credit
IA ESE PR/ OR TW
ry ial cal Hours s

3 - 2@ 5 4 25 75 25 25 150

IA : In-Semester Assessment- Paper Duration-1 Hours

ESE : End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely completion of
practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: Production Process II , Material Technology

Course Objectives:

Course intend to provide an exposure to Production Planning & Control (PPC) and its significance in
Manufacturing Industries and to give insight into the ongoing & futuristic trends in the control of inventory.
Also apply knowledge of production scheduling and sequencing so as to optimize resources

Course Outcomes:

S Cognitive levels
Course Outcomes
N as per bloom’s Taxonomy
Illustrate production planning functions and manage manufacturing
1 L1, L2
functions in a better way
Develop competency in scheduling and sequencing of manufacturing
2 L1, L2, L3, L4
operations
3 Forecast the demand of the product and prepare an aggregate plan L1, L2, L3, L4

4 L1, L2, L3, L4

Develop the skills of Inventory Management and cost effectiveness

5 L1, L2, L3, L4

Create a logical approach to Line Balancing in various production systems

6 L1, L2, L3
Implement techniques of manufacturing planning and control

66
 Detailed Syllabus:
Cognitive
levels as
Module
Topics Hrs. per
No.
bloom’s
Taxonomy
Concepts of PPC
Introduction, Historical Development, Concept of Production, Production
System, Classification of Production System , Job-Shop Production ,Batch
Production Mass Production ,Continuous Production ,Production Management
,Objectives of Production Management ,Operations System, A Framework of
1 Managing Operations , Operations Management, Operations Management 6
Objectives L1, L2, L3
The Strategic Role of Operations, Strategic Planning ,Scope of Operations
Management
Operations Decision Making, System design and Capacity planning
Management as a Science, Characteristics of Decisions , Framework for
Decision-Making , Decision Methodology, Complete Certainty Methods ,Risk
and uncertainty Methods, Extreme Uncertainty Methods ,Decision-Making
Under Uncertainty, Decision-Making Under Risk , Decision Support System,
Economic Models, Break-even Analysis , Statistical Models, Equations for 8
2 Discrete and Continuous Data , Decision Tree . L1, L2, L3,
System design and Capacity Introduction, Manufacturing and Service Systems L4
Design and Systems Capacity, Capacity Planning, Process of Capacity
Planning
Importance of Capacity Decisions.
Forecasting demand, Product development and design
Forecasting demand : Introduction , Forecasting Objectives and Uses
Forecasting Decision Variables, Forecasting Methods ,Opinion and Judgmental
Methods, Time Series Methods, Exponential Smoothing, Adjusted Exponential
Smoothing Regression and Correlation Methods, Regression Correlation,
Applications and Control of Forecast , Forecast Controls.
Product development and design: Introduction, Purpose of a Product Design, L1, L2, L3,
8
Product Analysis, Marketing Aspect, The Product Characteristics, Economic L4
3
Analysis, Production Aspect, A Framework for Process Design, Product
Planning
Process Design : MACRO, Process Design : MICRO, Design for Manufacture
(DFM),Design for Excellence, Concurrent Development Activities.

Materials Management, Aggregate planning and master scheduling

Materials Management Introduction and Meaning , Scope or Functions of
Materials Management, Material Planning and Control, Techniques of Material
Planning, Purchasing, Objectives of Purchasing, Parameters of Purchasing
,Purchasing Procedure, Selection of Suppliers, Special Purchasing Systems,
Stores Management, Codification, Inventory Control or Management
Meaning of Inventory, Reasons for Keeping Inventories ,Meaning of Inventory L1, L2, L3,
8
4 Control, Objectives of Inventory Control ,Benefits of Inventory Control, L4
Techniques of Inventory Control, Inventory Model, Standardization
Advantages of Standardization,
Aggregate planning and master scheduling : Introduction ,Variables Used in
Aggregate Planning , Aggregate Planning Strategies ,Mixed Strategies
Mathematical Planning Models, Master Scheduling, Master Scheduling
67
 Planning Horizon, Master Scheduling Format, Available-to-Promise Quantitie.

Material requirement planning, scheduling

Material requirement planning, MRP and CRP Objectives, MRP Inputs and
Outputs, Bill of Materials , Low-level Coding ,MRP , Enterprise Resource
Planning
Scheduling: Introduction, Concept of Single Machine Scheduling , Measures
L1, L2, L3,
of Performance, Shortest Processing Time (SPT) Rule, WSPT Rule ,Earliest 10
5 L4
Due Date (EDD) Rule, Minimizing the Number of Tardy Jobs, Flow Shop
Scheduling
Johnson’s Problem ,Johnson’s Algorithm ,Extension of Johnson’s Rule ,CDS
Heuristic Job-Shop Problem, Types of Schedules, Heuristic Procedures,
Priority Dispatching Rules, Two Jobs and M Machines Scheduling.
JIT and Lean Production

Aim, Objectives, Learning outcome, Introduction, History and Philosophy of

Just-In-Time (JIT),Just-In-Time Concept Benefits and Problems Implementation
of JIT Lean Manufacturing Lean Production Overview Basic Elements of Lean
Manufacturing Characteristics of a Lean Manufacturing Key Feature of Lean
Production Benefits of Lean Production, Five Elements to Enabling Approach,
6 Tips to Transition Company into Lean Enterprise, Six-Sigma, Objectives of Six- 8 L1, L2, L3, L4
Sigma,
Integrating Six Sigma with Business Process Management, Six Main Benefits of
the Sigma Breakthrough Strategy, Difference between TQM and Six Sigma,
Critical Success Factors of an Organization for Successful TPS-Lean, Six Sigma
Implementation

Books and References:

SN Title Authors Publisher

1 -
Production Planning and Control
Samuel Eilon.

2 New Age international

Operations management S.Anil Kumar and N Suresh

3 Longman Scientific &

Production Planning and Control W. Boltan- Technical

4 Production Systems- Planning, James. L. Riggs-John -

Analysis& Control Wiley &Sons

Thomas E. Vollman,
Manufacturing Planning and
5 WilliamL.Berry& Galgotia Publishers
Control Systems
Others

68
 Manufacturing Process Planning
6
and Systems Engineering AnandBewoor Dreamtech Press

7 Production and Operations TMH publishing

Management S.N.Chary company

8. Modernization & Manufacturing

L.C. Jhamb Everest PublishingHouse
Management

Online References:

S.
Website Name U RL Modules Covered
No.
1 www.nptel.ac.in https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112107238/26 M1-M6

69
 B.E. Semester –VIII
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019) TCET Autonomy
Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2019-20)
B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) B.E. SEM: VIII
Course Name: Renewable Energy Sources Course Code: PEC-ME8014

Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)

Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory (100) Practical/Oral (20) Term Work (20) Total

Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Hours Credits IA ESE PR/ OR TW

3 - 2@ 5 4 25 75 25 25 150

IA:In-Semester Assessment- Paper Duration-1 Hours

ESE : End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
tage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely completion of practical (40%) and Attendance
(20%)

Prerequisite: Thermodynamics

Course Objectives:
Course intend to provide working principles of various renewable energy sources and their utilities
Course Outcomes:
SN Course Outcomes Cognitive levels as
per bloom’s Taxonomy
Demonstrate need of different renewable energy sources L1, L2
1
2 Discuss importance of renewable energy sources L1
3 Discuss various renewable energy sourses in Indian context L1, L2, L3, L4
4 Calculate and analyse utilization of solar and wind energy L1, L2, L3, L4
5 Illustrate design of biogas plant L1, L2, L3, L4
Demonstrate basics of hydrogen energy L1, L2
6.

70
Detailed Syllabus:

Module Topics Hrs. Cognitive

No. levels as
per bloom’s
Taxonomy
Introduction to Energy Sources
Renewable and non-renewable energy sources, Need for Renewable Energy Sources, Energy
1 Consumption as a measure of Nation's development; Strategy for meeting the future energy
requirements, Global and National scenarios, Prospects of renewable energy sources, Present status L1, L2
and current installations, Introduction to Hybrid EnergySystems. 7
Solar energy
Merits and demerits, Solar radiation - beam and diffuse radiation, solar constant, earth sun angles,
2 attenuation and measurement of solar radiation, local solar time, derived solar angles, sunrise, sunset
and day length, Methods of Solar Radiation estimation. L1
Solar Energy collection devices and Classification: Flat plate collectors, concentrating collectors,
Solar air heaters-types, solar driers, storage of solar energy-thermal storage, solar pond , solar water
12
heaters, solar distillation, solar still, solar cooker, solar heating & cooling of buildings, Solar
Photovoltaic systems & applications.

Wind Energy
Principle of wind energy conversion; Basic components of wind energy conversion systems; wind
3 mill components, various types and their constructional features; design considerations of horizontal L1, L2, L3, L4
and vertical axis wind machines: analysis of Aerodynamic forces acting on wind 10
mill blades and estimation of power output; wind data and site selection considerations.

Energy from biomass

Biomass conversion technologies, Biogas generation plants, classification, advantages and
4 disadvantages, constructional details, site selection, digester design consideration, filling a digester for L1, L2, L3, L4
starting, maintaining biogas production, Fuel properties of bio gas, utilization of 6
biogas.
Geothermal Energy
Estimation and nature of geothermal energy, geothermal sources and resources like hydrothermal,
5 geo-pressured hot dry rock, magma. Advantages, disadvantages and application of geothermal energy, L1, L2, L3, L4
prospects of geothermal energy in India.
Energy from the ocean: Ocean Thermal Electric Conversion (OTEC) systems like open cycle, closed
cycle, Hybrid cycle, prospects of OTEC in India. Energy from tides, basic principle of tidal power,
single basin and double basin tidal power plants, advantages, limitation and scope of tidal energy. 8
Wave energy and power from wave, wave
energy conversion devices, advantages and disadvantages of wave energy
Hydrogen Energy
Methods of Hydrogen production, Hydrogen Storage, Fuel Cells and Types of Fuel Cells.
6 5 L1, L2

71
Books and References:

SN Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

1 Non-conventional energy G.D. Rai Khanna
1 st
2004
sources Publishers
Edition
2 Renewable Energy:Power for a Edited by Godfrey Oxford
3rd Edition
Sustainable Future Boyle University
Press 2006
3 Solar Energy: Principles of SP Sukhatme and J K TMH
Thermal Collection and Storage Nayak
2nd 2004
Edition
4 Wind and Solar Power Systems Mukund R Patel CRC Press
,
1st 2006
Edition

Online References:
S. No. Website Name URL Modules Covered

1 www.nptel.ac.in https://nptel.ac.in M1-M6

72
 B.E. Semester –VIII
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)
B.E. Course B.E. Open Elective SEM : VIII
Course Name: Project Management Course Code : OEC- 8011
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Term
Theory Practical/Oral
Hours Per Week Work Total
(100) (25)
(25)
Contact
Theory Tutorial Practical Credits IA ESE PR/OR TW
Hours
100
3 - - 3 3 25 75 - -

IA: In-Semester Assessment - Paper Duration – 1 Hours

ESE: End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely completion of
practical (40%) and Attendance / Learning Attitude (20%)
Prerequisite: Data Structure, Software Engineering

Course Objective: The objective of the course is to familiarize the students with the use of a
structured methodology/approach for each and every unique project undertaken, including
utilizing project management concepts, tools and techniques and appraise the students with the
project management life cycle and make them knowledgeable about the various phases from
project initiation through closure.

Course Outcomes: Upon completion of the course students will be able to:

Sr No. Course Outcomes Cognitive levels of

attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
Apply selection criteria and select an appropriate project from different
1 L1, L2, L3, L4
options
Write work break down structure for a project and develop a schedule
2 L1, L2, L3, L4
based on it
Identify opportunities and threats to the project and decide an approach
3 L1, L2, L3, L4
to deal with them strategically.
Use Earned value technique and determine & predict status of the
4 L1, L2, L3, L4
project.
Compare and contrast various project execution, Monitoring and
5 Controlling Projects, Project Contracting, Project Leadership and Ethics L1, L2, L3, L4
and Closing the Project
Capture lessons learned during project phases and document them for
6 L1, L2
future reference

73
Detailed Syllabus:

Cognitive levels of
Module
Topics Hrs. attainment as per
No. Bloom’s Taxonomy
Project Management Foundation
Definition of a project, Project Vs Operations, Necessity of project
1 management, Triple constraints, Project life cycles (typical & atypical) L1, L2, L3, L4
Project phases and stage gate process. Role of project manager, Negotiations 6
and resolving conflicts, Project management in various organization
structures, PM knowledge areas as per Project Management Institute (PMI).
Initiating Projects
How to get a project started, Selecting project strategically, Project selection
2 models (Numeric /Scoring Models and Non-numeric models), Project L1, L2, L3, L4
portfolio process, Project sponsor and creating charter; Project proposal. 6
Effective project team, Stages of team development & growth (forming,
storming, norming &performing), team dynamics
Project Planning and Scheduling
Work Breakdown structure (WBS) and linear responsibility chart, Interface
3 Co-ordination and concurrent engineering, Project cost estimation and L1, L2, L3, L4
budgeting, Top down and bottoms up budgeting, Networking and 8
Scheduling techniques. PERT, CPM, GANTT chart, Introduction to Project
Management Information System (PMIS).
Planning Projects
Crashing project time, Resource loading and levelling, Goldratt's critical
4 chain, Project Stakeholders and Communication plan Risk Management in 8 L1, L2, L3, L4
projects: Risk management planning, Risk identification and risk register,
Qualitative and quantitative risk assessment, Probability and impact matrix.
Risk response strategies for positive and negative risks
Executing Projects, Monitoring and Controlling Projects & Project
Contracting
5.1 Executing Projects: Planning monitoring and controlling cycle,
Information needs and reporting, engaging with all stakeholders of the
5 projects, Team management, communication and project meetings 10 L1, L2, L3, L4
5.2 Monitoring and Controlling Projects: Earned Value Management
techniques for measuring value of work completed; Using milestones for
measurement; change requests and scope creep, Project audit.
5.3 Project Contracting : Project procurement management, contracting and
outsourcing,
Project Leadership and Ethics & Closing the Project
6.1 Project Leadership and Ethics: Introduction to project leadership, ethics
in projects, Multicultural and virtual projects 6.2 Closing the Project:
Customer acceptance; Reasons of project termination, Various types of
6 project terminations (Extinction, Addition, Integration, Starvation), Process 7 L1, L2
of project termination, completing a final report; doing a lessons learned
analysis; acknowledging successes and failures; Project management
templates and other resources; Managing without authority; Areas of further
study.
Total Hours 45

74
Books and References:

S.No Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

Project Management Project Management: A Wiley India Seventh
1 Foundation: managerial approach, Jack Edition 2009
Meredith & Samuel Mantel.
Initiating Projects & Project A Guide to the Project Project Fifth --
2 Planning and Scheduling Management Body of Management Edition
Knowledge (PMBOK® Guide) Institute PA,
USA
Planning Projects Project Management, Gido Cengage -- --
3 Clements Learning
Executing Projects, Project Management, Gopalan Wiley India -- --
4 Monitoring and Controlling Wiley India
Projects & Project
Contracting
Project Leadership and Ethics Project Management, Dennis Gower Ninth --
5 & Closing the Project Lock. Publishing Edition
England

Online Resources:

S. Website Name URL Modules Covered

No.
1 http://www.opente http://www.opentextbooks.org.hk/system/files/export/15/ M1-M6
xtbooks.org.hk 15694/pdf/Project_Management_15694.pdf
2 https://www.nesac https://www.nesacenter.org/uploaded/conferences/SEC/2 M1-M3, M6
enter.org 014/handouts/Rick_Detwiler/15_Detwiler_Resources.pdf
3 http://www.edo.ca http://www.edo.ca/downloads/project-management.pdf M1,M4

75
 B.E. Semester –VIII
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)
B.E. Course BE Open Elective (SEM: VIII)
Course Name: Energy Audit and Management Course Code: OEC- 8012
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total
(100) (25) (25)
Theory Tutorial Practi Contact Cred IA ESE PR TW
cal Hours its
3 - - 3 3 25 75 - - 100

IA: In-Semester Assessment - Paper Duration – 1.5 Hours

ESE: End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance / Learning Attitude (20%)

Prerequisite: - Knowledge of Basic Electrical and Mechanical Systems

Course objectives:

1. To understand the importance energy security for sustainable development and the fundamentals of energy
conservation.
2. To introduce performance evaluation criteria of various electrical and thermal installations to facilitate the
energy management
3. To relate the data collected during performance evaluation of systems for identification of energy saving
opportunities.

Course outcomes: After successful completion of the course student will be able:-

SN Course Outcomes Cognitive levels of attainment

as per Bloom’s Taxonomy
1 To identify and describe present state of energy security and its importance. L1

2 To identify and describe the basic principles and methodologies adopted in energy L1, L2, L3
audit of any utility.
3 To describe the energy performance evaluation of some common electrical L1, L2, L3, L4
installations and identify the energy saving opportunities.
4 To describe the energy performance evaluation of some common thermal L1, L2, L3, L4
installations and identify the energy saving opportunities
5 To analyze the data collected during performance evaluation and recommend L1, L2, L3
energy saving measures
6 To understand the concept of Energy conservation measures in building complex L1

76
Detailed Syllabus

Module Unit No. Topics Hrs Cognitive levels of

No. attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
1 Energy Scenario & Energy Conservation measures 04 L1
1.1 Present Energy Scenario
1.2 Renewable and Non-Renewable form of Energy
1.3 Greenhouse Gas effect, Acid Rain, Energy Pricing, Energy
Sector Reforms,
1.4 Energy Conservation and its Importance: Energy
Conservation Act-2001 and its features. Role of Bureau of
Energy Efficiency (BEE), Energy Security, Basic idea of
Material and Energy balance
2 Energy Audit & Energy Economics 08 L1, L2, L3

2.1 Energy Audit: Definition, need, types of energy audit, Steps

of detailed Energy Audit, Role of Energy Manager and
Internal audit Team,
2.2 Measuring instruments & Equipment used during Energy
audit
2.3 Understanding energy costs, Bench marking, Energy
performance, Matching energy use to requirement,
2.4 Maximizing system efficiencies, Optimizing the input energy
requirements, Fuel and energy substitution
2.5 Elements of monitoring & targeting, Data and information
analysis.
2.6 Energy Economics: Simple payback period (SPP), Net
Present value (NPV), Return on investment (ROI), Internal
rate of return (IRR)
3 Energy Management in Electrical System 10 L1, L2, L3, L4
3.1 Electricity billing, Basic concept of Electrical load
management, Maximum demand Control, Energy
management through Power factor improvement
3.2 Energy efficient equipment and appliances, Star ratings of
Electrical Equipment.
3.3 Lighting System control: Occupancy sensors, daylight
integration, and use of intelligent controllers. Energy
efficiency measures in lighting system
3.4 Energy conservation opportunities in water pumps, industrial
drives, induction motors, soft starters, variable speed drives.
4 Energy Management in Thermal Systems 10 L1. L2, L3,L4
4.1 Review of different thermal loads,
Steam System: Basic idea of Steam distribution system,
Assessment of steam distribution losses, Steam leakages,
Steam trapping, Condensate and flash steam recovery system,
Energy conservation in Steam distribution system,
4.2 Boiler System: General fuel conservation measures in Boilers
and furnaces, Waste heat recovery, cogeneration, use of
insulation- types and application.

77
 4.3 HVAC system: Coefficient of performance, Capacity, factors
affecting performance of Refrigeration and Air Conditioning
system performance, Energy savings opportunities in HVAC
system.
5 Energy Performance Assessment 04 L1, L2, L3,
5.1 Performance assessment of Motors, variable speed drive,
pumps,
5.2 Lighting System calculations: Installed Load Efficacy Ratio
(ILER) method,
5.3 HVAC system calculations; various terms used in assessment
of performance
6 Energy conservation in Residential and Commercial Buildings 03 L1
6.1 Energy Conservation Building Codes (ECBC)
6.2 Green Building norms, LEED ratings of buildings, Use of
renewable energy sources in building complex
Total 39

Books of Reference

SN Title Authors Publisher

1. Handbook of Electrical Installation Practice Geofry Stokes Blackwell Science
2. Designing with light: Lighting System Handbook By Anil Valia -
3. Energy Management handbook W.C. Turner John Wiley and Sons
4. Handbook on Energy Audits and Management A. K. Tyagi, Tata Energy Research Institute (TERI).
5. Energy Management Principles C.B. Smith Pergamon Press
6. Energy Conservation Guidebook Dale R. Patrick, Fairmont Press
S. Fardo, Ray E.
Richardson
7. Handbook of Energy Audits Albert Thumann, W. CRC Press
J. Younger, T. Niehus

Online Reference

SNo. Website Name URL Modules Covered

1 Bureau of Energy Efficiency https://beeindia.gov.in/content/energy-auditors 1-2
2 You tube https://youtube/7hDyLuFJ0c8 1-6
3 You tube https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UhGZRoUlr8U 1-6
4 NPTEL by IIT Roorkee https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2zWt-pBCU2I 1-3

78
 B.E. Semester –VIII
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Multidisciplinary Education -(CBCGS-H 2020) TCET
Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)
B. E. Course B.E. Open Elective SEM VIII
Course Name : Innovation Management Course Code : OEC- 8013
Contact Hours Per Week : 3 Credits : 3
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral/Presentation Term Total
(100) (25) Work (25)
Theor Tutorial Practic Contact Credi IA ESE MS ESE MS ESE
y al Hours ts A A
3 - - 3 3 25 75 - - - - 100

MSA: Mid Semester Assessment- Paper Duration – 1 hr

ESE: End Semester Evaluation-Paper Duration-3 hrs.
Mid Semester Assessment for Term work will be on continues basis
Prerequisite: Financial Accounting and Management and Business Modelling.
RBT : Revised Bloom’s Taxonomy

Course Objective: The course intends to apply the concept of Innovation in Business.

Course Outcomes: Upon completion of the course students will be able to:

L1: Remembering L2: Understanding L3: Applying L4: Analysing L5: Evaluating L6: Creating

Sr. No. Course Outcomes RBT level

1 Able to analyze and apply impact of innovation on society L1,L2,L4

2 Able to understand the role of technology in creating wealth L1,L2,L3

3 Recognize markers of business models which appear as a L1,L2,L3,L4

response to digital revolution
4 Search for real cases which represent new business models L1,L2,L3,L4

79
 5 Identify similar and distinguished features of business build on L1,L2,L3,L4
identical business models

6 Know the most important cases of data-driven business founded on L2,L4

new business models

Detailed Syllabus:

Module Topics Hrs. RBT Levels

No.
01 Sources of Innovation 08 L1,L2,L4
Sources of Innovation: Innovation / wealth creation process, three
critical trajectories impacting the innovation process creative
transformations, the importance of technological Innovation, The
impact of technological innovation on society. Case study on impact
of technological innovation on society.

Industry dynamics of technological innovation, transcending

creativity into innovation, innovation as a collaborative effort.

02 Types and patterns of innovation 06 L1,L2,L3

Types and patterns of innovation: Technology S curves,

formulation of technological innovation strategy, implementing
technological innovation strategies. Managing new product
development. Case study on new product development.

03 Collaboration strategies and Choosing innovative projects 08 L1,L2,L3,L4

Collaboration Strategies: The role of technology in the creation of

wealth, historical perspective, long-wave cycle, evolution of
production technology, technology and national economy. Case study
on Collaboration Strategies.

Choosing innovative projects: Management of technology, the

conceptual frame work, technology and society, knowledge and
technology, technology and business. Case study
on How to choose innovative projects.
04 Introduction to Business Models 8 L1,L2,L3,L4
What is a Business Model? Importance of Business Model. History of
Business Model. Type of Business Model

05 Business models as a key concept of strategic management. 8 L1,L2,L3,L4

Variety of business model frameworks: Canvas, ‘Zott-Amit’ model,
BM navigator, 4W approach, Hybrid business models. Resource-
based view (RBV). Industrial organization.
06 Digital business models. 8 L2,,L4,

80
 E-commerce. Innovative business model in retail and consumer
goods. Omnichannel retail. Manufacturing business models. Digital
manufacturing. Developers as new decision makers. Case-study of
Apple, Android, Tinkoff.

Total 46

Books and References:

Sr. Title of the book Authors Publisher Edition Year
No
1 Strategic management of Melissa A. McGraw-Hill Fifth Edition 2017
technological Innovation Schilling
2 Management of technology Tarek M. McGraw Hill Second 2009
Khalil Edition
3 Business model generation: a Osterwalder, John Wiley & Sons ThirdEdition 2010
handbook for visionaries, game A., &Pigneur,
changers, and challengers. Y.

4 Value creation in e‐business. Amit, R., Strategic 22(6‐7), 2001

&Zott, C. management 493-520.
journal,

Online Reference

SNo. Website Name URL Modules Covered

1. Ideaconnection.com https://www.ideaconnection.com/innovation- M1,M2
videos/
2. Ideaconnection.com https://www.ideaconnection.com/innovation- M3,M4
videos/
3. Ideaconnection.com https://www.ideaconnection.com/innovation- M5,M6
videos/
4. https://nptel.ac.in https://nptel.ac.in/courses/110/107/110107094/ M1,M2,M3,M4,M5,M6
5. Coursera.org https://www.coursera.org/learn/digital-business- M4,M5,M6
models/lecture/nJTB0/lesson-4-asymmetric-
business-models-creating-unfair-advantage
6. online.stanford.edu https://online.stanford.edu/courses/xine249- M1,M2,M3,M4,M5,M6
building-business-models

81
 B.E. Semester –VIII
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)

B.E. Course BE Open Elective SEM: VIII

Course Name : Environmental Management Course Code: OEC- 8014
Contact Hours Per Week : 03 Credits : 03
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total
(100) (25) (25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR TW
Hours
_ 100
3 _ _ 3 3 20 80 _
IA: Internal Assessment - Paper Duration – 1 Hour
ESE: End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance/Learning Attitude (20%)
Prerequisite: Fundamentals of Chemistry and biology

Course Objective: The course intends to give an understanding of environmental issues relevant to India and global
concerns, the concept of ecology and familiarize the learner with environment related legislations.

Course Outcomes: Upon completion of the course student will be able to:

S. Course Cognitive levels of

No Outcomes attainment as per
Bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Understand the concept of environmental management and the Energy L1 L2
scenario.
2 Understand ecosystem and interdependence, food chain etc. L1 L2
3 Understand and interpret environment related legislations L1 L2 L3 L4

Detailed Syllabus:

Cognitive
Module Topics Hr levels of
No. s. Attainment as
per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
1 Introduction and Definition of Environment 5 L1 L2

Significance of Environment Management for contemporary

managers, Career opportunities, Environmental issues
relevant to India, Sustainable Development, the Energy
scenario.

82
 2 Global Environmental concerns 6 L1
L2

Global Warming, Acid Rain, Ozone Depletion, Hazardous Wastes,

Endangered life-species, Loss of Biodiversity, Industrial/Man-made
disasters, Atomic/Biomedical hazards, etc.
3 Concepts of Ecology 7 L1
L2

Ecosystems and interdependence between living organisms, habitats,

limiting factors, carrying capacity, food chain, etc.

4 Scope of Environment Management 7 L1 L2 L3 L4

Role and functions of Government as a planning and regulating
agency Environment Quality Management and Corporate
Environmental Responsibility.
5 Total Quality Environmental Management 7 L1 L2 L3 L4
ISO-14000, EMS certification.
6 General overview of major legislations 7 L1
Environment Protection Act, Air (P & CP) Act, Water (P & CP) Act, L2
Wildlife Protection Act, Forest Act, Factories Act, etc. L3
Total 39

Books and References:

Sr.No. Title Author Publisher Edition Year

1 Environmental Management: C J Barrow Routledge 1st 1999
Principles and Practice Publishers
2 A Handbook of Environmental John C. Lovett and Edward Elgar ------------ 2010
Management David G. Ockwell Publishing
3 Environmental Management V Ramachandra and TERI Press 1st 2006
Vijay Kulkarni
4 Indian Standard Environmental
Management Systems — Bureau Of Indian ------------- ------------- 2005
Requirements With Guidance For Standards
Use
5 Environmental Management: An S N Chary and Vinod Macmillan ------------- 2000
Indian Perspective Vyasulu India
6 Introduction to Environmental Mary K Theodore and CRC Press ------------- 2009
Management Louise Theodore
7 Environment and Ecology Majid Hussain Access 3rd 2015
Publishing

83
Online References:

Sr. Website Name URL

No.
1 Alison https://alison.com/course/introduction-to-ecology
2 ISO https://www.iso.org/iso-14001-environmental-management.html

3 Certified Environment https://www.vskills.in/certification/legal/environment-law-

Law Analyst certification

84
 B.E. Semester –VIII
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
under Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)
B.E. Course B.E. Open Elective SEM: VIII
Course Name: IPR and Patenting Course Code: OEC- 8015
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination scheme
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total
(100) (25) (25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR TW
Hours 100
3 - - 3 3 25 75 - -
IA: Internal Assessment - Paper Duration – 1.5 Hours
ESE: End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely completion
of practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)

Course Objective:

1. To understand intellectual property rights protection system

2. To promote the knowledge of Intellectual Property Laws of India as well as International treaty procedures
3. To get acquaintance with Patent search and patent filing procedure and applications

Course Outcome

SN Course Outcomes Cognitive Levels as

per Blooms
Taxonomy
1 understand Intellectual Property assets L1,L2
2 assist individuals and organizations in capacity building L1,L2,L3
3 work for development, promotion, protection, compliance, and enforcement of L1,L2,L3
Intellectual
Property and Patenting
Detailed Syllabus :

Module Topics Hrs Cognitive

No. Levels as per
Blooms
Taxonomy
1 Introduction to Intellectual Property Rights (IPR): L1,L2
Meaning of IPR, Different category of IPR instruments - Patents, Trademarks, 5
Copyrights, Industrial Designs, Plant variety protection, Geographical indications,
Transfer of technology etc.
Importance of IPR in Modern Global Economic Environment:
Theories of IPR, Philosophical aspects of IPR laws, Need for IPR, IPR as an
instrument of development

2 Enforcement of Intellectual Property Rights: 7

85
 Introduction, Magnitude of problem, Factors that create and sustain
counterfeiting/piracy, International agreements, International organizations (e.g. L1,L2,L3
WIPO, WTO) active in IPR enforcement
Indian Scenario of IPR:
Introduction, History of IPR in India, Overview of IP laws in India, Indian IPR,
Administrative Machinery, Major international treaties signed by India, Procedure
for submitting patent and Enforcement of IPR at national level etc.
3 Emerging Issues in IPR: L1,L2,L3
Challenges for IP in digital economy, e-commerce, human genome, biodiversity 5
and traditional knowledge etc.

4 Basics of Patents: 7 L1,L2,L3

Definition of Patents, Conditions of patentability, Patentable and non-patentable
inventions, Types of patent applications (e.g. Patent of addition etc),Process Patent
and Product Patent, Precautions while patenting, Patent specification Patent claims,
Disclosures and non-disclosures, Patent rights and infringement, Method of getting
a patent
Patent Rules: 8
5 Indian patent act, European scenario, US scenario, Australia scenario, L1,L2
Japan scenario, Chinese scenario, Multilateral treaties where India is a member
(TRIPS agreement, Paris convention etc.)
Procedure for Filing a Patent (National and International): 7
6 Legislation and Salient Features, Patent Search, Drafting and Filing Patent L1,L2,L3
Applications, Processing of patent, Patent Litigation, Patent Publication etc, Time
frame and cost, Patent Licensing, Patent Infringement
Patent databases: Important websites, Searching international databases

Books and References:

S. No. Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

1 Patent system and related Keayla B K National Working First 2004
issues at a glance Group
2 The enforcement of Lous Harns Wipo 3rd 2018
Intellactual Property
Rights

86
 BE SEMESTER VIII
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
under Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)

B.E. Course B.E. Open Elective SEM: VIII

Course Name: Supply Change Management Course Code: OEC 8016
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Theory (100) Practical/Oral Term Work Total
Week (20) (20)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR/ TW
Hours OR
3 - - 3 3 25 75 - - 100

IA: In-Semester Assessment- Paper Duration-1.5 Hours

ESE : End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: NILL

Course Objective:

1. To acquaint with key drivers of supply chain performance and their inter-relationships with strategy.
2. To impart analytical and problem-solving skills necessary to develop solutions for a variety of supply chain
management & design problems.
3. To study the complexity of inter-firm and intra-firm coordination in implementing programs such as e-
collaboration, quick response, jointly managed inventories, and strategic alliances.

Course Outcome:

SN Course Outcomes Cognitive Levels as per

Bloom’s Taxonomy
1 To acquaint with key drivers of supply chain performance and their inter- L1,L2,L3
relationships with strategy.

2 To impart analytical and problem-solving skills necessary to develop L1,L3,L4

solutions for a variety of supply chain management & design problems.
3 To study the complexity of inter-firm and intra-firm coordination in L1,L2,L4
implementing programs such as e-collaboration, quick response, jointly
managed inventories and strategic alliances.

Module Detailed Contents Hours Cognitive Levels as

per Bloom’s
Taxonomy
01 Building a Strategic Framework to Analyze Supply Chains 04 L1,L2,L3
Supply chain stages and decision phases, Process view of supply

87
 chain: Supply chain flows, Examples of supply chains, Competitive
and supply chain strategies, Achieving strategic fit: Expanding
strategic scope, Drivers of supply chain performance. Framework for
structuring drivers: inventory, transportation facilities, information
obstacles to achieving fit.
02 Designing the Supply Chain Network 05 L1,L3,L4
Distribution Networking: Role, Design, Supply Chain
Network(SCN):Role, Factors, Framework for design decisions.
03 Materials Management 06 L1,L2,L3
Scope, Importance, Classification of materials, Procurement,
Purchasing policies, Vendor development and evaluation. Inventory
control systems of stock replenishment, Cost elements, EOQ and its
derivative modules.
04 Dimensions of Logistics 06 L1,L3,L4
Introduction: A Macro and Micro Dimensions, Logistics interfaces
with other areas, Approach to analyzing logistics system, Logistics
and systems analyzing: Techniques of logistics system analysis,
factors affecting the cost and Importance of logistics.
05 Warehouse and Transport Management 07 L1,L2,L3
Concept of strategic storage, Warehouse functionality, Warehouse
operating principles, Developing warehouse resources, Material
handling and packaging in warehouses, Transportation Management,
Transport functionality and principles, Transport infrastructure,
transport economics and Pricing. Transport decision making.

06 IT in Supply Chain 08 L1,L3,L4

6.1 IT framework, Customer Relationship Management
(CRM),internal Supply chain management, Supplier Relationship
Management (SRM) and Transaction Management. Coordination in a
Supply Chain
6.2 Lack of supply chain coordination and the Bullwhip effect,
Obstacle to Coordination, Managerial levers, Building partnerships
and trust.
Emerging Trends and Issues
6.3 Vendor managed inventory-3PL-4PL, Reverse logistics: Reasons,
Role, Activities; RFID systems: Components, Applications,
Implementation; Lean supply chain, Implementation of Six Sigma in
supply chain, Green supply chain.
Books and References:

SN Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

Supply Chain Management Sunil Chopra and Pearson 6th Edition 2016
1 Strategy, Planning, and Peter Meindl
operations

2 Designing & Managing Supply David Simchi McGraw Hill 3rd Edition 2007
chain Levi, Philip
Kaminsky&
Edith Smichi

88
 Levi

Supply Chain Redesign: Robert B Prentice Hall -- 2002

3 Transforming Supply Chains into Handfield, Ernest
Integrated Value Systems,
L Nicholas
4 The Management of Business Coyle, Bardi, Thomson learning -- 2003
Logistics: A Supply Chain Langley
Perspective
5 Supply chain management: B S Sahay Macmillan -- 1999
for global competitiveness

Online Resources:

S. No. Website Name URL Modules

covered
1. https://nptel.ac.in https://nptel.ac.in/courses/110/106/110106045/ 2
2. https://nptel.ac.in https://nptel.ac.in/courses/110/107/110107074/ 3
3. https://www.scmhub.com https://www.scmhub.com/courses/BBA 2
4. https://www.udemy.com https://www.udemy.com/topic/supply-chain/ 4

89
 B.E. Semester –VIII
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
under TCET Autonomy Scheme (w. e. f. A.Y. 2019-20)

B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) B.E. SEM: VIII

Course Name: Professional Skills – VIII (CFD on Software) Course Code: HSDMEPS801

Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)

Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation

Hours Per Week Presentation Report Total

(Conducted in the beginning of Semester during first 3 Weeks)

Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits AC AC

Hours 75

15 - 30 45 2 50 25

The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely completion
of practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)

Prerequisite: Heat Transfer, Fluid Mechanics

Course Objectives:
Course intend to deliver the Modeling, simulation fluid flow and heat transfer practical problem with the help of Ansys.

Course Outcomes:
SN Course Outcomes Cognitive
levels

as per bloom’s

Taxonomy

1 Apply CFD fundamental on simulation-based problem L1, L2, L3, L4

2 Able to use Ansys Fluent solver, Modeling, meshing, post processing part. L1, L2, L3, L4

3 Able to solve different types of fluid flow problem like Laminar flow, turbulent L1, L2, L3, L4
flow, Multiphase flow.

4 Analyze and optimization of fluid flow and heat transfer problem. L1, L2, L3, L4

90
Detailed Syllabus:

Cognitive levels as per

Module No. Topics Hrs
bloom’s Taxonomy

IntroductionWhat is CFD, Scope and Application

of CFD, Methods of Predictions like Experimental
1 and theoretical, Working of Commercial CFD 4 L1,L2,L3,L4
Software, Solution methodology-Preprocessing,
Solver, Post processing.

User Interface of ANSYS FLUENT

Fluent software user interface, importing mesh
2 2 L1,L2,L3,L4
files, checking mesh files, setting up units, scaling
geometry and standard grid operations

Preprocessing: Boundary and Cell Zone

3 conditions, Solver Basics, Heat transfer and 3 L1,L2,L3,L4
Turbulence modeling

Solver Mathematics and Post Processing modify

the mathematical algorithms to adjust accuracy
4 and speed of a CFD solution, judge the quality of 6 L1,L2,L3,L4
CFD results and represent them in a realistic and
informative manner.

91
Sr. Experiment topic Type of Experiments Hrs. Cognitive levels of
No attainment per
Bloom’s Taxonomy

1 File handling & working Design Basic Experiments 2 L1, L2

Modeler.

2 Modeling of 2D and 3D geometry by Basic Experiments 2 L1, L2, L3

design Modeler

3 Meshing Technique for CFD Basic Experiments 2 L1, L2, L3

problem.

4 Fluent user interface. Basic Experiments 2 L1, L2, L3

5 Simulation of fluid flow and heat Design Experiments 2 L1, L2, L3

transfer problem in mixing elbow.

6 Modeling and simulation of 2D Design Experiments 2 L1, L2, L3

laminar flow over cylinder.

7 Modeling Species Transport and Design Experiments 2 L1, L2, L3

Gaseous Combustion .
8 Modeling Evaporating Liquid Design Experiments 2 L1, L2, L3
Spray.
9 Case Study Case Study 2 L1, L2, L3, L4

10 Mini Project Mini Project 2 L1, L2, L3, L4

92
 B.E. Semester –VIII
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
TCET Autonomy Scheme (w. e. f. A.Y. 2019-20)

B.E.( All Branches ) B.E.(SEM : VIII)

Course Name : Research Based Learning IV Course Code : HSD-MERBL801
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Presentation Report Term Work
Theor Tutoria Practic Contact Credit AC AC TW
y l al Hours s
- - 2 2 2 25 25 50

Prerequisite: Subject knowledge, Domain knowledge

Course Objective: The course intends to create awareness about Intellectual Property Rights, provides an
opportunity to interact with industry and helps the students in publishing papers in Conferences and Journals and
encourages them to take part in consultancy projects.

Course Outcomes: Upon completion of the course student will be able to:

S. No. Course Outcomes Cognitive levels of

attainment as per

Bloom’s Taxonomy
1 Understand Intellectual Property Rights and its process in L1, L2
details
2 Interact with industry experts regarding their projects and L1, L2,L3
analyse their projects from industry view point
3 Evaluate their projects by publishing their project L1, L2, L3, L4,L5
research in Conferences and Journals

4 Write a research paper and understand technical writing. L1, L2, L3,L4,l5

93
 Detailed Syllabus:

Module Topics Contact Self- Cognitive levels of

No. Hrs. Study attainment as per
Hrs. Bloom’s Taxonomy

1 Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) awareness seminar 02 00 L1, L2

Seminar to be conducted by an industry expert who can
guide and motivate students to file IPR.
2 Industry linkage / visit related to product and 02 04 L1,L2,L3
domain/Establish start up
To understand the usability of their respective project
students can visit an Industry and conduct a survey and
generate a suitable report.
3 IPR filing/ Technology transfer to industry/Testing of 06 10 L1, L2, L3,L4,L5
product in real environment
Once the product is ready, it needs to be tested first in the
real environment where it will be deployed and used by the
end user. Once the product is tested ok, it can be deployed in
the industry in a large scale. IPR/Patent can be suitably filed
for the said product.

4 Publish paper at institute /national level conference 02 04 L1, L2, L3, L4,L5
/participate in competition /participate in funded
project/consultancy projects
The completed project with results can be converted into a
research paper and the same can be published in a
conference or journal. Students can participate in project
competitions at institute and university level. Also they can
participate in funded projects and consultancy projects.

12 18
Total Hrs.

Books and References:

S. No. Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

1. Blue Ocean Strategy W Chan Kim and Renee Harward Business School
Mauborgne Press 1st 2005

2. The E-Myth Revisited Michael E. Gerber Harper-Collins Publications 1st 2012

3. Intellectual Property Neeraj Pandey and Prentice Hall India 2nd 2014
Rights Kushdeep Dharni

94
 Online Resources:

S. No. Website Name URL Modules

covered
1. NPTEL https://nptel.ac.in/courses/110105139/

M1,M3
2. IPTSE https://iptse.com/future-of-intellectual-property-rights-in-
india/
M1, M3
3. NPTEL https://nptel.ac.in/courses/127105007/

M2

95
 BE SEMESTER VIII
Choice Based Credit Grading Scheme with Holistic Student Development (CBCGS- H 2019)
Under Autonomy Scheme (w.e.f. A.Y. 2020-21)
B.E. (Mechanical Engineering) B.E. SEM: VIII
Course Name: Product Design and Development Course Code: OEC 8025
Teaching Scheme (Program Specific) Examination Scheme (Formative/ Summative)
Modes of Teaching / Learning / Weightage Modes of Continuous Assessment / Evaluation
Hours Per Week Theory Practical/Oral Term Work Total
(100) (25) (25)
Theory Tutorial Practical Contact Credits IA ESE PR TW
Hours
3 - - - 3 25 75 - - 100

IA: In-Semester Assessment - Paper Duration – 1.5 Hours

ESE : End Semester Examination - Paper Duration - 3 Hours
The weightage of marks for continuous evaluation of Term work/Report: Formative (40%), Timely
completion of practical (40%) and Attendance (20%)
Prerequisite: None

Course Objectives:
Course intended to deliver the fundamental knowledge of basic principles involved in design of new
product and its development.
Course Outcomes:

Cognitive levels
SN Course Outcomes as per bloom’s
Taxonomy
1 Identify design and development process of industrial products, considering L1, L2

ergonomic requirements.

2 Explain market requirements and manufacturing aspects of industrial design. L1, L2, L3

3 Identify consumer products, functions and use. L1, L2, L3

4 Explain aesthetic concept, symmetry. L1, L2, L3, L4

5 Explain economic considerations, value analysis and cost reduction. L1, L2

6 Employ standard organization structure, standardization, record keeping. L1, L2, L4, L5,
L6

96
Detailed Syllabus

Cognitive
Module levels as
Topics Hrs.
No. per bloom’s
Taxonomy
Introduction-Approach to Industrial Design
Approach to industrial product based on idea generation and innovations to
meet the needs of the developing society. Design and development process of
industrial products, various steps such as creative process involved in idea
1 marketing, designers, mind- criticism, design process, creation. 4 L1, L2
Ergonomics and aesthetic requirements of product design, quality and
maintainability consideration in product design, Use of modeling technique,
prototype designs, conceptual design.
Industrial Product Design
General design situations, setting specifications, requirements and ratings, their
importance in the design, Study of market requirements and manufacturing
2 aspects of industrial designs. 8 L1, L2, L3
Aspects of ergonomic design of machine tools, testing equipment, instruments,
automobiles, process equipment etc. Convention of style, from and color of
industrial design.
Design of Consumer Product
Functions and use, standard and legal requirements, body dimensions. L1, L2, L3,
3 Ergonomic considerations, interpretation of information, conversions for style, 8 L4
forms, colors.
Aesthetic Concepts
Concept of unity order with variety, concept of purpose, style and environment,
Aesthetic expression of symmetry, balance, contrast and continuity, proportion,
rhythm, radiation.
4 Form and style of product: visual effect of line and form, mechanics of seeing, 8 L1, L2, L3
psychology of seeing, influence of line and form, Components of style, Basic
factors, effect of color on product appearance, color composition, conversion of
colors of engineering products.
Economic Considerations
L1, L2, L3,
Selection of material, Design for production, use of standardization, value 10
L4
5 analysis and cost reduction, maintenance aspects in design.
Design Organization
Organization Structure, Designer position, Drawing office procedure, L1, L2, L4,
6
Standardization, record keeping, legal procedure of Design patents. 7 L5,L6

97
Books and References:

SN Title Authors Publisher Edition Year

1 Industrial Design for W. H. Mayall London Hiffee books Ltd - 1967

Engineers

2 Problems of Product Hearn Buck Pergamon Press - -

Design and Development

3 Industrial Designs in Charles H. Fluerichem - - -

Engineering

4 Material of Invention: Ezio Manzini The MIT Press - 1989

Materials and Design

5 The Science of Percy H. Hill Holt, Rinehart and - 1970

Engineering Design Winston Publication

Online References:

Sr.No. Website Name URL Modules Covered

1 https://nptel.ac.in https://nptel.ac.in/courses M1-M6